CN1163000A - Display panel with electrically controlled waveguide routing - Google Patents
Display panel with electrically controlled waveguide routing Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- CN1163000A CN1163000A CN 95194990 CN95194990A CN1163000A CN 1163000 A CN1163000 A CN 1163000A CN 95194990 CN95194990 CN 95194990 CN 95194990 A CN95194990 A CN 95194990A CN 1163000 A CN1163000 A CN 1163000A
- Authority
- CN
- China
- Prior art keywords
- waveguide
- light
- grating
- pixel
- plane
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Images
Landscapes
- Mechanical Light Control Or Optical Switches (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本发明是关于利用电场控制来控制能量的传输(特别是光束)的装置(特别是一些光学设置)。进一步说,本发明关于被极化的结构(包括定期被极化的结构)与电极,在电极之间提供控制电场下可允许光能控制传输。本发明还涉及平面板光学显示器的全新类型。The present invention relates to devices (particularly some optical arrangements) for controlling the delivery of energy (particularly light beams) using electric field control. Further, the present invention relates to polarized structures (including periodically polarized structures) and electrodes that allow controlled transmission of light energy by providing a controlled electric field between the electrodes. The invention also relates to an entirely new class of flat panel optical displays.
图1描绘一种可电-光切换的光栅的现有技术,在这种结构中,周期性成型的电极做为可形成光栅的元件,下文将说明下层材料未成型的电极结构。一输入光束12被耦连至一电-光活性材料2而电-光活性材料2包含一种可光控的永久光栅6。被耦连至上述光栅电极的电压源10被切断时,上述输入光束持续传输穿过上述材料而形成输出光束16。当光栅电极电压源关闭,输入光束继续传播通过材料以形成输出光束16。当光栅控制电压源被接通,在该材料中产生一个折射率调制光栅,输入光束的一部分耦连至一反射输出光束14。该材料有一个电光活性极化区域4(有单一的畴),且有相同的极性贯穿有极结构。一个第一电极6与一个第二电极7在基片的一个共同面18上被组成叉指式结构。当在电极之间供应电压时,电场的垂直分量(沿着光束12的路径)交错地有相反的讯号,以产生交错的正与负索引变换从而形成一个光栅。两个导体8将电压源耦连于该二电极之间,这些电压源控制光栅的强度。Figure 1 depicts a prior art electro-optic switchable grating. In this structure, periodically shaped electrodes are used as the elements that can form the grating. The structure of the electrode without the underlying material will be described below. An
EO与使用均匀基片和成型电极压电装置的现有技术的第二个普遍问题是被激励的电场随着与电极的距离增加而迅速衰退。图形在其与电极的距离等于图形的特性尺寸时几乎完全被被洗掉。在光栅中这个问题更严重,因为其特性尺寸很小。由叉指式结构电极所形成的现有光栅仅能在浅表面层提供被调制效应。EO结构与直径大于特性尺寸的波导之互动很弱。在较高次的互动设备之中可使用较长的光栅周期,上述分辨率的缺乏再度严重地限制了效率。现有技术的有效互动的最小光栅长度约为10微米。需要一种方法以维持基于小结构的EO设备的效率,不管高的纵横比(光束的宽度比特性尺寸所产生的比值)。需要一种可切换的成型结构以持续于波导的整段宽度并甚至大于未被引导的光束。A second general problem with EO and prior art piezoelectric devices using uniform substrates and shaped electrodes is that the excited electric field decays rapidly with increasing distance from the electrodes. The pattern is almost completely washed out when its distance from the electrode is equal to the characteristic size of the pattern. This problem is exacerbated in gratings because of their small feature size. Existing gratings formed by interdigitated electrodes can only provide modulated effects in shallow surface layers. The EO structure interacts weakly with waveguides whose diameter is larger than the characteristic size. In higher order interactive devices where longer grating periods are available, this lack of resolution again severely limits efficiency. The minimum grating length for effective interaction of the prior art is about 10 microns. A method is needed to maintain the efficiency of EO devices based on small structures despite high aspect ratios (the resulting ratio of the width of the beam to the characteristic size). There is a need for a switchable shaped structure that lasts the full width of the waveguide and is even larger than the unguided beam.
目前有一些相关的现有技术使用光源耦连波导结构以应用在显示器方面。At present, there are some related prior art that use a light source coupled to a waveguide structure for application in displays.
维特南(J.Viitanem)和雷卡拉(J.Lekkala)在1993年的SPIE第1976期第293至302页发表的“光线液晶显示器”、“高分辨力影像”与其参考资料)回顾使用导波原理耦连液晶切换的平面显示器的特征,其中讨论了许多设计,所有的设计有后述之共同设计原则。一个被调制的光源机械式地扫描通过一列电-光活性波导,这些波导形成显示器的列元素。一列平行的电极形成显示器的行位置,光从波导被导出且被散射至在使用电-光效应的一行空间位的观察者,因此形成像素的二维阵列被形成。J. Viitanem and J. Lekkala, SPIE No. 1976, pp. 293-302, 1993, "Ray Liquid Crystal Displays", "High-Resolution Imaging" and their references) review the use of guided wave Principles Coupled liquid crystal switching features of flat panel displays, where a number of designs are discussed, all of which share the common design principles described below. A modulated light source is mechanically scanned through an array of electro-optical active waveguides that form the column elements of the display. A column of parallel electrodes forms the row positions of the display, light is guided from the waveguide and scattered to the viewer at a row position using the electro-optic effect, thus forming a two-dimensional array of pixels is formed.
在此现有技术中,光是被限制在由光芯材料组成的波导中而光芯材料之折射折射率大于周围覆盖材料。通常,被限制在该芯中之光在所需的空间位置被迫“漏”出波导的芯之外。由于该芯与被覆材料之间的折射率差异沿某一距离以电-光方式降低因而破坏了波导效应,电-光活性材料在原理上可在芯内(以降低折射率)或在被覆材料内(以增加折射率,在维特南等人的文献中被覆材料为活性)。在某些文献中,破坏波导效应的技术叫做“波导栓(waveguide tap)”。In this prior art, light is confined in a waveguide consisting of a core material having a higher refractive index than the surrounding cladding material. Typically, light confined in the core is forced to "leak" out of the core of the waveguide at desired spatial locations. Since the difference in refractive index between the core and cladding material decreases electro-optically along a certain distance thus destroying the waveguide effect, electro-optical active materials could in principle be in the core (to lower the refractive index) or in the cladding material Inside (to increase the refractive index, the coating material is active in Wittnam et al.). In some literature, the technique of breaking the waveguide effect is called "waveguide tap".
“漏”出的光经一自由空间衍射到一散射中心,在散射中心光朝向观察者以形成显示器之像索。从已破坏波导漏出的光在空间上再受限,反而依标准衍射理论在区域内扩张,因为光是由已破坏波导片段处向外传播,光的二维扩张造成三个问题。The "leaked" light diffracts through a free space to a scattering center where it is directed toward the viewer to form the image cable of the display. The light leaking from the broken waveguide is then spatially confined, but instead expands in the region according to the standard diffraction theory, because the light propagates outward from the broken waveguide segment. The two-dimensional expansion of the light causes three problems.
首先,由于先前限制在波导内光的衍射角度很小,造成较长的交互作用长度(光能的明显分量在可以朝向观看者散射之前必须离开芯区),这将会限制散射中心的间隔要大于一毫米,此一效应导致低分辨率显示器有低像素充填密度。First, the long interaction length (a significant component of the light energy has to leave the core before it can scatter toward the viewer) due to the small diffraction angle of light previously confined within the waveguide will limit the spacing of the scattering centers to Above one millimeter, this effect leads to low pixel packing densities in low resolution displays.
第二点,光束的二维扩张使其实质上不可能在散射中心收集较大分量并使其朝向观察者,造成低功率效率。Second, the two-dimensional expansion of the beam makes it virtually impossible to collect a larger component at the scattering center and direct it toward the observer, resulting in low power efficiency.
第三点,光束的二维扩张造成大的散射中心,因而使像素尺寸变大,也降低显示器分辨率。Thirdly, the two-dimensional expansion of the beam creates large scattering centers, thereby increasing the pixel size and reducing the resolution of the display.
像素大间隔的结果是必须以长波导长度来覆盖用于显示器的足够像素,之后显示器必须在波导效应损失大的区域内操作,再度导致效率之降低。因此,现有设计缺点在于低像素填充密度、大像素尺寸与低功率效率。A consequence of the large spacing of the pixels is that long waveguide lengths must be used to cover enough pixels for the display, and then the display must operate in regions with large losses due to waveguide effects, again resulting in reduced efficiency. Therefore, existing designs suffer from low pixel packing density, large pixel size, and low power efficiency.
解决这些问题所需的就是发展一种密实、有效率、低损耗的电-光波导开关,其使从列波导出来之整个光束定向并推入一窄立体角,使切换光束可有效地被导向一像素散射中心或进入另一个波导(连接另一散射中心),此举将光束凝聚在散射中心,并使显示器效率及像素填充密度到最大。What is needed to solve these problems is the development of a compact, efficient, low-loss electro-optical waveguide switch that orients and pushes the entire beam from the column waveguide into a narrow solid angle so that the switched beam can be efficiently directed A pixel scatter center or enter another waveguide (connecting to another scatter center), which concentrates the beam at the scatter center and maximizes display efficiency and pixel packing density.
第5106181号美国专利(1992年4月)与第5009483号美国专利(1991年4月),洛克威尔三世(Rockwell III)之“光波导显示器系统”提示另一种使用“波导栓”方法的实施例。洛克威尔三世提示一种显示器,其使用波导来将光导引在同时的列中。光从波导被连到被覆层,电-光效应被使用在覆层内。虽然此结构不同于上述维特南等人所提示者,此显示器的缺点也是低像素密度和效率不佳。U.S. Patent No. 5,106,181 (April 1992) and U.S. Patent No. 5,009,483 (April 1991), "Optical Waveguide Display System" to Rockwell III suggest another approach using the "Waveguide Plug" approach. Example. Rockwell III suggests a display that uses waveguides to direct light in simultaneous columns. Light is connected from the waveguide to the cladding, and the electro-optical effect is used within the cladding. Although this structure is different from that suggested by Wittnen et al. above, the disadvantage of this display is also low pixel density and poor efficiency.
Tarui等人在名称为“平显示器面板”的第5045847号美国专利(1991年9月)提示“波导栓”方法的另一种版本,其使用一种平面波导结构且有一个由氮化硅和硅散布层组成的层化芯材料。由激光二极管源而来的光被限制在一面波导内,直到有一电压跨过波导的芯为止。由电压使芯折射率降低,因而使光可以从波导结构离开。这种显示器有上述缺点,且效率不佳,因为所有的像素被同时照明,但是一次只有一像素被激励,因此,无论何时,光只有一小部分被导向观察者。U.S. Patent No. 5,045,847 (September 1991) to Tarui et al. entitled "Flat Display Panel" suggests another version of the "waveguide plug" approach using a planar waveguide structure with a Layered core material composed of interspersed layers of silicon. Light from a laser diode source is confined within a waveguide until a voltage is applied across the core of the waveguide. The core refractive index is lowered by the voltage, thus allowing light to escape from the waveguide structure. Such displays suffer from the disadvantages mentioned above and are not efficient because all pixels are illuminated simultaneously, but only one pixel is activated at a time, so only a fraction of the light is directed toward the viewer at any one time.
尼尔森(Nelson)在名称为“使用漏光导的平面板显示器”的第5083120号美国专利中(1992年1月)显示一种漏光导被用来作为一显示器后景光。从光源(例如一激光二极管)而来之光被导入光导,以在显示器内提供一行的均匀照明。背景光与一列铁电液晶光闸联合以制造显示器像素。此时,波导仅被用来取代LCD显示器常用的萤光而无作用的“波导栓”或开关。Nelson in US Patent No. 5,083,120 (January 1992) entitled "Flat Panel Display Using Leaky Light Guides" shows a leaky light guide used as a display background light. Light from a light source, such as a laser diode, is directed into the light guide to provide uniform illumination of a row within the display. The backlight is combined with an array of ferroelectric liquid crystal shutters to create display pixels. At this time, the waveguide is only used to replace the fluorescent "waveguide plug" or switch commonly used in LCD displays.
西村等人在名称为“在液态芯波导之中使用热成形泡的光显示器”的第4640592号美国专利(1987年2月)中提出一种以多条液体充填的多光线或波导作为行显示器,这些波导被设在一系列加热电极上方。当加热器通电时,在波导芯内形成泡泡,因此将光散射向观察者。当调制的激光机械式地依序扫描每一行波导即形成显示器影像。即使此一方法将小散射中心置入芯区中而解决了“波导栓”方法所导致的一些问题,加热过程的时序将使显示器没有足够快的架构速率来显示动态影像,在此设计中未使用波导开关。Nishimura et al. in U.S. Patent No. 4,640,592 (February 1987) entitled "Optical Displays Using Thermoformed Bubbles in Liquid Core Waveguides" propose a line display with multiple liquid-filled lines or waveguides , these waveguides are positioned above a series of heating electrodes. When the heater is energized, bubbles form within the waveguide core, thus scattering light towards the observer. When the modulated laser mechanically scans each row of waveguides sequentially, a display image is formed. Even if this approach solves some of the problems caused by the "waveguide plug" approach by placing small scattering centers in the core, the timing of the heating process will not allow the display to have a frame rate fast enough to display a moving image, which is not present in this design. Use waveguide switches.
现有的技术都使用光源直接激励的平行输入波导,因为现有技术所知的切换机械无法将从供应波导出来的光有效的切换进入所要的行波导,造成维特南等人及西村等人的笨重波导束照明扫描装置、洛克威尔三世的同时波导束照明、Tarui等人的平面波导激励以及尼尔森和西村等人的同时二极管阵列照明。然而一个显示器的最简单结构(光在该处被耦连进入单一波导管且定向到像素)至少需要两个连续开关以照明像素的全二维阵列,其中一个选择行波导而另一个选择像素。现有技术虽然可以较困难地制造像素开关,然而必须将波导管连接的行开关不可能有上述波导栓。波导之间的耦连效率低,因为切换区内波导破坏后光在二维衍射扩散,因而需要一个开关以将切换光有效率地凝聚进入另一波导。Existing technologies all use parallel input waveguides directly excited by the light source, because the switching mechanism known in the prior art cannot effectively switch the light from the supply waveguide into the desired traveling waveguide, resulting in Wittnan et al. and Nishimura et al. Bulky waveguide beam illumination scanning setup, simultaneous waveguide beam illumination by Rockwell III, planar waveguide excitation by Tarui et al., and simultaneous diode array illumination by Nelson and Nishimura et al. Yet the simplest structure of a display (where light is coupled into a single waveguide and directed to the pixels) requires at least two consecutive switches to illuminate the full two-dimensional array of pixels, one of which selects the row waveguide and the other selects the pixel. Although it is relatively difficult to manufacture pixel switches in the prior art, the row switches that must be connected with waveguides cannot have the above-mentioned waveguide plugs. The coupling efficiency between the waveguides is low, because the light diffracts and diffuses in two dimensions after the waveguide is broken in the switching region, so a switch is needed to efficiently condense the switching light into another waveguide.
贝克(Becker)和张氏(Chang)的集成光频波导不能用来做显示器,因为它未包括“波导栓”或其他方法让在波导中传播的光射向在像素格式前的观察者。此外,开关的制造是使用先前所述(配合图1所示)的叉指式电极而且未包含任何成形有极结构。此开关设计有一高切换介入损失,因此不能应用于在同一波导上需要有大量开关之场合,例如显示器或是通信应用的开关数据汇流排。The integrated optical frequency waveguide of Becker and Chang cannot be used as a display because it does not include a "waveguide plug" or other means to direct the light propagating in the waveguide to the viewer in front of the pixel format. Furthermore, the switch was fabricated using interdigitated electrodes as previously described (shown in conjunction with FIG. 1 ) and did not include any shaped polar structures. This switch design has a high switching insertion loss, so it cannot be used in applications that require a large number of switches on the same waveguide, such as displays or switching data buses for communication applications.
现有技术的问题可摘要如下:(1)由于大像素间隔无法制造小型高分辨率显示器,(2)低效率的“波导栓”限制了显示器的亮度,(3)由于光损耗导致低功率效率,以及(4)功率无法有效地切换到另一波导。The problems of the prior art can be summarized as follows: (1) small high-resolution displays cannot be fabricated due to large pixel spacing, (2) inefficient "waveguide plugs" limit the brightness of the display, (3) low power efficiency due to optical losses , and (4) the power cannot be effectively switched to another waveguide.
根据本发明之平面板显示器是基于一新颖切换技术以将激光在一组光波导中定向并将光耦连向观察者,切换技术是基于有极电-光结构。此显示器技术为多功能,足以适应从小型高分辨率电子计算机显示器到高分辨力电视格式的大型屏幕显示器的多项应用。本发明将可见半导体二极管激光器源的高亮度和功率效率与新波导电-光切换技术组合,以形成高亮度光发射像素的浓密二维可编址阵列。The flat panel display according to the invention is based on a novel switching technique to direct the laser light in a set of optical waveguides and couple the light to the viewer, the switching technique is based on polarized electro-optic structures. This display technology is versatile enough to be used in many applications from small high resolution electronic computer monitors to large screen displays in high definition television format. The present invention combines the high brightness and power efficiency of visible semiconductor diode laser sources with novel waveguide-to-optic switching techniques to form dense two-dimensional addressable arrays of high-brightness light-emitting pixels.
本发明提供一种全固态、全色高分辨率显示器、可用于显示电子计算机产生的信息和全动态HDTV,以得到高性能且可用电池驱动的高亮度显示器。本发明亦提供可手提的小型高分辨率显示器。The present invention provides an all-solid-state, full-color, high-resolution display, which can be used to display information generated by electronic computers and full-motion HDTV, so as to obtain a high-brightness display with high performance and can be driven by batteries. The invention also provides a portable small high-resolution display.
在以下详细说明及所附图示配合下将可对本发明有进一步了解。With the cooperation of the following detailed description and the accompanying drawings, the present invention can be further understood.
图示说明Illustration
图1是一个根据现有技术的带有叉指式电极的调制器;Figure 1 is a modulator with interdigitated electrodes according to the prior art;
图2是根据本发明的用于与体光束相互作用的可切换光栅的一种一般化的实施例;Figure 2 is a generalized embodiment of a switchable grating for interacting with a volume beam according to the present invention;
图3是一个利用可切换光栅的一种波导反向反射器的实施例;Figure 3 is an embodiment of a waveguide retroreflector utilizing a switchable grating;
图4是一个用于具有三个设置在晶体的同一表面上电极的反向反射装置的电极构造的实施例;Figure 4 is an embodiment of an electrode configuration for a retroreflective device having three electrodes disposed on the same surface of the crystal;
图5是一个用于同样装置的电极构造的实施例,其中在晶体的相同表面上设置着两个电极;Figure 5 is an example of an electrode configuration for the same device, wherein two electrodes are arranged on the same surface of the crystal;
图6是一个用于同样装置的电极构造的实施例,其中具有锥形间隔的三个电极设置在晶体的相同表面上;Figure 6 is an example of an electrode configuration for the same device, where three electrodes with tapered spacing are placed on the same surface of the crystal;
图7是一个极化的交叉波导耦连器的T-形实施例;Figure 7 is a T-shaped embodiment of a polarized cross-waveguide coupler;
图8是一个极化的交叉波导耦连器的X-形实施例;Figure 8 is an X-shaped embodiment of a polarized cross-waveguide coupler;
图9是一个极化的波导输出耦连器的实施例,输出到波导平面之外;Figure 9 is an embodiment of a polarized waveguide output coupler outputting out of the plane of the waveguide;
图10是一个平行波导极化定向耦连器的实施例;Figure 10 is an embodiment of a parallel waveguide polarized directional coupler;
图11是显示了替代的输入和输出波型分布的X交叉波导耦连器的顶视图;Figure 11 is a top view of an X-crossed waveguide coupler showing alternate input and output mode distributions;
图12是一个具有用锥形电极间隙激励的锥形耦连区几何形状的X交叉波导耦连器的实施例;Figure 12 is an embodiment of an X-crossed waveguide coupler having a tapered coupling region geometry excited with a tapered electrode gap;
图13是一个具有一般化的耦连区几何形状和电极图形的X交叉波导耦连器的实施例;Figure 13 is an embodiment of an X-cross waveguide coupler with generalized coupling region geometry and electrode pattern;
图14是一个可调谐频率极化电光反向反射器的块型光学实施例;Figure 14 is a bulk optical embodiment of a tunable frequency polarized electro-optic retroreflector;
图15是一个可调谐频率极化电光反向反射器的波导实施例;Figure 15 is a waveguide embodiment of a tunable frequency polarized electro-optic retroreflector;
图16是具有电光镀层和极化光栅和镀层的单独激励的可调谐频率电光反向反射器的块型光学实施例;Figure 16 is a bulk optical embodiment of an individually actuated frequency tunable electro-optic retroreflector with electro-optic coatings and polarizing gratings and coatings;
图17是一个倍频极化的电光反向反射器的波导实施例;Fig. 17 is the waveguide embodiment of the electro-optic retro-reflector of a frequency doubling polarization;
图18是一个相移极化光栅的说明图;Figure 18 is an explanatory diagram of a phase-shifted polarization grating;
图19是一个多周期光栅反射器的实施例;Figure 19 is an embodiment of a multi-period grating reflector;
图20是一个具有多周期性和不同自由频谱范围的两种装置的频率响应曲线的说明图;Figure 20 is an illustration of the frequency response curves of two devices with multiple periods and different free spectral ranges;
图21是一个双光栅可调谐反射器的实施例;Figure 21 is an embodiment of a double grating tunable reflector;
图22是一个由具有可调节光路长度的双光栅构成的集成校准器的示意说明图;Figure 22 is a schematic illustration of an integrated collimator consisting of dual gratings with adjustable optical path length;
图23是一个带有移相器的双光栅可切换Y形接头的实施例;Figure 23 is an embodiment of a double grating switchable Y-shaped joint with a phase shifter;
图24是一个极化波导模式变换器的实施例;Figure 24 is an embodiment of a polarized waveguide mode converter;
图25是一个使用波导模式变换器的波导路由器的实施例;Figure 25 is an embodiment of a waveguide router using waveguide mode converters;
图26是一个可切换的平行波导谐振器的实施例;Figure 26 is an embodiment of a switchable parallel waveguide resonator;
图27是一个三臂波导校准器的实施例;Fig. 27 is the embodiment of a three-arm waveguide etalon;
图28是一个环形波导校准器的实施例;Figure 28 is an embodiment of a ring waveguide calibrator;
图29A是一个具有可控极化中间结构的调制器/衰减器的实施例;Figure 29A is an embodiment of a modulator/attenuator with a controllable polarization intermediate structure;
图29B是一个可调节透镜结构的实施例;Figure 29B is an embodiment of an adjustable lens structure;
图30是一个具有可切换极化波导短截段的极化的全内反射(TIR)波导切换器的实施例;Figure 30 is an embodiment of a polarized total internal reflection (TIR) waveguide switcher with switchable polarized waveguide stubs;
图31是一个双TIR波导切换器的实施例;Fig. 31 is the embodiment of a double TIR waveguide switcher;
图32是一个具有可切换非极化波导短截段的TIR电切换波束导向器的实施例;Figure 32 is an embodiment of a TIR electrically switchable beam director with switchable non-polarized waveguide stubs;
图33是一个不带TIR的二位置极化波导路由器的实施例;Figure 33 is an embodiment of a two-position polarized waveguide router without TIR;
图34是一个具有50%切换器组装密度的极化的TIR切换器阵列的实施例;Figure 34 is an embodiment of a polarized TIR switch array with 50% switch packing density;
图35是一个具有100%切换器密度的极化的TIR切换器阵列的实施例;Figure 35 is an embodiment of a polarized TIR switch array with 100% switch density;
图36是一个用于具有永久调谐反射镜和不对称损耗交叉区的高密度组装结构的双波导结构的实施例;Figure 36 is an embodiment of a dual waveguide structure for a high density packed structure with permanently tuned mirrors and asymmetric lossy intersection regions;
图37是一个具有TIR切换器的可切换波导阵列的实施例;Figure 37 is an embodiment of a switchable waveguide array with a TIR switch;
图38是一个具有光栅切换器的可切换波导阵列的实施例;Figure 38 is an embodiment of a switchable waveguide array with a grating switcher;
图39A是一个带有系统控制线的m×m通信转接阵列的实施例;FIG. 39A is an embodiment of an m×m communication switching array with system control lines;
图39B是一个具有WDM能力的3×3转接阵列的实施例;FIG. 39B is an embodiment of a 3×3 switch array with WDM capability;
图40是一个带有像素元件的二维转接阵列的实施例;Figure 40 is an embodiment of a two-dimensional via array with pixel elements;
图41是一个带有耦连于数据轨迹的像素元件的一维转接阵列的实施例;Figure 41 is an embodiment of a one-dimensional via array with pixel elements coupled to data traces;
图42是一个利用可选择光栅反射器部分和一个检测器阵列的可切换光谱分析仪的实施例;Figure 42 is an embodiment of a switchable optical spectrum analyzer utilizing selectable grating reflector sections and a detector array;
图43是一个极化的声多层干涉仪结构的示意图;Figure 43 is a schematic diagram of a polarized acoustic multilayer interferometer structure;
图44是一个极化的声换能器的实施例;Figure 44 is an embodiment of a polarized acoustic transducer;
图45是一个多频光波的可调谐相干检波器的实施例;Figure 45 is an embodiment of a tunable coherent detector for multi-frequency light waves;
图46是一个利用单极化区的低损耗可切换波导分束器的实施例;Figure 46 is an embodiment of a low-loss switchable waveguide beamsplitter utilizing a single polarization region;
图47是一个利用多极化区的低损耗可切换波导分束器的实施例;Figure 47 is an embodiment of a low-loss switchable waveguide beamsplitter utilizing multiple polarization regions;
图48是一个用于1×3波导分束器的关键设计要素的示意图;Figure 48 is a schematic diagram of key design elements for a 1 x 3 waveguide beam splitter;
图49是一个显示为可调节相控阵调制器的活性波导装置的多层堆栈;Figure 49 is a multilayer stack of active waveguide devices shown as adjustable phased array modulators;
图50是一个现有技术的可调节波导衰减器的实施例;Figure 50 is an embodiment of a prior art adjustable waveguide attenuator;
图51是一个多极化段可调节波导衰减器的实施例;Figure 51 is an embodiment of a multi-polarization segment adjustable waveguide attenuator;
图52是一个带有利用角度展宽极化光栅展宽频带的结构的实施例;Figure 52 is an embodiment with a structure that utilizes an angularly broadened polarization grating to broaden the frequency band;
图53是一个具有利用曲线波导展宽频带的结构的实施例;Figure 53 is an embodiment with a structure that utilizes a curved waveguide to broaden the frequency band;
图54是一个可电控极化透镜的实施例。Figure 54 is an embodiment of an electrically controllable polarizing lens.
图55是一个使用了周期性极化反射器的激光反馈装置的实施例。Figure 55 is an embodiment of a laser feedback device using a periodically polarized reflector.
图56是一个使用了周期性极化波导反射器的激光反馈装置的实施例。Figure 56 is an embodiment of a laser feedback device using periodically polarized waveguide reflectors.
图57是一个使用了多个被切换的反馈光栅的激光反馈装置的实施例。Figure 57 is an embodiment of a laser feedback device using multiple switched feedback gratings.
图58是一个波长调谐可调聚焦系统的实施例。Figure 58 is an embodiment of a wavelength tunable tunable focusing system.
图59介绍根据本发明的显示器装置的一般化实施例图。Figure 59 presents a diagram of a generalized embodiment of a display device according to the present invention.
图60是图59中一般化实施例的剖面图。FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the generalized embodiment of FIG. 59. FIG.
图61是一个三色光束组合器的实施例图。Fig. 61 is a diagram of an embodiment of a three-color beam combiner.
图62是一平面外反射器的实施例图,其中的镜射通过基片。Figure 62 is a diagram of an embodiment of an out-of-plane reflector where the mirror is reflected through the substrate.
图63是一平面外反射器的实施例图,其中的发散和漫反射通过基片。Figure 63 is a diagram of an embodiment of an out-of-plane reflector with divergent and diffuse reflection through a substrate.
图64是一平面外反射器的实施例图,其中的镜射从基片表面离开。Figure 64 is a diagram of an embodiment of an out-of-plane reflector where the reflection is off the surface of the substrate.
图65是一平面外反射器的实施例图,其中的发散和漫反射从基片表面离开。Figure 65 is a diagram of an embodiment of an out-of-plane reflector where the divergent and diffuse reflections are away from the substrate surface.
图66是一组合成图50或图51的衰减器结构的另一种像素开关结构实施例图。FIG. 66 is a diagram of another embodiment of a pixel switch structure combined with the attenuator structure in FIG. 50 or FIG. 51 .
图67是一平面外光栅反射器的实施例图。Figure 67 is a diagram of an embodiment of an out-of-plane grating reflector.
图68是用于显示器像素的吸收器/偏导器光遮的实施例图,其中示出光遮和像素的相对设置。68 is a diagram of an embodiment of an absorber/deflector light shield for a display pixel showing the relative placement of the light shield and the pixel.
图69是一吸收器/偏导器光遮的实施例图,其将背景光偏导出基片表面。Figure 69 is a diagram of an embodiment of an absorber/deflector light shield that deflects ambient light away from the substrate surface.
图70是一吸收器/偏导器光遮的实施例图,其将背景光偏导入基片。Figure 70 is a diagram of an embodiment of an absorber/deflector light shield that polarizes background light into a substrate.
图71是一吸收器/偏导器光遮的实施例图,其实质上吸收背景光。Figure 71 is a diagram of an embodiment of an absorber/deflector light shield that substantially absorbs background light.
图72是用于驱动类似于图34的常态二维转接阵列的电极图形的一部分的实施例图。FIG. 72 is a diagram of an embodiment of a part of an electrode pattern for driving a normal two-dimensional via array similar to FIG. 34 .
图73是在一多层堆叠波导分配结构中的平面外开关的实施例图,其将反射光导入基片中。Figure 73 is a diagram of an embodiment of an out-of-plane switch in a multilayer stacked waveguide distribution structure that directs reflected light into the substrate.
图74是在一多层堆叠波导分配结构中的平面外开关的实施例图,其将反射光导入基片平面。Figure 74 is a diagram of an embodiment of an out-of-plane switch in a multilayer stacked waveguide distribution structure that directs reflected light into the plane of the substrate.
图75是-90°光栅波导开关的实施例图,其中系以三输入波导形式介绍。Fig. 75 is a diagram of an embodiment of a -90° grating waveguide switch, which is introduced in the form of a three-input waveguide.
图76是一倾斜显示器的实施例图。Figure 76 is a diagram of an embodiment of a tilting display.
图77是有多个平行供应波导、多个部分反射器以及调谐器的光定向结构的实施例图。Figure 77 is a diagram of an embodiment of a light directing structure with multiple parallel supply waveguides, multiple partial reflectors, and tuners.
图78是由一激光阵列供应的显示器结构图。Figure 78 is a structural diagram of a display supplied by a laser array.
图79是耦连到叉指式波导的多激光阵列的实施例图。Figure 79 is a diagram of an embodiment of a multi-laser array coupled to an interdigitated waveguide.
图80是平面外波导的耦连实施例图。Figure 80 is a diagram of a coupling embodiment of an out-of-plane waveguide.
图81是三维显示器所用的双极化显示器结构的实施例图。Fig. 81 is a diagram of an embodiment of a dual-polarized display structure used in a three-dimensional display.
本应用的权利要求具体地涉及到与图59-81所描述的结构。参考图2,图2显示了本发明的装置11的一般化的实施例,它是一个图形化极化的介电装置。这个装置基本上是一个可电控的堆栈式介电光能变向器,或更简捷地讲,是一个可电切换的反射镜。在一个优选的实施例中,本发明是一个在铌酸锂铁电晶体20中的块状光反射器,电控的切换元件是一个极化的光栅22,它是由36和38两种类型的交替排列的极化的畴组成的。The claims of this application relate specifically to the structures described in FIGS. 59-81. Referring to Figure 2, there is shown a generalized embodiment of the device 11 of the present invention, which is a patterned polarized dielectric device. The device is basically an electrically controllable stacked dielectric light energy redirector, or more simply, an electrically switchable mirror. In a preferred embodiment, the present invention is a bulk photoreflector in a lithium niobate ferroelectric crystal 20, the electronically controlled switching element is a polarized grating 22, which is composed of two types 36 and 38 composed of alternating polarized domains.
一个畴——它可以是任何形状或尺寸的——是一个其中某些材料特性是近似不变的物理区域。一个极化的畴是一种材料中的一个区域,其中分子团具有一种方向性,并且这些分子团基本上对准(或部分地对准),或近似对准一个被称为极化方向的方向。有许多类型的畴,它们包括:在不同方向上对准的原子结构的畴,具有各种像非线性活性或电光系数之类的改变的参数的对准的分子或原子结构的畴,具有非优先定向的原子结构的畴,由不同电极激活的区域,就像用局部电极极化的聚合物和熔融二氧化硅情况下发生的在整个区域上极化方向系统地改变的极化区域所限定的畴,随机定向分子的畴,和扩大范围的,随机畴结构:在畴内随机极化的子畴的畴。一个极化结构是各个单独的畴的集合。图形化的极化的区域是材料中的一种区域,其中区域内的畴被按照空间图形极化为不止一种畴类型。根据极化方法的性质,极化后的图形与极化工艺过程中使用的施加的图形之间可能存在着系统偏差。图形的边界也可能有些不规则,并且可能不完全与施加的图形相同,特别是如果极化加工没有完全处于控制之下时。由于使用电场来控制装置,所以把该装置作为一种图形化的极化介电质加以说明,因此材料必须是介电的,以便能经受所需的电场而不会损坏。典型的极化过程也是用一个材料必须能够承受的电场来完成的。一般地讲,我们用介电的来表示材料对使用中所需最小电场的承受能力。A domain—which can be of any shape or size—is a physical region in which certain material properties are approximately constant. A polarized domain is a region in a material in which molecular groups have a directionality and are substantially aligned (or partially aligned), or approximately aligned, in a direction known as the polarization direction direction. There are many types of domains, they include: domains of atomic structures aligned in different directions, domains of molecular or atomic structures aligned with various parameters like nonlinear activity or electro-optical coefficients, domains of non-linear Domains of preferentially oriented atomic structure, defined by regions activated by different electrodes, as occurs in the case of polymers and fused silica polarized with local electrodes, where the polarization direction changes systematically over the entire region domains, domains of randomly oriented molecules, and extended-range, random domain structures: domains of randomly polarized subdomains within a domain. A polarized structure is a collection of individual domains. A patterned polarized region is a region in a material in which the domains within the region are polarized into more than one domain type in a spatial pattern. Depending on the nature of the poling method, there may be systematic deviations between the polarized pattern and the applied pattern used during the poling process. The borders of the pattern may also be somewhat irregular and may not be exactly the same as the applied pattern, especially if the polarization process is not fully under control. Since the device is controlled using an electric field, the device is described as a patterned polarized dielectric, so the material must be dielectric in order to withstand the required electric field without damage. The typical poling process is also done with an electric field that the material must be able to withstand. Generally speaking, we use dielectric to indicate the ability of a material to withstand the minimum electric field required in use.
在操作中,输入光束40沿一个光轴入射到晶体上并穿过晶体。光轴垂直于光束的相前,并且是由传播中的光束在波阵面上的亮度分布的平均位置确定的。光轴在均匀材料中是直线,但在包括曲线型波导管,非均匀介质等几种情况中,以及在反射或衍射结构中可能弯曲。输入光束40优选在整个晶体长度上有足够小的光斑尺寸21,使得它不会被晶体穿孔,造成不希望的功率损耗和波型变换。在如图2所示的块状相互作用装置中,畴36和38必须穿透基片20足够的距离,使得它们可以至少与输入光束40的一部分相互交叠。光栅22相对于输入光束40横向设置。这表示光栅22的平面34横向于输入光束40的轴线。我们说两根线(或一根线和一个平面,或两个平面)是相互横向的意思是它们不平行。由于光栅横向于光束40,光束至少穿过光栅22的结构的一部分。In operation, an input beam 40 is incident on the crystal along an optical axis and passes through the crystal. The optical axis is perpendicular to the phase front of the beam and is determined by the average position of the brightness distribution of the propagating beam on the wavefront. The optical axis is straight in homogeneous materials, but may be curved in several cases including curved waveguides, inhomogeneous media, and in reflective or diffractive structures. The input beam 40 preferably has a sufficiently small spot size 21 over the entire crystal length so that it is not perforated by the crystal, causing undesired power loss and mode conversion. In a bulk interaction device as shown in FIG. 2, the domains 36 and 38 must penetrate the substrate 20 a sufficient distance so that they overlap each other with at least a portion of the input beam 40. The grating 22 is positioned transversely with respect to the input beam 40 . This means that the plane 34 of the grating 22 is transverse to the axis of the input beam 40 . We say that two lines (or a line and a plane, or two planes) are transverse to each other meaning that they are not parallel. Since the grating is transverse to the light beam 40 , the light beam passes through at least a part of the structure of the grating 22 .
光束40是从一个光频源(未示出)产生的,并具有一种波长使得该光束基本上不被晶体吸收,并且使得光折射效应不会使光束显著的变形。光频源装置可以包括一个或更多的能够提供光栅反射器22接受范围内波长的足够的亮度以产生一个有用的切换输出光束44的光激励器。输出光束可以被耦连到同一个基片上的其它元件中,或可以把它耦连到外部装置中,在这种情况下,光束从中穿出的输出表面优选是镀有不反射涂层。不反射涂层可以是多层介电涂层,具有十分合适的折射率材料的单一四分之一波长涂层,或溶胶-凝胶涂层。激励器可以是任何光源,包括激光器,发光二极管,弧光灯,放电灯,或甚至白炽灯,只要能达到适当的频谱亮度就行。适当的频谱亮度可以由一个或更多的激励器直接提供,从一个或更多的频率变换(倍频的,混频的,或参量放大的)激励器间接提供,或是由上述几种激励器组合提供。吸收效应把波长限制在大约400至4000nm的范围。光折射现象的效果随构造,波长,掺杂物,和极化结构的改变而改变,这里我们假设它处于控制之下,因而任何光束的变形都处于可接受的限度之内。Beam 40 is generated from an optical frequency source (not shown) and has a wavelength such that the beam is substantially not absorbed by the crystal and such that photorefractive effects do not distort the beam significantly. The optical frequency source arrangement may include one or more optical actuators capable of providing sufficient brightness at wavelengths within the range accepted by the grating reflector 22 to produce a useful switched output beam 44 . The output beam may be coupled into other components on the same substrate, or it may be coupled into an external device, in which case the output surface from which the beam emerges is preferably non-reflectively coated. The non-reflective coating can be a multi-layer dielectric coating, a single quarter wave coating with a well-suited refractive index material, or a sol-gel coating. The exciter can be any light source, including lasers, light-emitting diodes, arc lamps, discharge lamps, or even incandescent lamps, as long as the appropriate spectral brightness is achieved. Appropriate spectral brightness may be provided directly by one or more exciters, indirectly by one or more frequency converting (frequency doubling, mixing, or parametric amplification) exciters, or by a combination of the above combination provided. Absorption effects limit the wavelength to a range of approximately 400 to 4000 nm. The effect of photorefractive phenomena varies with configuration, wavelength, dopant, and polarization configuration, and here we assume it is under control so that any beam distortion is within acceptable limits.
光栅22是由交替排列的两种类型的畴的边界34形成或限定的。第一种类型的畴36具有与第二种类型畴38不同的电光(E-O)系数,因此施加在电极24和26之间的均匀电场导致了在两种类型的畴中的折射率的不同的变化。由于折射率改变波的相速,因此在不同的折射率或相速的区域中存在着阻抗失配。在材料中区域36具有相对于其它畴类型38和原始晶片20的极化方向相反的指向,如极化方向箭头39,41所示,有助于使材料达到这种折射率变化的目的。我们用相反的指向表示与一些参考方向相反的极化方向。(一种可用电场控制光栅的替代方法是在幅照掩蔽聚合物膜中实现的,在区域36之内或之外该聚合物膜的E-O系数被破坏了。)施加于结构22的均匀电场产生了一个调制折射率。折射率调制的图形添加到预先存在的折射率分布上;最简单的构造在没有施加电场时没有折射率调制,并且线性地响应施加的电场产生折射率光栅。光栅22的一个周期48是两个畴边界之间的距离,完全地包括了一个相应于每一种畴类型的一个区域。The grating 22 is formed or defined by boundaries 34 of two types of domains arranged alternately. Domains 36 of the first type have a different electro-optic (E-O) coefficient than domains 38 of the second type, so a uniform electric field applied between electrodes 24 and 26 results in a difference in the refractive index in the two types of domains. Variety. Since the refractive index changes the wave's phase velocity, there is an impedance mismatch in regions of different refractive index or phase velocity. Regions 36 have opposite orientations in the material relative to the other domain types 38 and the original wafer 20, as indicated by the polarization direction arrows 39, 41, contributing to the material's purpose of this refractive index change. We use opposite pointing to indicate the direction of polarization opposite to some reference direction. (An alternative method of controlling the grating with an electric field is realized in a radiation-masked polymer film whose E-O coefficient is disrupted inside or outside region 36.) A uniform electric field applied to structure 22 produces a modulated refractive index. The index-modulated pattern is added to a pre-existing index profile; the simplest configuration has no index modulation in the absence of an applied electric field, and produces an index grating in linear response to an applied electric field. A period 48 of the grating 22 is the distance between two domain boundaries completely encompassing a region corresponding to each domain type.
一种实现折射率光栅的替代方法是用向极化区域施加应力场获得的。材料的光弹性响应在不同的极化区产生不同的折射率变化。例如可以通过在高温下在基片的顶面上铺设一层薄膜,然后冷却到室温的方法施加永久的应力场。例如,可以通过蚀刻掉一条薄膜造成应力集中。An alternative method of realizing a refractive index grating is obtained by applying a stress field to the polarized region. The photoelastic response of the material produces different refractive index changes in different polarization regions. A permanent stress field can be applied, for example, by laying a thin film on top of the substrate at elevated temperature and then cooling to room temperature. For example, stress concentrations can be created by etching away a strip of film.
极化的的元件36和38交替地排满整个光栅22,它们之间没有间隔。如果可用额外类型的畴,利用由不同类型畴的可变距离间隔的畴可以形成更为复杂的交替排列图形。对于一些应用,光栅22如图2中所示是一种均匀周期性的光栅,使得在包含在沿光栅22的长度方向的一个周期中的畴类型在其它的周期中重现。对于另外的应用,这有助于改变周期以获得例如多个频谱峰值或更宽的频谱带宽这样的优点。我们用光栅一词表示包括所有可能种类的几何形状和周期性的可识别的结构的阵列。Polarized elements 36 and 38 alternately fill the entire grating 22 with no spaces between them. If additional types of domains are available, more complex alternating patterns can be formed using domains separated by variable distances of different types of domains. For some applications, grating 22, as shown in FIG. 2, is a uniformly periodic grating such that domain types contained in one period along the length of grating 22 recur in other periods. For further applications, it is helpful to vary the period to gain advantages such as multiple spectral peaks or wider spectral bandwidth. We use the term grating to mean arrays that include all possible kinds of geometric shapes and periodic recognizable structures.
周期性折射率光栅可以在光束之间的相互作用中提供虚光子。这表明光栅结构可以为相互作用提供动量,但不是能量。为了进行相互作用,必须保存能量和动量,当需要增加动量以同时满足这两种保存关系时,光栅是有用的。光栅的周期性确定了可用于相互作用的动量。光栅的强度决定了虚光子束的“亮度”。光束穿过光栅截面中的周期的数量确定了可用虚光子动量的带宽。由于带宽的限制,相互作用仅在光频率的一个特定频谱范围(或多个频谱范围)内进行。因此光栅装置本身具有频率选择性,并且一般在一个标称波长附近操作。Periodic index gratings can provide virtual photons in the interaction between light beams. This suggests that the grating structure can provide momentum, but not energy, to the interaction. In order to interact, both energy and momentum must be conserved, and gratings are useful when momentum needs to be increased to satisfy both conservation relationships. The periodicity of the grating determines the momentum available for the interaction. The strength of the grating determines the "brightness" of the virtual photon beam. The number of periods in the cross-section of the grating that the beam traverses determines the bandwidth of available virtual photon momentum. Due to bandwidth limitations, the interaction occurs only within a specific spectral range (or multiple spectral ranges) of optical frequencies. The grating arrangement is therefore inherently frequency selective and typically operates around one nominal wavelength.
例如,在如图2所示的以一定角度简单反射的过程中,输入光束40的光子具有与输出光束44和42的光子相同的光频率,因而观察到能量保存。但是,输入光束40和改变了方向的输出光束44中的光子的动量不同;为了产生反射过程,光栅22必须提供动量的变化,如与图2相关的矢量图43中所示的那样。光栅22为相互作用提供虚(有动量但没有能量)光子,以便能够保存动量。与ith波型相关的动量矢量,ki=2πni/λi,等于2π乘以该波型的有效折射率ni的积除以那个波的波长λi,并且它指向传播的方向。动量矢量的量值也称为传播常数。在单一周期光栅的情况中,动量矢量k1=2π/Λ的指向垂直于光栅表面,并且它可以具有任何存在于光栅的傅里叶变换中的波长值Λ。因此与50%负载循环光栅的传播常数k1相关的光间隔(光栅线和间隔的宽度)是Λ/2。也可以通过调节,例如,光束的反射率,或用热膨胀法或其它方法改变光栅周期的手段来调谐相互作用的频率。根据如何使用一个给定的装置,一个折射率结构可以有一个可以用于相互作用的波长和矢量方向的频谱。也可以把多虚光子用于所谓“较高阶”光栅相互作用中的相互作用。“较高阶”光栅是一种具有一个与被一个整数所除的动量保存所需的周期有关的周期的光栅。所需的动量虚光子是从“较高阶”光栅的谐波获得的。可以通过该方法保存的动量的条件一般被称为布拉格条件,因此本发明的光栅是布拉格光栅,在光栅上的入射角是用于带内或谐振频率分量的布拉格角。对于任何能量束相互作用这种能量和动量的双重保存都是必须的,无论该能量束是光束,微波束,声波束,还是任何其它的包括随时间变化而变化的能量场的波类能量形式。只有光栅的使用可以改变,以产生用于不同能量形式的阻抗调制,使得结构的图形可以与波类能量形式耦连。For example, during simple reflection at an angle as shown in FIG. 2 , photons of input beam 40 have the same optical frequency as photons of output beams 44 and 42 , thus energy conservation is observed. However, the photons in the input beam 40 and the redirected output beam 44 have different momentums; in order for the reflection process to occur, the grating 22 must provide a change in momentum, as shown in the vector diagram 43 associated with FIG. 2 . The grating 22 provides virtual (momentum but no energy) photons for the interaction so that momentum can be conserved. The momentum vector associated with the i th mode, ki = 2πn i /λ i , is equal to the product of 2π times the effective index ni of that mode divided by the wavelength λ i of that wave, and it points in the direction of propagation. The magnitude of the momentum vector is also known as the propagation constant. In the case of a single periodic grating, the momentum vector k 1 =2π/Λ is directed perpendicular to the grating surface, and it can have any wavelength value Λ that exists in the Fourier transform of the grating. The optical spacing (width of grating lines and spaces) related to the propagation constant ki of a 50% duty cycle grating is thus Λ/2. The frequency of the interaction can also be tuned by adjusting, for example, the reflectivity of the beam, or changing the period of the grating using thermal expansion or other means. Depending on how a given device is used, a refractive index structure can have a spectrum of wavelengths and vector directions available for interaction. Multiple virtual photons can also be used for interactions in so-called "higher order" grating interactions. A "higher order" grating is one that has a period related to the period required for momentum preservation divided by an integer. The required momentum virtual photons are obtained from the harmonics of the "higher order" gratings. The conditions for momentum that can be preserved by this method are generally referred to as Bragg conditions, so the grating of the present invention is a Bragg grating, and the angle of incidence on the grating is the Bragg angle for the in-band or resonant frequency components. This dual conservation of energy and momentum is necessary for any energy beam interaction, whether that energy beam is a light beam, a microwave beam, an acoustic beam, or any other wave-like energy form that includes a time-varying energy field . Only the use of gratings can be varied to generate impedance modulations for different energy forms so that patterns of structures can be coupled with wave-like energy forms.
在图2中,折射率光栅起选频光能路由器或反射器的作用。一个在相互作用带宽内的(能够与一个或多个虚光子相互作用的)特性频率的波束被称为带内波束,其它频率的能量束被称为带外波束。光栅22具有一个相当于作为光频率的函数的光栅的反射效率的最大值的一半的全部宽度的带宽。当折射率光栅存在时(光栅“开通”),具有在光栅的带宽之内的光频率的光束以围绕光栅结构的法线47的角46从光栅反射。带外光束沿着与输入光束相同的光轴,并且以输入光束相同的方向通过晶体发射,形成部分发射输出光束42。一个施加于包括光栅的区域中的电场控制折射率调制的强度(也可以将其想象为虚光子的强度),调节发射的输出光束42和反射的输出光束44中的功率的比率。In Figure 2, the refractive index grating acts as a frequency-selective optical energy router or reflector. A beam of characteristic frequencies (capable of interacting with one or more virtual photons) within the interaction bandwidth is called an in-band beam, and energy beams of other frequencies are called out-of-band beams. The grating 22 has a bandwidth corresponding to the full width of half the maximum value of the reflective efficiency of the grating as a function of optical frequency. When a refractive index grating is present (grating "on"), light beams having optical frequencies within the bandwidth of the grating reflect from the grating at an angle 46 around a normal 47 to the grating structure. The out-of-band beam is emitted through the crystal along the same optical axis as the input beam and in the same direction as the input beam, forming a partially emitted output beam 42 . An electric field applied in the region containing the grating controls the intensity of the refractive index modulation (which can also be thought of as the intensity of virtual photons), adjusting the ratio of power in the emitted output beam 42 and reflected output beam 44 .
对于一个弱反向反射光栅(它没有全部耗尽输入光束),全宽一半最大带宽Δλ由下式给出:
其中:in:
λ=输入光束的真空波长。λ = vacuum wavelength of the input beam.
n=光束的折射率,和n = refractive index of the beam, and
L=光栅的长度。L = length of the grating.
对于高反射光栅,有效长度小于光栅的总长度,因而加大了带宽。For highly reflective gratings, the effective length is less than the total length of the grating, thus increasing the bandwidth.
在施加电场之前两种类型的畴可以显示出折射率差。在这种情况下,一个永久折射率光栅伴随极化可切换折射率光栅同时存在。当施加电场时,根据极性,折射率的净调制(光栅强度)可能增加或减少。在一个施加电场的特定值则产生“光栅切断(grating off)”的情况(折射率光栅值接近零)。接着可以通过施加任何其它场强“开通”光栅。如果反转施加电场的极性,例如,将产生一个两倍于原始永久光栅强度的折射率光栅。The two types of domains can exhibit a difference in refractive index before an electric field is applied. In this case, a permanent index grating accompanies a polarization switchable index grating. When an electric field is applied, the net modulation of the refractive index (grating strength) may increase or decrease depending on the polarity. At a certain value of the applied electric field a "grating off" condition occurs (refractive index grating value approaches zero). The grating can then be "turned on" by applying any other field strength. If the polarity of the applied electric field is reversed, for example, a refractive index grating with twice the strength of the original permanent grating will be produced.
本发明的极化光栅结构比现有技术有两个主要的优点。首先,极化畴结构可以具有很清晰的边界,为虚光子动量提供了一个强傅里叶系数,其数倍于对应基本光栅周期的动量。这在由于要求的小的外形尺寸而不能进行光刻的场合是十分有用的。其次,即使是在与光栅周期相比光波形尺寸较大的情况下也能产生强折射率调制光栅。这在用图形化电极激励的均匀极化基片中是不可能的,因为随着离开电极阵列平面距离的增加电场调制成指数地减弱,当距离等于光栅周期时失去了绝大部分的调制。极化方法可以产生具有非常大的高宽比的极化外形,或极大的畴深度与宽度的比率。利用电场极化技术,已经取得了超过250∶1的高宽比。由于我们使用基本上均匀的电极,我们取得了良好的静电穿透性;由于具有深的畴壁,可以对整个光束进行良好的调制。The polarized grating structure of the present invention has two main advantages over the prior art. First, the polarized domain structure can have very sharp boundaries, providing a strong Fourier coefficient for the virtual photon momentum, which is several times larger than the momentum corresponding to the fundamental grating period. This is useful where photolithography is not possible due to the small form factor required. Second, strongly index-modulated gratings can be produced even at large optical waveform sizes compared to the grating period. This is not possible in uniformly polarized substrates excited with patterned electrodes because the electric field modulation decreases exponentially with distance from the plane of the electrode array, losing most of the modulation when the distance is equal to the grating period. The poling method can produce poling profiles with very large aspect ratios, or extremely large domain depth-to-width ratios. Using electric field polarization technology, aspect ratios exceeding 250:1 have been achieved. Since we use substantially uniform electrodes, we achieve good electrostatic penetration; thanks to deep domain walls, good modulation of the entire beam is possible.
光栅也可以是一种二维折射率变化阵列,在这种情况下光栅具有两个方向上的周期性。因此光栅提供的虚光子可以提供两个方向的动量。这可以用在,例如,从一个单一的光栅输出几个光束。The grating can also be a two-dimensional array of refractive index variations, in which case the grating has periodicity in two directions. Therefore, the virtual photons provided by the grating can provide momentum in two directions. This can be used, for example, to output several beams from a single grating.
在本优选实施例中,铁电晶体是一种市售的Z-切割铌酸锂单晶片。根据极化方法和希望的极化畴方向,也可以使用包括X-,Y-和角度-切割在内的其它切割方式。制造步骤包括初始极化和电极制造。在处理之前先清洁晶体(例如用氧等离子灰化),以除去来自抛光和搬运过程的所有碳氢化合物和其它污染物。为了控制极化,使用了掩模和处理电极,以建立一个晶片的表面的和穿过晶片的施加电场的图形,如1994年5月9日申请的第08/239,799号美国专利申请中所述的那样。在施加极化电场的过程中,调节极化图形以在区域36中产生极化畴反转。简单地讲,在晶片20的+Z表面23上沉积一层几微米厚的二氧化硅。把希望畴反转的区域36上的二氧化硅膜减薄或除去,利用一种液体电极或沉积的金属膜,以便在图形化的二氧化硅上产生一个良好的等位面,然后施加一个超过大约24kV/mm的电场,并使+Z表面23的电位高于-Z表面25的电位。使用这种技术,已经使铌酸锂的铁电晶体极化,产生了具有相反极性(畴反转)的两种类型的畴的图形。两种类型畴的电光系数的量值是相同的,尽管它们具有相反的极性。In the preferred embodiment, the ferroelectric crystal is a commercially available Z-cut lithium niobate monolith. Other cuts including X-, Y-, and angle-cuts can also be used, depending on the polarization method and desired orientation of the polarized domains. The fabrication steps include initial poling and electrode fabrication. Crystals are cleaned (eg, ashed with oxygen plasma) prior to processing to remove all hydrocarbons and other contaminants from the polishing and handling process. To control polarization, masks and process electrodes are used to create a pattern of applied electric fields at the surface of the wafer and across the wafer, as described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/239,799, filed May 9, 1994 like that. During application of the polarizing electric field, the polarization pattern is adjusted to produce polarization domain inversion in region 36 . Briefly, a layer of silicon dioxide a few microns thick is deposited on the +Z surface 23 of the wafer 20 . Thinning or removing the silicon dioxide film on the region 36 where domain inversion is desired, using a liquid electrode or deposited metal film to create a good equipotential surface on the patterned silicon dioxide, and then applying a The electric field exceeds about 24 kV/mm and makes the +Z surface 23 at a higher potential than the -Z surface 25. Using this technique, a ferroelectric crystal of lithium niobate has been polarized, producing a pattern of two types of domains with opposite polarities (domain inversion). The magnitudes of the electro-optic coefficients for the two types of domains are the same although they have opposite polarities.
除了本优选技术之外,利用向内扩散法,离子交换法,和交替电场极化技术也在铁电材料中获得了畴反转。已经做到利用钛通过热增强向内扩散技术在铌酸锂中形成畴。反转区的三角形限制了小尺寸畴的相互作用效率,但是可以主要用在长周期的波导装置中。在含有铷和钡离子的盐浴中显示了通过离子交换在KTP中的图形极化,其中晶体中的钾离子被铷离子替换。利用交替磁场技术的磁场极化是优选的方法,其也在铌酸锂和钽酸锂中都显示了成功的经验。包括KTP和钛酸钡在内的所有的固体铁电材料都可以用电场畴反转技术极化。(所谓固体表示可以在一定的时间阶段中保持其结构,例如冷却的流体,玻璃,交联聚合物等。)In addition to the present preferred technique, domain inversion has also been achieved in ferroelectric materials using indiffusion, ion exchange, and alternating electric field polarization techniques. Domain formation in lithium niobate has been achieved using titanium through a thermally enhanced indiffusion technique. The triangular shape of the inversion region limits the interaction efficiency of small-sized domains, but can be mainly used in long-period waveguide devices. Figure polarization in KTP by ion exchange is shown in a salt bath containing rubidium and barium ions, where potassium ions in the crystal are replaced by rubidium ions. Magnetic field polarization using the alternating magnetic field technique is the preferred method, which has also shown success in both lithium niobate and lithium tantalate. All solid ferroelectric materials including KTP and barium titanate can be polarized by electric field domain inversion technique. (The so-called solid means that it can maintain its structure for a certain period of time, such as cooled fluid, glass, cross-linked polymer, etc.)
用不同的技术产生具有不同特性的光栅。电场极化使晶体中的畴对齐,而不会对折射率造成本质的改变,但离子交换和扩散技术的确在极化区中造成了折射率的变化。当使用后面这些技术时永久折射率光栅伴随可切换极化光栅同时存在。Different techniques are used to produce gratings with different characteristics. Electric field polarization aligns the domains in the crystal without substantially changing the refractive index, but ion exchange and diffusion techniques do cause refractive index changes in the polarized regions. A permanent index grating accompanies a switchable polarization grating when using these latter techniques.
一般地讲,有两种不同类型的畴,至少第一种类型的畴被极化。尽管只需要两种类型的畴,但利用额外类型的畴可以制造更为复杂的可切换光栅结构。可以把第二种畴类型反向极化,不极化,或以其它角度极化,并且通过其拥有的特殊电活性系数(例如,电光或压光系数)把它区别出来。例如,在一些应用中,可以用较低的成本从未极化的铌酸锂晶片制造装置,在这种情况中基片晶片包括多个随机定向的畴。极化的畴会有均匀的方向性,而其它畴中的方向性则是随机的。根据装置的类型,随机图形的细节将会影响装置的性能。作为另一个例子,第二类型畴可以垂直第一类型定向或以另外的角度定向,电响应中的差别仍能产生有用的电控结构。也可以在一种事先未经极化的并且在分子级别上随机定向的材料中,例如在熔融的二氧化硅或聚合物中,形成极化畴。极化过程使材料结构定向以形成第一畴类型,而第二畴类型是由材料中的未极化的或随机定向的区域构成的。In general, there are two different types of domains, at least the first type of domains being polarized. Although only two types of domains are required, more complex switchable grating structures can be fabricated with additional types of domains. The second domain type can be polarized in the opposite direction, unpolarized, or polarized at other angles, and can be distinguished by a specific electrical activity coefficient (eg, electro-optic or calender-optical coefficient) it possesses. For example, in some applications, devices can be fabricated at lower cost from unpolarized lithium niobate wafers, in which case the substrate wafer includes a plurality of randomly oriented domains. Polarized domains will have uniform directionality, while directionality in other domains will be random. Depending on the type of device, the details of the random pattern will affect the performance of the device. As another example, domains of the second type can be oriented perpendicular to the first type or at another angle, and the difference in electrical response can still yield useful electrically controlled structures. Polarized domains can also form in a material that has not been previously polarized and is randomly oriented at the molecular level, for example in fused silica or polymers. The poling process orients the material structure to form a first domain type, while the second domain type is made up of unpolarized or randomly oriented regions in the material.
在一个替代技术中,可以通过有选择地改变或破坏相当于第二畴类型的区域中的电活性系数来形成极化结构。不需要改变这些区域中的原子结构的定位方向:如果在第二畴区域中改变电活性,畴就不相同了。例如在非线性聚合物中,可以用辐照使电光系数失效,而在辐照屏蔽区产生电活性区域。在铌酸锂中也显示了相同的效果,其中质子交换破坏了非线性系数。也可以在许多其它材料中——包括KTP和钽酸锂这类的大多数非线性材料——用光辐照,电子轰击,和/或离子轰击技术达到改变电光系数的目的。In an alternative technique, the polarized structure can be formed by selectively altering or destroying the electrical activity coefficient in regions corresponding to the second domain type. There is no need to change the orientation of the atomic structure in these regions: if you change the electrical activity in the second domain region, the domains are different. In nonlinear polymers, for example, irradiation can be used to deactivate the electro-optic coefficients and generate electroactive regions in radiation-shielded regions. The same effect was shown in lithium niobate, where proton exchange disrupted the nonlinear coefficients. Electro-optic coefficients can also be altered in many other materials—including most nonlinear materials such as KTP and lithium tantalate—by photoirradiation, electron bombardment, and/or ion bombardment techniques.
铌酸锂中,沿晶体的z轴施加的电场E3引起非寻常折射率δne的改变,δne用下式给出:
其中r33是适当的电光非线性光系数。由于r33是铌酸锂中最大的非线性常数,在实际装置中优选利用非寻常折射率的变化。(由于施加电场E3而在寻常折射率中产生变化的非线性常数r13是一个比r33小的系数3.6。)为了利用在非寻常折射率中的变化,光波必须沿材料的z轴偏振。在一个Z-切割晶体中,这个偏振被称为TM。(在TE偏振中,电向量位于晶体表面的平面上。另外仅有的重要非线性系数是r15,其在施加电场E1或E2时耦连TE和TM波。)where r33 is the appropriate electro-optical nonlinear optical coefficient. Since r33 is the largest nonlinear constant in lithium niobate, it is preferable to exploit the extraordinary refractive index variation in practical devices. (The nonlinear constant r13 , which produces a change in the ordinary refractive index due to the applied electric field E3, is a factor 3.6 smaller than r33 .) To take advantage of the change in the extraordinary refractive index, the light wave must be polarized along the z-axis of the material. In a Z-cut crystal, this polarization is called TM. (In TE polarization, the electric vector lies in the plane of the crystal surface. The only other non-linear coefficient of importance is r 15 , which couples TE and TM waves when an electric field E 1 or E 2 is applied.)
由于在极化结构中引起的折射率变化相当小(沿铌酸锂基片的z轴施加的10V/μm的电场,折射率的变化δne仅为1.6×10-3),图2中的光栅反射器有很强的角度依赖性。弱折射率改变的Brewster角度是45°,因此当光栅的平面与光束相前的夹角为45°时,光栅将完全发射任何TE偏振波。因此,可以把装置用作偏振器。反射的光束将总是在45°入射角被偏振。如果TM波的反射系数高时,(可以安排足够的光栅周期和高的施加电场提高反射系数),偏振器的消光比在前进方向上也可以非常高。当然,在垂直入射时,两次偏振之间的反射由于这种效应而没有区别(尽管由于其它效应是存在区别的,例如,如上所述的不同的电光系数)。操作在掠入射的全内反射装置远离Brewster角,并且由于这种效应在反射上仅有很小的差别。Since the refractive index change caused in the polarized structure is quite small (10V/μm electric field applied along the z-axis of the lithium niobate substrate, the refractive index change δne is only 1.6×10 -3 ), the Grating reflectors have a strong angular dependence. The Brewster angle for a weak index change is 45°, so when the plane of the grating is at 45° from the beam phase front, the grating will fully emit any TE polarized wave. Thus, the device can be used as a polarizer. The reflected beam will always be polarized at a 45° angle of incidence. If the reflection coefficient of the TM wave is high, (sufficient grating period and high applied electric field can be arranged to increase the reflection coefficient), the extinction ratio of the polarizer can also be very high in the forward direction. Of course, at normal incidence, the reflection between the two polarizations does not differ due to this effect (although there are differences due to other effects, eg different electro-optic coefficients as described above). Total internal reflection devices operating at grazing incidence are far from the Brewster angle and there is only a small difference in reflection due to this effect.
晶片材料可以是任何可极化固体介电材料的,包括铁电材料,聚合物薄膜材料,以及一些非晶材料,例如像熔融二氧化硅之类的也可以被极化而产生许多根据本发明的有用的装置。极化的材料也可以是淀积在一种第二材料的基片上的薄膜。已经把许多中可极化薄膜成功地淀积在基片上,例如熔融二氧化硅,铌酸锂,铌酸钾,钛酸钡,氧化锌,II-VI材料,以及各种不同的聚合物等。使用过许多种基片,包括MgO,硅,砷化镓,铌酸锂,以及包括石英和熔融二氧化硅在内的各种玻璃。对于可电切换的畴而言,它们必须由电光材料组成,这种材料有由施加电场引起的折射率变化。The wafer material can be any polarizable solid dielectric material, including ferroelectric materials, polymer film materials, and some amorphous materials, such as fused silica, which can also be polarized to produce many useful device. The polarized material may also be a thin film deposited on a substrate of a second material. Many polarizable films have been successfully deposited on substrates, such as fused silica, lithium niobate, potassium niobate, barium titanate, zinc oxide, II-VI materials, and various polymers, etc. . A wide variety of substrates have been used, including MgO, silicon, gallium arsenide, lithium niobate, and various glasses including quartz and fused silica. For domains to be electrically switchable, they must consist of electro-optic materials that have a refractive index change induced by an applied electric field.
在极化步骤之后,优选除去液态电极和二氧化硅掩蔽薄膜。再参考图2,第一电极24和第二电极26面对介电材料,以便提供一种器件,用以产生控制光栅的电场。(面对一个材料意指其位置靠近材料但不必接触到,几乎对齐材料的表面但不必有一个固定的间隙尺寸,并且包括放置在材料顶部的各种尺寸的额外材料的情况。)由导电材料组成的电极24和26优选利用标准的淀积技术以空间间隔的方式敷设在晶体的相反表面。即使表面作为较大的几何体的一部分可能是弯曲的和/或不平行的,也称这些电极是在相反的平面上。这些电极可以是由能够提供足够的电荷传递的任何材料形成,以便达到适当的场强,因而能在与施加时间一致的时间中激励极化的光栅。例如,电极可以是由铝,金,钛,铬等金属材料,导电漆,环氧树脂,半导体材料,或铟和锡氧化物之类的透光材料,以及盐溶液之类的液体导体选择组成的。它们也可以面对表面23和25,并带有由空气,透光缓冲层,和/或其它材料填充的间隙。仅需要一个电极,因为可以在这个电极和任何电位参比物——例如一个外部接地平面,一个第二电极,或多个电极——之间建立一个电位电压差。由于向电极施加的电压建立了一个由电极决定的电场图形,所以电极是电场建立器件。当然也需要电压和电流源。电极的设置方式使得控制电场是通过本发明的有效体积施加的,其可由一个图形极化区域或一个光栅构成的。After the poling step, the liquid electrode and the silicon dioxide masking film are preferably removed. Referring again to FIG. 2, the first electrode 24 and the second electrode 26 face the dielectric material so as to provide a means for generating an electric field for controlling the grating. (Facing a material is meant to be positioned close to the material but not necessarily touching, nearly aligned to the surface of the material but not necessarily with a fixed gap size, and includes the case of additional material of various sizes placed on top of the material.) Made of conductive material The constituent electrodes 24 and 26 are preferably applied in a spaced apart manner on opposite surfaces of the crystal using standard deposition techniques. The electrodes are said to be on opposite planes even though the surfaces may be curved and/or non-parallel as part of a larger geometry. These electrodes may be formed of any material that provides sufficient charge transfer to achieve the appropriate field strength and thus excite the polarized grating for a time consistent with the time of application. For example, electrodes can be made of metal materials such as aluminum, gold, titanium, chromium, conductive paint, epoxy resin, semiconductor materials, or light-transmitting materials such as indium and tin oxides, and liquid conductors such as saline solutions. of. They may also face surfaces 23 and 25 with gaps filled with air, light-transmissive buffer layers, and/or other materials. Only one electrode is required, since a potential voltage difference can be established between this electrode and any potential reference, such as an external ground plane, a second electrode, or multiple electrodes. An electrode is an electric field establishing device since the voltage applied to the electrode establishes an electric field pattern determined by the electrode. Of course voltage and current sources are also required. The electrodes are arranged in such a way that the control electric field is applied through the active volume of the invention, which may consist of a patterned polarized area or a grating.
在金属电极的场合,优选结合一个淀积在电极下方的涂层,以降低光损耗,光损耗是在引导波型的一部分延伸到金属电极时发生的。在多个电极安装在同一表面的场合,涂层应当足够薄,以维持高电场,但要足够的厚,以降低光损耗。也可以在电极上方使用另一个涂层,以减少击穿的可能性。In the case of metal electrodes, it is preferable to incorporate a coating deposited below the electrode to reduce the optical loss that occurs when a portion of the guided wave mode extends to the metal electrode. Where multiple electrodes are mounted on the same surface, the coating should be thin enough to sustain high electric fields, but thick enough to reduce optical loss. It is also possible to use another coating over the electrodes to reduce the possibility of breakdown.
一个电压控制源32(或一个电位源)提供电位,以经过连接线30驱动电极激活光栅。被激活的电极根据施加电压的极性被彼此相对极化。电压源的电压产生一个通过极化区域的足够大的电场,以将相当大量的光切换到被切换输出的光束44。电压源的电压是可变化的,以便提供一个装置来控制两个输出光束中的功率比。实际上,如果电场足够高,可以用一个长的光栅反射所有输入光束,形成了一个电激活的反射镜。对于较低的电场来说,光栅形成了一个部分反射器。电压控制源可以是一个电池,一个电变压器,一个气体驱动的发电机,或任何其它类型的电流和电位的可控制源。控制装置32也可以含有一个产生时变电压的控制器,并且提供电流以便以应用所需的频率改变电极24和26上的电压。控制装置32也可以有可以控制多个装置的多个输出,并且其可以根据某些图形临时排序。源32可以有由计算机或其它仪器输入的,用于手工或电控其功能的控制输入。A voltage control source 32 (or a potential source) provides potential to drive the electrode-activated grating via connecting lines 30 . The activated electrodes are polarized relative to each other according to the polarity of the applied voltage. The voltage of the voltage source produces an electric field large enough across the polarized region to switch a substantial amount of light into the switched output beam 44 . The voltage of the voltage source is variable to provide a means to control the power ratio in the two output beams. In fact, if the electric field is high enough, a long grating can be used to reflect all the input beam, forming an electrically active mirror. For lower electric fields, the grating forms a partial reflector. The voltage controlled source may be a battery, an electrical transformer, a gas driven generator, or any other type of controllable source of current and potential. Control unit 32 may also include a controller that generates a time-varying voltage and supplies current to vary the voltage across electrodes 24 and 26 at the frequency required by the application. The control device 32 can also have multiple outputs that can control multiple devices, and which can be temporally ordered according to certain graphics. Source 32 may have control inputs from a computer or other instrument for manually or electronically controlling its functions.
为了避免不必要的重复,应当理解参考图2表述的各种变化适用于以下表述的实施例,而参考以下附图表述的各种变化也适用于图2。In order to avoid unnecessary repetition, it should be understood that the various changes described with reference to FIG. 2 are applicable to the embodiments described below, and the various changes described with reference to the following figures are also applicable to FIG. 2 .
现在参考图3,其显示了本发明的波导实施例。特定地讲,本实施例是一个电控,选频波导反向反射器。本装置中的所有光束由一个光波导64限定在二维中,其穿过形成装置61的基片60的可极化介电材料的一个表面。Referring now to Figure 3, there is shown a waveguide embodiment of the present invention. In particular, this embodiment is an electronically controlled, frequency-selective waveguide retroreflector. All light beams in the device are confined in two dimensions by an optical waveguide 64 passing through a surface of the polarizable dielectric material of the substrate 60 forming the device 61 .
一个波导是尽管存在衍射效应仍可以允许波通过其长度传播,并且可弯曲的任何结构。一个光波导是由具有一个相对于周围介质增大的折射率的延伸区域限定的。波的引导或限制的强度取决于波长,折射率差异,和引导宽度。较强的限制通常导致较窄的波型。波导可以支持多个光波型或仅支持单一波型,这取决于限制的强度。通常,一种光波型是由其电磁场二维几何形状,其偏振状态,和其波长区分的。在一个双折射材料中的波导或不对称波导的偏振状态是典型的线性偏振。但是,通常的偏振状态可以包含不平行偏振分量,以及椭圆和非偏振分量,特别是在波具有大的带宽时。如果折射率差足够小(例如,Δn=0.003)并且波导管足够窄(例如,W=4μm),那么波导将仅限制某一波长范围中的单一横向波型(最低阶波型)。如果波导设置在一个基片的表面,使得波导的上下存在折射率的不对称,在折射率差或波导宽度中存在一个截止值,在其之下没有波型的限制。一个波导可以设置在基片中(例如,用向内扩散),在基片之上(例如,通过蚀刻掉周围的区域,或通过施加一个涂层并蚀刻掉除了限定波导的条带的所有部分),在基片内(例如,通过把几个处理过的基片结合或粘合在一起)。在所有场合中,我们所说的波导穿过基片。在波导中传播的光波型有一个横向的尺寸,其与所有的限制参数有关,不仅仅是波导宽度。A waveguide is any structure that allows waves to propagate through its length despite diffractive effects and is bendable. An optical waveguide is defined by an extended region having an increased refractive index relative to the surrounding medium. The strength of wave guidance or confinement depends on wavelength, refractive index difference, and guidance width. Stronger limits generally result in narrower waveforms. A waveguide can support multiple optical modes or only a single mode, depending on the strength of the confinement. In general, a light wave type is distinguished by its electromagnetic field two-dimensional geometry, its polarization state, and its wavelength. The polarization state of a waveguide or asymmetric waveguide in a birefringent material is typically linear polarization. However, common polarization states can contain non-parallel polarized components, as well as elliptical and unpolarized components, especially when the waves have large bandwidths. If the refractive index difference is small enough (eg, Δn = 0.003) and the waveguide is sufficiently narrow (eg, W = 4 μm), the waveguide will only confine a single transverse mode (lowest order mode) in a certain wavelength range. If the waveguide is placed on the surface of a substrate so that there is an asymmetry of refractive index above and below the waveguide, there is a cutoff value in the refractive index difference or waveguide width below which there is no mode limitation. A waveguide can be placed in the substrate (e.g., with indiffusion), on the substrate (e.g., by etching away the surrounding area, or by applying a coating and etching away all but the strips defining the waveguide ), within a substrate (for example, by bonding or gluing together several processed substrates). In all cases we speak of waveguides passing through the substrate. An optical mode propagating in a waveguide has a lateral dimension that is related to all limiting parameters, not just the waveguide width.
基片优选是铌酸锂单晶,形成有两个相反的,由晶片厚度隔开的表面63和65的芯片。两个相反表面不需要是平行的,或是平坦的。波导优选是由现有的技术制造的,例如在表面63进行退火质子交换(APE)。作为替代,可以用离子,而不是质子,向内离散到或离子交换到基片材料中。APT波导加大晶体非寻常折射率,形成了用于沿z-轴偏振光的波导。对于Z-切割晶体,这相当于TM偏振波型。由替代技术形成的波导,例如将钛向内扩散到铌酸锂中,可以支持TM和TE偏振。The substrate is preferably a lithium niobate single crystal, formed as a chip with two opposing surfaces 63 and 65 separated by the thickness of the wafer. The two opposing surfaces need not be parallel, or planar. The waveguide is preferably fabricated by existing techniques, such as annealed proton exchange (APE) at the surface 63 . Alternatively, ions, rather than protons, can be inwardly discretized or ion-exchanged into the substrate material. The APT waveguide increases the extraordinary refractive index of the crystal, forming a waveguide for polarizing light along the z-axis. For Z-cut crystals, this corresponds to the TM polarization mode. Waveguides formed by alternative techniques, such as inward diffusion of titanium into lithium niobate, can support both TM and TE polarization.
优选把波导设计为仅支持一个单一最低阶横向波型,以消除与较高阶波型有关的复杂性。较高阶横向波型有不同于最低阶波型的传播常数,和较高的散射损耗,这在某些应用中可能造成问题。但是,多波模波导对于某些应用可能是较好的,例如对于高功率传播。The waveguide is preferably designed to support only a single lowest order transverse mode to eliminate the complexities associated with higher order modes. Higher-order transverse modes have different propagation constants than the lowest-order modes, and higher scattering losses, which can cause problems in some applications. However, multimode waveguides may be preferable for certain applications, such as for high power propagation.
一种替代的构造是借助施加压力,而不是直接施加电场来激励光栅。施加压力的效果是间接地相同的:凭借压电效应,施加的应力产生一个电场,电场接着又改变畴的折射率。但是,例如如果以机械方式压缩结构,则不需要施加保持能量来维持应力。这种替代方法像这里所述的其它方法一样,也适用于以下所述的其它类似的本发明的实现方法。An alternative configuration is to actuate the grating by applying pressure, rather than directly applying an electric field. The effect of applying pressure is indirectly the same: By virtue of the piezoelectric effect, the applied stress generates an electric field, which in turn changes the refractive index of the domains. However, no holding energy needs to be applied to maintain the stress, for example if the structure is compressed mechanically. This alternative, like the others described here, is also applicable to other similar implementations of the invention described below.
一旦确定了波导的尺寸,则可以产生用于波导的光掩模,并用许多已知的光刻加工技术中的一种把图形转移到基片上的掩模材料。掩模材料可以是SiO2,钽或其它金属,或其它耐酸材料。为了制造一个APE波导,把掩蔽的基片材料浸在融化的苯甲酸中,以从酸中交换晶体中锂离子所用的质子。然后可以把所得的阶越折射率波导在300℃左右退火数小时,以使质子更深地扩散到晶体中,并产生一种具有高电活性系数的低损耗波导。Once the dimensions of the waveguide are determined, a photomask for the waveguide can be created and the pattern transferred to the mask material on the substrate using one of a number of known photolithographic processing techniques. The mask material can be SiO 2 , tantalum or other metals, or other acid resistant materials. To fabricate an APE waveguide, the masked substrate material is dipped in molten benzoic acid to exchange protons from the acid for lithium ions in the crystal. The resulting step-index waveguide can then be annealed at around 300°C for several hours to diffuse the protons deeper into the crystal and produce a low-loss waveguide with a high electrical activity coefficient.
除了向内扩散和离子交换二维波导以外,也可以形成平面和二维脊形或有条纹的波导。可以通过在低折射率的基片上淀积电活性材料来形成平面波导。用于波导制造的淀积技术是已知的,其包括液相外延(LPE)分子束外延(MBE),火焰水解,旋转,和溅射。脊形波导可以从这些平面波导加工而成,使用加工方法有,例如,举升(lift-off),湿蚀刻,或例如反应离子蚀刻(RIE)这样的干蚀刻。平面波导也可以在本发明中使用,特别用在利用可变衍射离开光栅的装置中。In addition to indiffused and ion-exchanged 2D waveguides, planar and 2D ridged or striped waveguides can also be formed. Planar waveguides can be formed by depositing electroactive materials on a low refractive index substrate. Deposition techniques for waveguide fabrication are known and include liquid phase epitaxy (LPE) molecular beam epitaxy (MBE), flame hydrolysis, spinning, and sputtering. Ridge waveguides can be fabricated from these planar waveguides using fabrication methods such as lift-off, wet etching, or dry etching such as reactive ion etching (RIE). Planar waveguides can also be used in the present invention, particularly in devices utilizing variable diffraction off gratings.
在本实施例中的光栅62垂直于光波导64设置,而光波导穿过基片。光栅是由一个类型畴66和一个第二类型畴68构成的,其不必延伸过基片。例如,当使用向内扩散或离子交换极化活性材料时,反转畴66一般延伸到材料中的一个有限的深度。当利用离子轰击或UV辐照破坏材料的活性(或降低电光活性)来达成极化时,也可以形成部分畴。The grating 62 in this embodiment is arranged perpendicular to the optical waveguide 64 which passes through the substrate. The grating is made up of domains of one type 66 and domains of a second type 68, which do not necessarily extend across the substrate. For example, when using in-diffusion or ion exchange polarized active materials, inversion domains 66 generally extend to a finite depth into the material. Partial domains can also form when ion bombardment or UV irradiation is used to disrupt the activity of the material (or reduce the electro-optic activity) to achieve polarization.
输入的光束80入射到波导上,并且被耦连到波导中。耦连是指功率从一个区域跨过某种一般化的边界——例如跨过一个界面——到另一个区域的传递过程,或是在两个平行或有角度的波导之间,或是在一个平面波导和一个条纹波导之间,或是在单模和多模波导之间,等等。当光栅开通时,输入光束的一部分耦连回到一个向后反射的输出光束82中。光栅的向后反射无需完全,即光栅可在相反方向几度角的范围内反射,而波导捕获大多数光并形成一个完全向后反射的光束。向后反射的不完全性造成向后反射的光束进入波导64时的耦连损失。当光栅切断时(当控制电场被调节到“切断”位置,其中折射率光栅有几乎为零的最小值,典型地是在零电场),输入光束继续在相同的方向上传播通过波导,以形成一个发射的输出光束84。在块型装置中,光栅的强度可随电压源76变化,以控制两个输出光束中的功率比。The input light beam 80 is incident on the waveguide and is coupled into the waveguide. Coupling is the transfer of power from one region to another across some generalized boundary, such as across an interface, or between two parallel or angled waveguides, or between Between a planar waveguide and a striped waveguide, or between single-mode and multimode waveguides, etc. When the grating is on, a portion of the input beam is coupled back into a retroreflected output beam 82 . The retroreflection of the grating need not be perfect, i.e. the grating can reflect within a few degrees in the opposite direction, while the waveguide captures most of the light and forms a perfectly retroreflective beam. Imperfections in back reflections cause coupling losses for the back reflected light beams as they enter waveguide 64 . When the grating is switched off (when the control electric field is adjusted to the "off" position, where the refractive index of the grating has an almost zero minimum, typically at zero electric field), the input beam continues to propagate through the waveguide in the same direction to form An emitted output beam 84 . In bulk devices, the intensity of the grating can be varied with voltage source 76 to control the power ratio in the two output beams.
第一电极70和第二电极72面对介电材料60的相反表面。基片是介电的,因为它可以承受施加的电场而不损坏,但只要电流不对装置的性能造成不良影响,它不必是一种理想绝缘体。电极可以是由任何导电材料形成的。必须有一种装置来利用第一电极结构建立一个穿过介电材料的电场。The first electrode 70 and the second electrode 72 face opposite surfaces of the dielectric material 60 . The substrate is dielectric in that it can withstand an applied electric field without damage, but it need not be a perfect insulator as long as the current flow does not adversely affect the performance of the device. The electrodes may be formed from any conductive material. There must be a means to use the first electrode structure to establish an electric field across the dielectric material.
电极连接了形成光栅的第一种类型的极化结构的至少两个元件。这表明电极产生的电场穿透到至少两个元件。因此,这些元件可以由电场激活。两根导线74把电压控制源76连接于两个电极,以在由波导64和极化结构62的交界处形成的区域中提供电场。导线可以是任何材料形成的,而且可以有任何形状,其在操作频率有足够的导电性,以便可以把电极充电至应用所需的程度。导线可以是圆形,扁平的,同轴电缆,或集成的导引图形导体,而且它们可以是电阻,电容,半导体,或是漏电介电体。The electrodes connect at least two elements of a first type of polarization structure forming a grating. This indicates that the electric field generated by the electrodes penetrates to at least two elements. Therefore, these elements can be activated by an electric field. Two wires 74 connect a voltage control source 76 to the two electrodes to provide an electric field in the region formed by the junction of waveguide 64 and polarization structure 62 . The wires may be formed of any material, and may be of any shape, which is sufficiently conductive at the operating frequency to charge the electrodes to the extent required for the application. Conductors can be round, flat, coaxial, or integrated pilot pattern conductors, and they can be resistors, capacitors, semiconductors, or leakage dielectrics.
或者,电极可以安排成任何方式,只要是允许电场被横跨施加到电活性材料上。例如,电极可以交替地设置在基片上的不同层中,而活性材料设在电极之间。这种构造可以用低电压产生高电场,并且对可淀积在电极材料上的非晶态活性材料,例如二氧化硅和一些聚合物,特别有用。Alternatively, the electrodes may be arranged in any manner that allows an electric field to be applied across the electroactive material. For example, the electrodes may be alternately disposed in different layers on the substrate with the active material disposed between the electrodes. This configuration can generate high electric fields with low voltages and is particularly useful for amorphous active materials that can be deposited on electrode materials, such as silicon dioxide and some polymers.
极化结构62优选比波导深,使波导64与极化结构62之间的交界处具有波导中的波型的横向尺寸和光栅的纵向尺寸。The poling structure 62 is preferably deeper than the waveguide, such that the interface between the waveguide 64 and the poling structure 62 has the lateral dimension of the mode in the waveguide and the longitudinal dimension of the grating.
图4,5和6显示了替代电极构造,其中电极装设在介电材料189的共同平面上。因为共面电极构造允许低电压时有高电场,所以这些构造对于本发明的使用波导180引导光束的实施例特别有用。由于电极靠近穿过光栅的波导截面,这些电极结构对于光栅182的低电压控制有特殊的意义。在图4所示的电极构造186中,第一电极170和第二电极172在同一表面上面对介电材料。即使平面可能是较大的几何形状的弯曲部分,这些电极也是称为在同一平面上。第一电极设置在包含几个光栅元件的波导部分的上方,每个光栅元件是由一个第一类型畴184和一个第二类型磁畴185的交替区域组成的。第二电极设置在第一电极的周围。电极之间沿波导的距离在沿波导轴方向大约不变,以使沿波导轴有所需的均匀电场。也可以改变电极间距以形成逐渐削弱的锥形场强,如图6的装置188中所示。连接在如图4所示那样放置的两个电极之间的电压源174可以在电极之间产生电场。电场矢量176的最大分量在电活性波导的区域内垂直于材料表面。对于铌酸锂这样的铁电晶体,这种电场结构激活最大的电光系数r33,建立用于TM偏振光束的折射率变化。对于在铌酸锂中施加的10V/μm的电场和波长1.5μm的光束,第一阶光栅的强度是40cm-1。Figures 4, 5 and 6 show alternative electrode configurations in which the electrodes are mounted on a common plane of
对于每一电极构造而言,需要有一种器件178把电极连接到电压源上。为形成这种器件,把一个导电材料——例如导线——电气连接在装置的电极的电位源的端子之间。在所有电极构造中,每个电极一般有一个区,或垫片,或是接点以供电线接触。垫片优选有足够大的尺寸,以减少电连接上的放置公差,便于结合。然后可以用,例如,超声波,加热,或导电环氧树脂这样的导线结合技术把导线连接到垫片上。另一种方法是,可以用一个受弹簧作用的导电体片直接接触电极,以实现所需的与电压源的电气连接。在附图中,电极一般足够大,而且本身作为接触垫片使用。For each electrode configuration, a
图5显示了共面电极结构的另一种实施例,其中第一电极171和第二电极173设置在光波导的任一侧。当跨越如此放置的两个电极施加电位时,电场矢量177的最大分量平行于基片表面。对于Z-切割铁电晶体,建立用于TM偏振光波的折射率变化和施加电场的电光系数是r13。对于在铌酸锂中的10V/μm的施加电场和1.5μm波长的光束而言,第一阶光栅耦连常数是12cm-1。Fig. 5 shows another embodiment of the coplanar electrode structure, in which the
或者,对于TE波导而言,活性电光系数可以被切换以用于两种构造。对电场矢量垂直于芯片表面的场合,适当的系数是r13,对于电场矢量平行于芯片表面的场合,使用的电光系数是r33。同样的状况可用于X-或Y-切割晶体,或中间切割晶体。Alternatively, for TE waveguides, the active electro-optic coefficient can be switched for both configurations. For the case where the electric field vector is perpendicular to the chip surface, the appropriate coefficient is r 13 , and for the case where the electric field vector is parallel to the chip surface, the electro-optic coefficient used is r 33 . The same situation can be used for X- or Y-cut crystals, or intermediate-cut crystals.
作为图5的构造的另一个变化,电极是不对称安排的,使得其中一个电极几乎覆盖波导180,另一个电极则设置在侧面。在这种构造中,在相邻电极的边缘下感应的强垂直电场占优势地穿过电极之一下方的波导区。As another variation on the configuration of Fig. 5, the electrodes are arranged asymmetrically so that one of the electrodes nearly covers the
在图6中,电极175和179与中央电极181隔开,形成锥形。当施加跨越这些电极施加电压时,这种构造产生一个锥形的电场强度,强电场向右而弱电场向左。“锥形”意指任何参数具有从一个值到另一个值的一般化的空间变化,而没有特别指出该变化是线性的还是单调的;该参数可以是间隙,宽度,密度,折射率,厚度,负载循环,等等。因此在朝向波导180左面的极化畴中引起的折射率变化比朝向右面所引起的折射率变化弱。这也许是有用的,例如,用于获得很窄带宽的全反射器,在此需要延伸相互作用区的长度。在非垂直入射角装置中,如图7和图8所示,该锥形可以用来将一个特定输入波型优选地耦连到一个特定输出波型中。In FIG. 6, electrodes 175 and 179 are spaced apart from central electrode 181 to form a cone. When a voltage is applied across these electrodes, this configuration produces a cone of electric field strength, with strong fields to the right and weak fields to the left. "Tapered" means any parameter that has a generalized spatial variation from one value to another without specifying whether the variation is linear or monotonic; such parameter may be gap, width, density, refractive index, thickness , duty cycle, etc. Thus the refractive index change induced in the polarized domains towards the left of the
在所有电极构造中,施加的电压范围可以从一常数值到迅速变化的信号或脉冲信号,并且可以在两个电极之间施加任意极性。适当选择电压值以在给定的应用中避免突然损坏电活性材料和周围的材料。In all electrode configurations, the applied voltage can range from a constant value to rapidly changing or pulsed signals, and any polarity can be applied between the two electrodes. The voltage value is chosen appropriately to avoid sudden damage to the electroactive material and surrounding materials in a given application.
当施加一个稳定电场通过铌酸锂这类材料时,在电极上积累的电荷可能造成随时间增长的电场强度的直流漂移。不时地改变电压源的极性可以消除这种变化,因而使电场强度又回到它的全值。如果平均时间之间的电场接近于零,净电荷漂移也将趋近于零。对于漂移敏感的应用而言,必须小心地降低材料的光折射敏感度,例如通过向内扩散MgO,并且优选在没有直流场的情况下操作。When a steady electric field is applied across a material such as lithium niobate, charge buildup on the electrodes can cause a DC drift in the field strength over time. Changing the polarity of the voltage source from time to time cancels out this variation, thus returning the electric field strength to its full value. If the electric field between averaging times is close to zero, the net charge drift will also be close to zero. For drift-sensitive applications, the photorefractive sensitivity of the material has to be carefully reduced, for example by inward diffusion of MgO, and is preferably operated without a DC field.
表面层有助于防止电场击穿和与电极的光接触损耗。由于光束在表面上或表面附近传播,因此对于波导装置而言损耗是尤其重要的。这点也适用于活性材料的极化,以及电光切换。在两个共面电极之间的电场的最大矢量分量平行于材料表面。通过在波导区和电极之间淀积一个具有高介电强度的透光材料层可以大大地减少击穿问题和光损耗问题。二氧化硅是这种材料的一个好例子。由于两个电极之间表面上方及本身的空气中也可能发生击穿,在电极的顶部也可以淀积一层类似的高介电强度材料。The surface layer helps prevent electric field breakdown and loss of optical contact with the electrodes. Losses are especially important for waveguide devices since light beams propagate on or near surfaces. This also applies to the polarization of active materials, as well as to electro-optic switching. The largest vector component of the electric field between two coplanar electrodes is parallel to the material surface. The problem of breakdown and light loss can be greatly reduced by depositing a layer of light-transmitting material with high dielectric strength between the waveguide region and the electrodes. Silicon dioxide is a good example of such a material. Since breakdown can also occur above the surface between the two electrodes and in the air itself, a similar high dielectric strength material can also be deposited on top of the electrodes.
图7和图8显示了电控选频波导耦连器的两个实施例。在图7中,一对二维波导穿过一个介电材料的一面,而且相互相交成一个角度118形成一个T形结构,构成三通装置。由一个第一类型畴104和一个第二类型畴102组成的光栅100处于两个波导相交区(由两个波导中的光波型共同占据的体积)与之形成一个夹角。在相交区的峰值折射率变化优选等于波导中的峰值折射率变化。如果T形结构的制造是在一个步骤中完成的(借助向内扩散,离子交换,蚀刻等)的话,即可完成上述情形。在一种替代方法中是在后续的步骤中放置两个波导的,这对制造图8的交叉波导是最方便的了,但是其在相交区域中的峰值折射率变化是波导中的折射率变化的两倍,这是不需要的。通常,光栅的周期性和角度的选择使得反射过程的相位匹配是由在光栅带宽内的虚光子动量完成的。为了第一波导中的带内输入光束和第二波导108中的输出光束114之间的优选耦连,输入光束的入射角等于衍射离开光栅的角度。此时,两个波导之间的角平分线垂直于波导平面中的光栅的畴边界。Figures 7 and 8 show two embodiments of electrically controlled frequency-selective waveguide couplers. In FIG. 7, a pair of two-dimensional waveguides pass through one side of a dielectric material and intersect each other at an angle 118 to form a T-shaped structure, forming a three-way device. A grating 100 consisting of a domain of the first type 104 and a domain of the second type 102 forms an angle between two waveguides where they intersect (the volume jointly occupied by the light modes in the two waveguides). The peak refractive index change in the intersection region is preferably equal to the peak refractive index change in the waveguide. This can be done if the fabrication of the T-shaped structure is done in one step (by means of in-diffusion, ion exchange, etching, etc.). In an alternative approach where the two waveguides are placed in a subsequent step, this is most convenient for making the intersecting waveguide of Figure 8, but the peak index change in the intersecting region is the index change in the waveguide twice, which is not needed. Usually, the periodicity and angle of the grating are chosen such that the phase matching of the reflection process is done by the virtual photon momentum within the bandwidth of the grating. For optimal coupling between the in-band input beam in the first waveguide and the output beam 114 in the second waveguide 108, the angle of incidence of the input beam is equal to the angle diffracted off the grating. At this point, the bisector of the angle between the two waveguides is perpendicular to the domain boundary of the grating in the plane of the waveguides.
一个光束112入射到第一波导106上,并且耦连到第一波导106中。第一电极120和第二电极122设置在介电材料的同一表面,使得当一个由导体126连接到两个电极上的电压源124接通时,在波导的相交区域中建立了一个电场。电场凭借由电光效应控制相交区域中的光栅的强度,把来自第一波导的带内光束耦连到第二波导中,以形成一个反射的输出光束114。当切断光栅时,输入光束继续占优地向下传播到第一波导段,在很小的损耗下形成发射的输出光束116。或者,在波导中可以使用反向传播光束,使得输入光束进入第二波导108,并且通过与光栅的相互作用被切换进入输出波导106。A light beam 112 is incident on the first waveguide 106 and is coupled into the first waveguide 106 . First electrode 120 and second electrode 122 are disposed on the same surface of the dielectric material such that when a voltage source 124 connected by conductor 126 to both electrodes is turned on, an electric field is established in the intersecting region of the waveguides. The electric field couples the in-band beam from the first waveguide into the second waveguide to form a reflected output beam 114 by virtue of the electro-optic effect controlling the intensity of the grating in the intersection region. When the grating is switched off, the input beam continues to propagate predominantly down the first waveguide section, forming the emitted output beam 116 with little loss. Alternatively, a counterpropagating beam may be used in the waveguide, such that the input beam enters the second waveguide 108 and is switched into the output waveguide 106 by interaction with the grating.
在单波型系统中,光栅强度优选在空间中以非均匀方式分布,使得进入波导106的最低阶高斯波耦连到波导108的最低阶高斯波。通过调节电极的几何形状,调节电极间隙,和调节光栅的负载循环可以调制光栅强度。也可以通过许多已知技术中的一种来提高光栅的带宽,例如线性调频脉冲,相移,和使用多周期结构。In a single mode type system, the grating intensity is preferably distributed in a non-uniform manner in space such that the lowest order Gaussian wave entering waveguide 106 couples to the lowest order Gaussian wave of waveguide 108 . The grating intensity can be modulated by adjusting the electrode geometry, adjusting the electrode gap, and adjusting the duty cycle of the grating. The bandwidth of the grating can also be increased by one of many known techniques, such as chirping, phase shifting, and using multi-period structures.
耦连区的尺寸是受限的,在图7和图8的几何形状中是受到波导之间它们的波型重叠的相交区域的尺寸的限制。为了获得用于一个给定电场强度的高净相互作用强度,有必要加大波导的尺寸,以产生一个较大的相交区域。但是大的波导是多波型的,其对于一些应用可能是不合适的。如果使用绝热膨胀和收缩,可同时获得大相交区域和单波型波导的优点。输入波导106开始是一个窄波导,并且当逼近相交区域时在宽度上绝热地增大。输出波导108在相交区域有大的宽度,以捕获大部分的反射光,并且它在宽度上绝热地逐渐地减小到一个窄的波导。输入和/或输出波导的绝热逐渐缩小的观念可以使用于本文所述的许多相交区域。The size of the coupling region is limited, in the geometries of Figures 7 and 8, by the size of the intersection region between the waveguides where their modes overlap. In order to obtain a high net interaction strength for a given electric field strength, it is necessary to oversize the waveguide to produce a larger intersection area. But large waveguides are multi-mode, which may not be suitable for some applications. If adiabatic expansion and contraction are used, the advantages of a large intersection area and a single-mode waveguide can be obtained simultaneously. The input waveguide 106 starts out as a narrow waveguide and adiabatically increases in width as the intersection region is approached. The output waveguide 108 has a large width in the intersection region to capture most of the reflected light, and it tapers adiabatically in width to a narrow waveguide. The concept of adiabatic tapering of the input and/or output waveguides can be used for many of the intersection regions described herein.
参考图8,两个波导136和138相交成角158,以造成X相交,形成一个四通装置。这个装置是多功能的波导切换器,因为其同时产生两个切换操作(光束142进入光束146和148,以及光束144进入光束148和146)。由第一类型畴134和第二类型畴132组成的光栅130设置在两个波导之间的相交区域中,与两个波导有一夹角。选择光栅的角度,使得在波导的平面中两个波导之间的角的平分线垂直于光栅的边界。Referring to Figure 8, the two waveguides 136 and 138 meet at an
第一输入光束142入射到第一波导136且耦连到波导136,第二输入光束144耦连到第二波导138。第一电极150和第二电极152设置在介电材料上,使得当连接在两个电极之间的电压源154开通时,在波导的相交区域建立一个电场。通过电光效应电场控制在相交区域中的折射率光栅的强度。当光栅开通时,第一输入光束的带内分量的一部分从第一波导耦连到第二波导中,以形成一个第一输出光束146。与此同时,来自第二波导的第二输入光束的带内分量的一部分耦连到第一波导中,以形成一个第二输出光束148。此外,两个光束的带外分量,和带内光束的任何未切换的分量继续往下在它们各自的波导中传播,以形成适当输出光束的额外部分。因此,对于多光频分量的两个光束而言,在两个输出光束中的单频分量可以在两个输出光束中切换。A first input beam 142 is incident on and coupled to the first waveguide 136 and a second input beam 144 is coupled to the second waveguide 138 . The first electrode 150 and the second electrode 152 are disposed on a dielectric material such that when a
波导可仅为一段,此时它被连接到位于基片外部或是与同一基片制成一体的其它光元件上。例如,波导段可连接到泵激光器,光纤,交叉波导,其它可切换光栅,反射镜器件,和其它元件上。一个交叉波导切换器阵列应包含一个光切换网络。The waveguide can be just one segment, in which case it is connected to other optical components either external to the substrate or integral with the same substrate. For example, waveguide segments can be connected to pump lasers, optical fibers, crossing waveguides, other switchable gratings, mirror devices, and other components. An array of crossed waveguide switches shall consist of an optical switching network.
在图9中,波导耦连开关的另一个实施例。光栅的畴壁现在是设置为不垂直于晶体158的表面157,使得波导160中的输入光束159被反射出晶体平面之外,以形成一个反射输出光束161。如同以前一样,未反射的光束继续经由波导传播,以形成一个发射的输出光束162。一个透光第一电极——它可以是由铟锡氧化物构成的——放置在介电材料158的一个表面上,并且在光栅跨越波导的部分的上方。一个第二电极结构164——其可以有对光的吸收性——放置在材料上。如本文中所述,第二电极安排为许多可选择构造中的任何一种:如图7所示安排在第一电极周围,如图2所示安排在材料158相反侧,如图6所示锥形构造。两个电极由两根导线156连接到一个电压源154上,其控制发射光束162和反射光束161之间的带内光束的功率分配比率。或者,电极构造可以像图5所示的那样,此时两个电极都是不透明的。In Figure 9, another embodiment of a waveguide coupled switch. The domain walls of the grating are now arranged non-perpendicular to the
再参考图9,畴壁优选由铁电晶体的电场极化所形成,而铁电晶体是与z-轴165成一个角度切割的。由于电场极化畴优先向下通过z轴,用这种技术极化一个角度切割的晶体导致边界平行于z轴,且与平面所夹角度相同。晶体切割角度166优选为45°,使晶体平面中的光的传播可以反射出垂直于材料表面的基片之外(任何角度均可使用)。图9所示的畴是平面,但可以构造为更一般的结构。平面光栅将从一个平的输入相前产生一个平的输出相前。如果将所示装置作为一个没有波导的大型反射器,一个准直输入光束将产生一个准直输出光束。这种装置作为块型反射器是有用的,例如如果光束是从装置外侧入射的,或如果波导在装置的一端,并且波导的端部和极化的反射器之间有一段距离。然而,由于在某些场合中应用要求聚焦——例如从光盘读取数据,因此优选可以从一个准直的光束产生一个弯曲的输出相前。通过图形化,在图9所示的基片的上表面上形成一组弯曲的畴,由于畴反转优先沿z轴传播,所以可以把一组弯曲畴极化到材料的主体中。因此,当被一个电场激励时,可以形成一组下凹(或上凸)的畴以建立一个圆柱形的透镜。用同样的方法可以形成楔形的以及更为复杂与表面相交成一个角度的立体结构。Referring again to FIG. 9 , domain walls are preferably formed by electric field polarization of a ferroelectric crystal cut at an angle to the z-
在一种替代的方法中,如果极化技术使畴边界与z-轴成一个角度传播时,可以用Z-切割晶体作为基片。例如,将钛(Ti)向内扩散到铌酸锂的Z-切割晶体中产生可用于把光束反射出晶体表面的三角畴。由向内扩散形成的相对于表面的畴的角度一般为大约30°,使得入射的光栅的输入光束将被以大约与晶体表面成60°的角度反射出表面。然后,可以用一个棱镜引出输出光束,或是在从顶表面全内反射后从后表面(其可以抛光成一个角度)输出。In an alternative approach, Z-cut crystals can be used as substrates if the poling technique allows domain boundaries to propagate at an angle to the z-axis. For example, inward diffusion of titanium (Ti) into a Z-cut crystal of lithium niobate creates triangular domains that can be used to reflect light beams away from the crystal surface. The angle of the domains formed by inward diffusion with respect to the surface is typically about 30° such that an input beam incident on the grating will be reflected off the surface at an angle of about 60° to the crystal surface. The output beam can then be extracted with a prism, or output from the rear surface (which can be polished at an angle) after total internal reflection from the top surface.
所示的电极结构激励一个E3分量,以及一个E1或一个E2分量。一个TM偏振输入波经历一个折射率变化,这个折射率变化是非寻常和寻常折射率变化达到组合。The electrode configuration shown excites an E3 component, and either an E1 or an E2 component. A TM polarized input wave undergoes a refractive index change that is a combination of extraordinary and ordinary refractive index changes.
在图10中,显示了一个可切换波导定向耦连器的实施例。一个第一波导204实际上在一定长度上平行于一个第二波导206。由于光束彼此靠近传播且在相似方向,它们的中心轴被移动了。中心轴永远不会共轴,使得波导不会相交。但是,波导段在由耦连器长度限定的位置相当靠近,使得两个波导的光波型的横向分布或多或少地重合。因此两个波型的传播至少是逐渐消失地耦连(意思是折射率尾部重合)。波型场的逐渐消失部分是在波导的高折射率区域外的指数地衰减部分。与两个波导的每个的波型相关的传播常数是由传播方向的方程式k=2πneff/λ确定的。有效折射率neff是光在真空中的速度与传播的群速度的比,其根据波导中的波型而变化。neff的值是由波型分布与被引导的波结构的重叠决定的。In FIG. 10, an embodiment of a switchable waveguide directional coupler is shown. A first waveguide 204 is substantially parallel to a second waveguide 206 over a certain length. As the beams propagate close to each other and in similar directions, their central axes are shifted. The central axes are never coaxial so that the waveguides do not intersect. However, the waveguide segments are fairly close together at the positions defined by the coupler length, so that the lateral profiles of the optical modes of the two waveguides more or less coincide. The propagation of the two modes is thus at least evanescently coupled (meaning that the refractive index tails coincide). The evanescent portion of the mode field is an exponentially decaying portion outside the high index region of the waveguide. The propagation constants associated with the modes of each of the two waveguides are determined by the equation k = 2πn eff /λ for the direction of propagation. The effective refractive index n eff is the ratio of the speed of light in vacuum to the group velocity of propagation, which varies according to the mode in the waveguide. The value of n eff is determined by the overlap of the mode distribution with the guided wave structure.
两个波导的宽度优选不同,因此两个波导中的波型的传播常数也不同,使得当光栅切断时,波型之间的耦连不是相位匹配的。(两个波导的折射分布折射率也可调节,以产生不同传播常数。)当光栅切断时,任何在第一波导中的输入光束210将在波导中继续传播,以形成一个输出第一波导204的输出光束214。当光栅开通时,光栅补偿两个波导的传播常数的差,使得两个波型间的耦连成为相位匹配,并把一个带内输出光束212输出第二波导206。为了优化耦连,适当选择光栅周期Λ使得两个波导中的传播常数等于光栅常数(在容许误差范围内)。两个波导的传播常数可选择相等,使光栅切断时两个波导管之间发生耦连。在这种情况下,开通光栅将降低两个波导之间的耦连。The widths of the two waveguides are preferably different, and thus the propagation constants of the modes in the two waveguides are also different, so that when the grating is cut, the coupling between the modes is not phase matched. (The refractive profiles of the two waveguides can also be tuned to produce different propagation constants.) When the grating is switched off, any input beam 210 in the first waveguide will continue to propagate in the waveguide to form an output first waveguide 204 The output beam 214 of . When the grating is turned on, the grating compensates for the difference in the propagation constants of the two waveguides such that the coupling between the two modes is phase matched and outputs an in-band output beam 212 out of the second waveguide 206 . To optimize the coupling, the grating period Λ is chosen such that the propagation constant in both waveguides is equal to the grating constant (within tolerance). The propagation constants of the two waveguides can be chosen to be equal so that coupling occurs between the two waveguides when the grating is cut. In this case, turning on the grating will reduce the coupling between the two waveguides.
光栅的强度决定耦连常数,其界定两个波导之间的耦连程度。沿两个波导的交界区域的长度,功率在波导间以正弦波往返传播,使得耦连首先从第一波导到第二波导,然后回到第一波导。在特定波导波型中在最大功率的两个位置之间的距离是大家所熟知的耦连波导的脉动长度(best length)。此脉动长度取决于光栅的强度。The strength of the grating determines the coupling constant, which defines the degree of coupling between the two waveguides. Along the length of the interface region of the two waveguides, the power propagates back and forth between the waveguides as a sinusoid, so that the coupling is first from the first waveguide to the second waveguide and then back to the first waveguide. The distance between the two locations of maximum power in a particular waveguide mode is known as the best length of the coupled waveguide. The length of this pulse depends on the strength of the grating.
一个第一电极220和一个第二电极222设置在材料表面,以便当在两个电极之间施加电场时,建立越过光栅区202的电场。利用一个导电材料224将一个电压源226连接于两个电极。通过施加到光栅的电压控制光栅的强度,因而也控制了两个波导之间的脉动长度。A first electrode 220 and a second electrode 222 are disposed on the surface of the material such that when an electric field is applied between the two electrodes, an electric field is established across the grating region 202 . A voltage source 226 is connected to both electrodes by means of a conductive material 224 . The strength of the grating, and thus the pulse length between the two waveguides, is controlled by the voltage applied to the grating.
两个波导的传播常数非常依赖于波长。由于虚光子的动量基本上或主导上是固定的(即,它是由在应用中不变化的参数确定的),功率仅在单一频率附近被传播到第二波导,而单一频率的频带宽度是由耦连区域的长度决定的。根据光栅强度,带内输入光束的可调节部分作为耦连的输出光束212输出第二波导,同时输入光束的带外部分作为发射的输出光束214与带内光束的剩余的部分一同从第一波导输出。The propagation constants of the two waveguides are very wavelength dependent. Since the momentum of the virtual photon is substantially or predominantly fixed (i.e., it is determined by a parameter that does not change in the application), power is propagated into the second waveguide only around a single frequency, and the bandwidth of the single frequency is Determined by the length of the coupling region. Depending on the grating strength, an adjustable portion of the in-band input beam exits the second waveguide as a coupled output beam 212, while an out-of-band portion of the input beam emerges from the first waveguide as a transmitted output beam 214 along with the remaining portion of the in-band beam. output.
两个波型之间的耦连可以几种方式电光控制,包括波型之间的耦连强度,增加波型的重叠,或改变其中一个波导的有效折射率。上面所说的电光控制耦连是优选的方法。为了使两个波导中的波型之间有效地耦连,输入光束向前散射,这需要最小光栅周期。The coupling between two modes can be electro-optically controlled in several ways, including the strength of the coupling between the modes, increasing the overlap of the modes, or changing the effective refractive index of one of the waveguides. Electro-optic controlled coupling as described above is the preferred method. For efficient coupling between the modes in the two waveguides, the input beam is forward scattered, which requires a minimum grating period.
或者,如上文结合图2所述,耦连光栅可为永久和可切换光栅的组合。在此我们详述如何完成此目的。在形成所需的周期畴后,可以化学蚀刻基片,以形成凹凸光栅,其周期与被极化结构完全相同。对于优选的铌酸锂材料而言,蚀刻可以在没有进一步掩蔽的步骤下完成,因为不同类型的畴蚀刻的速度不同。例如,氢氟酸(HF)对铌酸锂的-z畴的蚀刻显著(>100x)快于+z畴。因此,把z-切割晶体浸在50%的HF溶液中,由第一类型的畴构成的区域被蚀刻,而由第二类型畴构成的区域基本上保持未被蚀刻。这一步骤产生永久耦连光栅,其本身可用来在两个波导之间产生耦连。在施加电极后,可以激励极化光栅以产生迭加在蚀刻的基片的光栅上的折射光栅的附加折射率。可以控制蚀刻的深度,使得永久蚀刻光栅引起的有效折射率改变可以被在电极以一种极性激励时电光引起的光栅部分地或全部地抵偿,同时折射率光栅在另一种偏振上倍增。因此产生一种推挽光栅,借此光栅可以在一种非激活状态和一种强激活状态之间切换。Alternatively, the coupling grating may be a combination of permanent and switchable gratings, as described above in connection with FIG. 2 . Here we detail how to accomplish this. After forming the desired periodic domains, the substrate can be chemically etched to form a concave-convex grating whose period is exactly the same as the structure to be poled. For the preferred lithium niobate material, etching can be done without further masking steps because different types of domains etch at different rates. For example, hydrofluoric acid (HF) etches the -z domains of lithium niobate significantly (>100x) faster than the +z domains. Thus, by immersing a z-cut crystal in a 50% HF solution, regions composed of domains of the first type are etched while regions composed of domains of the second type remain substantially unetched. This step produces a permanently coupled grating, which itself can be used to create a coupling between the two waveguides. After application of the electrodes, the polarized grating can be actuated to produce an additive index of refraction grating superimposed on the grating of the etched substrate. The depth of etching can be controlled so that the effective refractive index change induced by permanently etching the grating can be partially or fully offset by the electro-optic induced grating when the electrode is excited in one polarity, while the index grating is multiplied in the other polarization. This results in a push-pull light barrier, whereby the light barrier can be switched between an inactive state and a strongly active state.
当蚀刻区被一种具有高电光系数和接近基片的折射率的电光材料——例如聚合物或透光液晶——充满时,蚀刻的光栅也是有用的。被充填的蚀刻区优选向下延伸到光束。当施加一个电压通过充填蚀刻区时,充填材料的折射率也是在波导的其余部分的折射率附近变化。Etched gratings are also useful when the etched region is filled with an electro-optic material, such as a polymer or a light-transmitting liquid crystal, that has a high electro-optic coefficient and a refractive index close to that of the substrate. The filled etch region preferably extends down to the beam. When a voltage is applied across the fill etched region, the refractive index of the fill material also changes around that of the remainder of the waveguide.
或者,可以电光修改两个波导中的波型重叠。例如,两个波导之间的区域的折射率可以提高。这降减小了对波导的限制,并扩展了各个波型朝向彼此的空间量,加大了重叠。要实施此方法,可以相对于横向于波导的基片的极性反向极化两个波导之间的区域。如果电极延伸跨越两个波导以及它们的中间区域,一个施加的电压将增加波导之间区域的折射率,同时减小两个波导中的折射率。波型限制减小的结果增大了两种波型之间的重叠和耦连。必须小心不要在波导中引起不须要的反射或波型耦连损耗,其会在极化区域的边缘发生。这些损耗可以降到最小,例如使极化区或电极的几何形状成为锥形,使得波型变化沿波导绝热地发生,以将反射降至最小。绝热变化意思是指与在有限速率下发生的平衡维持过程相比之下的一个非常缓慢的变化。在这种场合下,其系指与能量重新分配速率相比之下该变化很慢,能量重新分配是由于波导内的衍射而产生的,并且维持波导中的光的波型特征。Alternatively, the mode overlap in the two waveguides can be modified electro-optically. For example, the refractive index of the region between two waveguides can be increased. This reduces the confinement of the waveguide and expands the amount of space for the individual modes to face each other, increasing the overlap. To implement this method, the region between the two waveguides can be polarized oppositely with respect to the polarity of the substrate transverse to the waveguides. If the electrodes extend across both waveguides and their intermediate regions, an applied voltage will increase the refractive index in the region between the waveguides while decreasing the refractive index in both waveguides. A consequence of the reduced mode limitation is increased overlap and coupling between the two modes. Care must be taken not to induce unwanted reflection or mode coupling losses in the waveguide, which can occur at the edges of the polarized regions. These losses can be minimized, for example, by tapering the polarization region or electrode geometry so that the mode change occurs adiabatically along the waveguide to minimize reflections. By adiabatic change is meant a very slow change compared to the equilibrium maintenance process that occurs at a finite rate. In this context, it means that the change is slow compared to the rate of energy redistribution due to diffraction within the waveguide and maintains the wave-mode characteristics of the light in the waveguide.
改变两个波导之间的耦连的第三种方法是相对一个波导改变另一个的有效折射率。因此,改变了波导的传播常数,这又改变了相位匹配条件。此效应可以借助极化其中一个波导使得它的电光系数的符号与另一个波导的相反而最大化。此时,耦连光栅可以是永久的或是可切换的光栅。一个第一电极覆盖了两个波导以及它们之间的区域,而第二电极可以设置在第一电极的两侧。一个施加于两个电极之间的电场造成一个波导的传播常数增加,并使另一个的传播常数降低,因而使得两个传播常数的差达到最大。光栅耦连过程在传播常数的差异为一特定值时有最大效率。通过调谐施加的电压,可以根据需要调节相位匹配。此效应可以用来建立一个波长可调谐的滤波器。A third way to vary the coupling between two waveguides is to vary the effective index of refraction of one waveguide relative to the other. Therefore, the propagation constant of the waveguide is changed, which in turn changes the phase matching condition. This effect can be maximized by polarizing one of the waveguides so that the sign of its electro-optical coefficient is opposite to that of the other waveguide. In this case, the coupling grating can be a permanent or switchable grating. A first electrode covers the two waveguides and the area between them, and the second electrode can be arranged on both sides of the first electrode. An electric field applied between two electrodes causes the propagation constant of one waveguide to increase and that of the other to decrease, thus maximizing the difference between the two propagation constants. The grating coupling process has maximum efficiency when the difference in propagation constant is a certain value. By tuning the applied voltage, the phase matching can be adjusted as desired. This effect can be used to create a wavelength tunable filter.
图10中显示的平行波导可以是不平行的,而且波导甚至可以不是直的。例如,如果需要改变波导之间的空间相互作用强度,这个目的可以通过调节波导之间的空间间隔而完成。当然,这些修改可应用于下面所述的平行波导实施例。The parallel waveguides shown in Figure 10 may not be parallel, and the waveguides may not even be straight. For example, if it is desired to vary the strength of the spatial interaction between the waveguides, this can be accomplished by adjusting the spatial separation between the waveguides. Of course, these modifications are applicable to the parallel waveguide embodiments described below.
参考图12和13,其显示了用于控制反射光束分布的交叉波导耦连器的替代实施例。在每个实施例中,光栅覆盖的区域并未延伸完全跨越两个波导的交界区。要了解这些光栅结构的动机请参阅图11。视其如何构造,功率耦连结构282可以使它耦连到输出波导中的波型284的空间分布扭曲。在空间上均匀的且均匀地完全覆盖两个以大夹角——例如90°——设置的波导之间的相交区域280的功率耦连器将产生一个输出光束分布,例如不对称分布286。当输入光束通过功率耦连结构或光栅时,输入光束中的功率降低。在直角相交的场合,反射光束的近场分布(near field profile)与输入光束中的单调降低的功率匹配。不对称分布286的缺点在于单波型结构,其中仅有部分耦连的功率会留在波导中。大部分功率将从波导处损失。Referring to Figures 12 and 13, there are shown alternative embodiments of crossed waveguide couplers for controlling reflected beam distribution. In each embodiment, the area covered by the grating does not extend completely across the interface region of the two waveguides. See Figure 11 for the motivation of these grating structures. Depending on how it is configured, the power coupling structure 282 can distort the spatial distribution of the modes 284 that it couples into the output waveguide. A power coupler that is spatially uniform and uniformly completely covers the intersection region 280 between two waveguides disposed at a large included angle, such as 90°, will produce an output beam distribution, such as an asymmetric distribution 286 . As the input beam passes through a power coupling structure or grating, the power in the input beam is reduced. At right-angle intersections, the near field profile of the reflected beam matches the monotonically decreasing power in the input beam. A disadvantage of the asymmetric distribution 286 is a single mode structure where only part of the coupled power will remain in the waveguide. Most of the power will be lost from the waveguide.
对于单波型装置而言,其需要有一种结构将功率耦连到输出波导的最低阶波型的高斯式空间构造288中。为达到这个目的,区域282必须向外延伸到被引导波型的逐渐消失的尾部,并且必须调制——形状调制或通过空间调节功率耦连光栅的局部强度——净相互作用。图12和13显示了利用光栅的几何形状安排达到此目的的方法。也可以通过在功率耦连区域282内空间调制光栅的“负载循环”,通过改变在选择区域中的光栅的阶数,以及在电控耦连的场合,通过锥形化施加电场的强度(如图6所示那样通过调节电极的间距,或通过在光栅电极结构的场合调节电极负载循环)来完成此目的。光栅的负载循环是指由一个给定畴类型占据的每个周期分数;负载循环可随位置变化。For a single mode device, there needs to be a structure to couple power into the Gaussian spatial configuration 288 of the lowest order mode of the output waveguide. To achieve this, region 282 must extend outward into the evanescent tail of the guided wave mode, and must modulate - either shape modulation or spatially modulate the local intensity of the power-coupled grating - the net interaction. Figures 12 and 13 show how the geometrical arrangement of the gratings can be used for this purpose. It is also possible to spatially modulate the "duty cycle" of the grating in the power coupling region 282, by varying the order of the grating in the selected region, and in the case of electrically controlled coupling, by tapering the strength of the applied electric field (e.g. This is accomplished by adjusting the spacing of the electrodes as shown in Figure 6, or by adjusting the electrode duty cycle in the case of a grating electrode structure). The duty cycle of a grating is the fraction of each period occupied by a given domain type; the duty cycle can vary with position.
在图12中,显示了一个具有修改了的光栅的装置300,其中光栅区域310覆盖了部分的,但不是全部的两个正交波导316和318的矩形交界区。当光栅未激活时,输入光束302未被偏转地通过波导316,以作为输出光束308输出。交界区的尺寸与两个波导的宽度304和305相匹配。功率耦连结构的一个小区域出现在交界区中的任何一点上将造成输入波导中的光束分布的一个给定横向段局部耦连到一个输出波导中的光束分布的一个给定横向段中。被反射的光束分布是从这些相位耦连的分布的传播总数构成的。所述的光栅区域310是三角形的,具有三角顶点311,312和313。光栅区域形状可以改为不是三角形的,并且可以调制局部光栅强度。在波导间使单波型耦连特性优选化的光栅区域的精确形状用已经建立的波导传播技术计算,例如光束传播法。In FIG. 12 , a
图13表述了单波型耦连光栅装置340的又一个实施例。光栅区域350是一个双凸形,其中在拐角351的一点与波导346和348以及光束330和342共用,而相反的拐角352的一点与波导和光束342和332共用。这种结构的优点就是在光束中段的功率大部分被反射,光的密度在该处最高,因此较好地耦连了在两个波导346和348中的最低阶波型之间的功率。光栅区域的优选形状也是由光栅耦连常数决定的。FIG. 13 illustrates yet another embodiment of a single-mode coupled grating device 340 . Grating region 350 is a biconvex shape in which a point at corner 351 is shared with waveguides 346 and 348 and beams 330 and 342 and a point at the opposite corner 352 is shared with waveguides and beams 342 and 332 . The advantage of this configuration is that most of the power is reflected in the middle of the beam, where the light intensity is highest, thus better coupling the power between the lowest order modes in the two waveguides 346 and 348 . The preferred shape of the grating region is also determined by the grating coupling constant.
参考图12和13,一个第一电极320设置在与波导同一基片的表面上,在光栅区域的上方,第二电极322设置在同一表面的第一电极的周围。两个电极之间的距离如图13中所示是一定的,或是如图12所示可以沿一个方向逐渐缩小。一个电压控制源324由两个导线326连接于两个电极。因而可以施加一个电场通过光栅区域以激活电光系数之一,并改变输入光束和输出光束之间的耦连。Referring to Figures 12 and 13, a
为了说明的目的,图12也显示了一个锥形输入波导段287和一个锥形输出段289。一个输入光束285绝热地膨胀通过锥形段287以增大交界区域,并因此增加了从光栅310的总反射。光栅可以将现时膨胀的光束285朝输出光束308反射。如果需要到话,输出波导也可以包含一个锥形段289以减小输出光束的宽度。(或者,如果需要的话,可以保持输出光束的宽度,以用于稍后的光束切换相互作用。)Figure 12 also shows a tapered
光栅可以延伸超过两个波导的交界区。一个沿着输入波导延伸的光栅可以使交界区后面的残余发射光从波导移去,一般是进入辐射波型。延伸的光栅使切换阵列中光信道之间的串音降低到最小,其中一个单独波导可以有一个以上的沿其长度传播的信号信道。The grating may extend beyond the interface region of the two waveguides. A grating extending along the input waveguide allows residual emission behind the interface region to be removed from the waveguide, typically into the radiation mode. The extended grating minimizes crosstalk between optical channels in a switched array, where a single waveguide can have more than one signal channel propagating along its length.
本发明的特别构思是一个用于调谐光栅的装置。图14-17中显示了可以完成这种调谐的几个实施例。参考图14,其为一个块状光装置400,其中一个垂直入射反射光栅的强度和中央波长由一个单一电压源426控制。这个装置由一个图形化的极化光栅构成,其被两个在材料的相反表面上并由导体424连接到电压源426上的电极电光激活。光栅的强度和中央频率由施加在装置的两个电极之间的单一电压同时调谐。光栅的平均折射率随施加的电场变化,引起光栅的中央波长与电场成比例的变化,通过对在各种类型的畴中的加权折射率变化求和,计算出在一个周期性的光栅中的一个单一光栅周期中的平均折射率。加权因数是每个类型的畴沿输入光束404的光路的物理长度416和418。调频的条件是加权的和数不等于零,使得平均折射率变化成为电场变化的结果。A particular concept of the invention is a device for tuning a grating. Several embodiments in which such tuning can be accomplished are shown in Figures 14-17. Referring to FIG. 14 , a bulk light device 400 in which the intensity and central wavelength of a normal incidence reflective grating is controlled by a single voltage source 426 is shown. This device consists of a patterned polarization grating electro-optically activated by two electrodes on opposite surfaces of the material and connected by conductor 424 to a voltage source 426 . The intensity and central frequency of the grating are tuned simultaneously by a single voltage applied between the two electrodes of the device. The average refractive index of the grating varies with the applied electric field, causing the central wavelength of the grating to change proportionally to the electric field. In a periodic grating, the Average index of refraction over a single grating period. The weighting factors are the physical lengths 416 and 418 of each type of domain along the optical path of the input beam 404 . The condition for frequency modulation is that the weighted sum is not equal to zero, so that the average refractive index change is the result of the electric field change.
折射率和光束经过的实际距离的乘积被称为光程。(对于波导器件,用有效折射率代替折射率)。如果跨越两类畴的平均光程基本相等(在由应用需求确定的误差范围内近似相等),在有两类畴的光栅中获得50%负载循环。平均值取自许多后续畴,以允许线性调频脉冲、非周期、或其它更多通用类型的光栅的可能性。通常,畴可具有不同折射率以及不同电-光系数。用于调谐的一般条件以在不同类型畴中行进的实际距离表示。对于每种畴,由光所行进的光程(乘2π/λ)给出全光相位超前。然而,由所施加的电场、适当的电-光系数、和实际距离(乘2π/λ)的乘积给出相位超前中的变化。该波经历的折射率的平均变化等于材料长度为1(乘λ/2π1)的区段内的光波经过的所有畴中相位超前变化的总和。平均折射率变化根据δλ/λ=δn/n确定峰值交互作用波长中的变化。光栅强度与结构中的波长同时变化,但这种同时变化可能是不希望的。设计该结构以使完成调谐的工作点针对跨越整个波长调谐范围的应用保持足够高的光栅强度。或者,可使用如下面参考图16和17描述的分离调谐结构。The product of the index of refraction and the actual distance traveled by the beam is called the optical path length. (For waveguide devices, substitute effective index of refraction for index of refraction). A 50% duty cycle is obtained in a grating with two types of domains if the average optical path lengths across the two types of domains are substantially equal (approximately equal within error limits determined by application requirements). The average is taken over many subsequent domains to allow for the possibility of chirped, aperiodic, or other more general types of gratings. In general, domains can have different indices of refraction as well as different electro-optical coefficients. General conditions for tuning are expressed in terms of actual distance traveled in different types of domains. For each domain, the all-optical phase advance is given by the optical path traveled by the light (multiplied by 2π/λ). However, the change in phase advance is given by the product of the applied electric field, the appropriate electro-optic coefficient, and the actual distance (by 2π/λ). The average change in refractive index experienced by this wave is equal to the sum of the phase advance changes in all domains that the light wave passes through in a segment of material length 1 (times λ/2π1). The average refractive index change determines the change in peak interaction wavelength according to δλ/λ=δn/n. The grating intensity varies simultaneously with the wavelength in the structure, but this simultaneous variation may be undesirable. The structure is designed such that the operating point at which tuning is done maintains a sufficiently high grating strength for applications spanning the entire wavelength tuning range. Alternatively, a separate tuning structure as described below with reference to Figures 16 and 17 may be used.
可通过不同方法实现平均折射率中的变化。一种方式是随机非电-光作用畴414与电-光作用畴412交替设置。电-光作用区是极化畴,而非电-光作用畴可以被随机极化或非极化或禁止辐射。因此,电场引起跨越该光栅的折射率的平均值增加Δnavg。在图14的随机极化结构中,Δnavg等于作用畴412中的折射率变化与负载循环的乘积。负载循环等于长度418除以长度418和416之和。使用该技术在一随机极化结构中达到的可调谐性是λΔnavg/n,其中λ是光波长、n是材料的固有(有效)折射率。假设在铌酸锂中的波长为1.55μm、电场为10V/μm、对于50%负载循环结构而言,其调谐范围为1.1nm。The change in average refractive index can be achieved by different methods. One way is to randomly arrange non-electro-optic domains 414 and electro-optic domains 412 alternately. Electro-optic active regions are polarized domains, while non-electro-optic active domains can be randomly polarized or non-polarized or radiation-forbidden. Thus, the electric field causes the average value of the refractive index across the grating to increase Δn avg . In the randomly polarized structure of FIG. 14, Δn avg is equal to the product of the refractive index change in the active domain 412 and the duty cycle. The duty cycle is equal to length 418 divided by the sum of lengths 418 and 416 . The tunability achieved using this technique in a randomly polarized structure is λΔn avg /n, where λ is the wavelength of light and n is the intrinsic (effective) index of refraction of the material. Assuming a wavelength of 1.55 μm in lithium niobate and an electric field of 10 V/μm, the tuning range is 1.1 nm for a 50% duty cycle structure.
当输入光束404在光栅的带宽内时,该光栅将光束耦连到向后反射输出光束402中;否则,输入光束形成透射输出光束406。如两种类型的畴具有相同电-光系数但极性相反,如畴反向的情况,则与50%负载循环的光栅的运行状态相反。在后一情况下,由于第一类畴的折射率变化由另一类畴的折射率变化抵失,故此不改变平均折射率。50%负载循环畴的反向光栅不调谐其中心频率。The grating couples the beam into the retroreflected output beam 402 when the input beam 404 is within the bandwidth of the grating; otherwise, the input beam forms a transmitted output beam 406 . If the two types of domains have the same electro-optic coefficient but opposite polarity, as in the case of domain inversion, then the behavior of the grating with a 50% duty cycle is reversed. In the latter case, the average refractive index is not changed since the change in the refractive index of the domains of the first type is offset by the change in the refractive index of the domains of the other type. The inverse grating of the 50% duty cycle domain does not tune its center frequency.
在畴反向光栅中实现平均有效折射率改变的另一种方法是使用不相等长度416≠418极化畴区的非50%负载循环。使用该技术获得的可调谐性是(2D-1)Δnλ/n,其中D是最大畴型的负载循环(D>0.5)。例如,对于75%负载循环,铌酸锂中的波长为1.55μm、电场为10V/μm,则调谐范围为0.54nm。畴反向光栅也比第二类畴是非电光作用的光栅强。Another way to achieve average effective index change in a domain inversion grating is to use a non-50% duty cycle of unequal length 416≠418 polarized domains. The tunability obtained using this technique is (2D-1)Δnλ/n, where D is the duty cycle of the largest domain type (D > 0.5). For example, for a 75% duty cycle, a wavelength of 1.55 μm in lithium niobate, and an electric field of 10 V/μm, the tuning range is 0.54 nm. Domain inversion gratings are also stronger than the second type of gratings in which the domains are non-electro-optic.
图15示出使用相同平均折射率效果的波导器件440。这种情况下,波导管442的平均有效折射率在光栅区450中随所施加的引起光栅中心波长改变的电场而改变。电压控制源466用来向优选是设置在材料相同表面的第一电极460和第二电极462之间施加电场。通过包括非电-光作用畴或带有50%负载循环的畴反向光栅的各种几何形状可实现平均有效折射率。当输入光束455处在光栅带宽内时,光栅将光束耦连到向后反射输出光束444中;否则,输入光束形成透射输出光束446。Figure 15 shows a
增强波导器件480中光栅的调谐性的一种方法是在波导管上叠加第二电-光材料482以形成覆盖层,如图16所示。该覆盖层应对在波导管中传播的波透明并应对电场敏感以便可调节修正其折射率。由该覆盖层的折射率部分地确定平均有效折射率。第二材料可比基片具有更高的电-光系数。液晶和聚合物是可作为覆盖层材料的较好实例。镀层的折射率优选接近引导区的折射率以引导大部分光束在覆盖层中传播。One way to enhance the tunability of the grating in the
对于该实施例,由第二电极504在基片上围绕第一电极502,用于施加跨越极化光栅490的电场。电极优选设置在覆盖层下面直接在基片上。如果第一电极502直接设置在波导管484上方,如图16所示,则必须由透光材料制成。电极也可配置在波导管484的任何一侧,这种情况下不要求材料透光。第三电极506设置覆盖层顶部上,在波导管和第一电极上方。对于该实施例,该光栅的中心波长和强度可分别控制。由用两条导线513、514连到第一和第二电极的第一电压源510控制光栅强度,由用两条导线514、515连在第一和第二电极之间的第二电压源512控制光栅的中心波长。在另一种电极结构中,仅使用两个电极,两个电极优选都设置在覆盖层材料顶部上,以使其感应场透过光栅上的覆盖层材料,和光栅结构本身。用一个电压源控制中心波长和光栅强度,而不是独立控制。For this embodiment, the
用电-光作用覆盖层实现的调谐性的量取决于哪部分引导光束在覆盖层中传播。如果两个折射率相对接近以致有10%光束在覆盖层中传播,引导模式的有效折射率中的平均变化则等于覆盖层折射率中变化的10%。对于0.1的覆盖层折射率变化,可调性性大约在7nm的数量级。The amount of tunability achieved with an electro-optic coating depends on which part of the guided beam propagates in the coating. If the two indices are relatively close such that 10% of the beam propagates in the cladding, the average change in the effective index of the guided mode is then equal to 10% of the change in the cladding index. The tunability is on the order of 7nm for a change in the refractive index of the capping layer of 0.1.
图17示出由可独立控制的光栅530、532、534组成的单独可调谐光栅器件520的实施例。该光栅与输入光束522、正向光束523和反射光束524路径中的所有光栅串联。该结构中每个独立光栅也是在一小范围内可连续调谐。图17中的每个光栅具有用导线连接到电压控制网络552的第一电极542和第二电极544。每次可将一个光栅切换到导通,以便在小通带中一次仅反射一波长,或可同时将多个光栅切换到道通,以产生中心波长和带宽可被分开控制的可编程光滤波器。可通过包括每个光栅中多周期可能性的上述改进实施光栅本身。FIG. 17 shows an embodiment of an individually tunable
该结构可以为块状或作为导管器件实现。在后一种情况下,在基片上制造光波导528以使波导与极化光栅相交。光栅畴536可仅延伸通过波导而不需要延伸穿过材料所有方向。两个电极优选(对于更高的场强)象波导一样沉积在基片同一表面上。所有光栅的第二电极可如图所示连接以使电连接数量最小。The structure can be realized in bulk or as a catheter device. In the latter case, an
另一方面,独立的可编址光栅结构可以是一个块状器件,在此情况下可省略波导528,以足够深度适宜地制造极化区530、532和534以便以传播的光波型重叠。控制每个光栅的两个电极适宜地设置在材料相对面的优选位置,以使电场透射优选,如图12的单个光栅实例所示。通过将光栅-电极群隔开到与基片厚度可与相比的范围,或通过增加交替固定电位电极可使电极间的电场边缘引起的相邻光栅之的交叉激励最小。Alternatively, the stand-alone addressable grating structure could be a bulk device, in which
另一种调谐光栅的方法是改变作用材料的温度。由于两种效应产生调谐:热膨胀和热-光效应。对于不同材料,两种效应的任何一种可支配热感应调谐。在铌酸锂中,较大的效应是热膨胀,其最大(a轴)膨胀系数ΔL/L为+14×10-6℃-1,而普通轴Δn0/n的热-光系数是+5.6×10-6℃-1。对于100℃的温度范围,这两种效应的组合给出2.6nm的总波长调谐范围。Another way to tune the grating is to vary the temperature of the active material. The tuning occurs due to two effects: thermal expansion and the thermo-optic effect. For different materials, either of the two effects may govern thermal induction tuning. In lithium niobate, the larger effect is thermal expansion, with a maximum (a-axis) expansion coefficient ΔL/L of +14×10 -6 ℃ -1 and a thermo-optic coefficient of ordinary axis Δn 0 /n of +5.6 ×10 -6 °C -1 . The combination of these two effects gives a total wavelength tuning range of 2.6 nm for a temperature range of 100°C.
为了许多目的,希望产生具有广义频率内容的极化光栅。例如需要多交互作用峰值,或简单地展宽一个交互作用的带宽。为实现该目的,需要采用某种方式确定对应于所给出的包含所要求频率的数学函数的极化区边界的图形。图18表明在包含任意相移的单频率情况下的处理结果。参考图18,可沿正弦函数560在一个或多个位置合并光相移564和565以改进其波长结构。由直线561给出该函数的平均电平。还示出了具有相同相移的对应方波函数562,如通过一般极化处理可实现的。为实现连续函数向方波函数的转换,曲线560超出正弦波平均值561的区570对应于一种类型的畴,而曲线560低于平均值561的区572对应于第二种类型的畴。在正弦波频率谐波以下的低频范围内方波曲线562的傅里叶变换将与正弦函数560的变换具有相同的频率分量。该方法工作于任何类型的广义频率分布,只要该带宽不超过载频的一小部分。For many purposes it is desirable to generate polarized gratings with generalized frequency content. Examples include the need for multiple interaction peaks, or simply broadening the bandwidth of an interaction. To achieve this, some way is required to determine the figure corresponding to the boundary of the polarization region given the mathematical function containing the desired frequency. Figure 18 shows the processing results in the case of a single frequency involving arbitrary phase shifts. Referring to FIG. 18,
在此可用例如诸如图2中那样描述的任何器件实施相移光栅,可通过图18的图形562而不是周期函数确定光栅22中畴壁34的位置。可用引入所需图形的极化掩模控制相移图形。Where a phase shift grating can be implemented with, for example, any device such as that described in FIG. 2, the position of the domain walls 34 in the grating 22 can be determined by the
可用类似技术规定任意多个周期光栅。出现在光栅中的每个周期是由所需幅度的对应正弦波以傅里叶级数(或积分)表示的。所有波加在一起形成一合成波。合成波的正值部分对应于一种类型的畴,而其负值部分对应于第二种类型的畴。叠置光栅的数量在原理上可增大到任何数量,在实际中则受可达到的最小尺寸限制。Any number of periodic gratings can be specified using a similar technique. Each period present in the grating is represented in a Fourier series (or integral) by a corresponding sine wave of desired amplitude. All waves add together to form a synthetic wave. The positive-valued portion of the synthesized wave corresponds to one type of domain, while its negative-valued portion corresponds to the second type of domain. The number of stacked gratings can in principle be increased to any number, but in practice is limited by the smallest achievable size.
图19示出制造叠置多周期光栅装置580的另一种方法。其中揭示了二光栅波导结构,该结构中有一可切换的单周期极化光栅582和一个在波导中与一单光束交互作用的永久释放光栅584。在释放光栅顶部沉积一层涂层588以降低当引导波波型渐渐消失的尾部与金属电极重叠时产生的损耗。该涂层是对这里描述的所有元件优选化的重要设计,并应施加在每个电极结构和相邻光波导之间。也可在这里描述的所有元件中的电极上使用一涂层以减少击穿的可能性。FIG. 19 shows another method of fabricating a stacked multi-period
在超周期结构中,由一对电极602和604切换可电控的光栅,电极由导线606连到电压控制源608。第一电极602优选在波导上方的中间,而第二电极604在波导任一侧且与第一电极平行。所述装置为一带有限制输入光束590,以及透射输出光束592和反射输出光束594的波导586的波导装置。In a superperiodic configuration, an electrically controllable grating is switched by a pair of
可用很多方式构成多周期光栅。例如,可将频谱中多个独立峰值用作一个多频率反馈反射镜。在组合启动处理的两个适当周期的单个光栅中可实现两种操作(例如相位匹配和反射)。最后一个实例,可通过调节其元件的相位和幅度使两种极化波型上等效来制造光栅,制成一个极化不敏感的元件。Multi-period gratings can be constructed in many ways. For example, multiple independent peaks in the spectrum can be used as a multi-frequency feedback mirror. Both operations (such as phase matching and reflection) can be achieved in a single grating combining two appropriate periods of the activation process. As a final example, a grating can be fabricated by adjusting the phase and amplitude of its elements so that the two polarization modes are equivalent, making a polarization-insensitive element.
周期结构的另一种有益改进是线性调频脉冲周期。该周期沿光栅结构的长度逐渐增加或降低,以使中心频率从光栅的一端变到另一端。因此,该光栅的波长带宽被加宽为超过一常数周期光栅的波长带宽。跨越光栅的线性调频脉冲不一定为线性:根据线性调频脉冲率的变化可实现在频率空间(例如方波,洛伦兹型)中的许多不同波长反射分布。如上所述,也可在空间上调节激励电场的负载循环和/或强度,以改进线性调频脉冲光栅不同部分的强度。可按要求通过掩模控制光栅的负载循环。通过调节图6中例子所示的电极间隔控制电场强度。Another beneficial modification of the periodic structure is the chirp period. The period gradually increases or decreases along the length of the grating structure so that the center frequency changes from one end of the grating to the other. Therefore, the wavelength bandwidth of the grating is widened beyond that of a constant-period grating. A chirp across a grating is not necessarily linear: many different wavelength reflection distributions in frequency space (eg square wave, Lorentzian type) can be achieved depending on the chirp rate. As mentioned above, the duty cycle and/or strength of the excitation electric field can also be adjusted spatially to improve the strength of different parts of the chirped raster. The duty cycle of the grating can be controlled via a mask as required. The electric field strength was controlled by adjusting the electrode spacing as shown in the example in FIG. 6 .
在包含两个具有多峰值结构的分开光栅结构中可实现宽频谱可调谐装置,如图21和22所示。图20说明了这些装置的基本原理并描绘了多峰值梳状透射(或反射)分布620和622,作为这两个光栅的光频率的函数。第一光栅分布620具有由第一周期626分开的透射峰值,而第二光栅分布622具有由第二周期624分开的峰值,第二周期与第一周期略有不同。本装置的主要构思是使该装置仅在从两曲线(频率ν1)峰值的重叠确定的频率操作。通过彼此相对调谐光栅透射峰值的梳齿实现调谐。两个梳齿中的不同透射峰值将在相对频移的不同范围内相互重叠,以使组合光栅的净透射单独地跳跃到比单一的热或电-光调谐所达到的波长范围宽得多的波长范围。在图20的实例中,峰值间隔差为10%,如果第一光栅的频率增加频率间隔626的10%,下一个更高的频率峰值将重叠,造成有效频移比调谐量大十倍。Broad spectrum tunable devices can be realized in a split grating structure comprising two multi-peak structures, as shown in Figs. 21 and 22 . Figure 20 illustrates the basic principles of these devices and plots the multi-peak comb transmission (or reflection) distributions 620 and 622 as a function of the optical frequency of the two gratings. The first grating distribution 620 has transmission peaks separated by a first period 626, while the second grating distribution 622 has peaks separated by a second period 624, which differs slightly from the first period. The main idea of the device is to make the device operate only at frequencies determined from the superposition of the peaks of the two curves (frequency ν1). Tuning is achieved by comb teeth that tune the transmission peaks of the grating relative to each other. The different transmission peaks in the two combs will overlap each other at different ranges of relative frequency shift, so that the net transmission of the combined grating jumps individually to a much wider wavelength range than can be achieved by a single thermal or electro-optical tuning. wavelength range. In the example of FIG. 20, the peak spacing difference is 10%, if the frequency of the first grating increases by 10% of the frequency spacing 626, the next higher frequency peaks will overlap, resulting in an effective frequency shift that is ten times larger than the tuning amount.
在图21中示出该装置的引导波实施例,其中两个光栅650和652设置在单个波导642上。输出光束644部分地反射到光束643和透射为光束645。第一电极666和第二电极668设置在第一光栅650周围,以使连接到电极的第一电压源662触发该光栅。第三电极664与第二电极一道设置在第二光栅652周围。由连接到第二和第三电极的第二电压源660控制第二光栅。在该优选实施例中,每个光栅是如图20所述的多峰值结构,并且该装置形成一个跳频调谐反射器。根据图20的曲线,光栅构成为宽带反射器,主要反射除透射较高的等间隔频率梳齿外的所有入射辐射频率。因此,级联光栅将反射图20所示频率范围中的所有频率,在ν1两透射峰值重叠处除外。如果排列两个光栅的反射,以便在反射光束643中增加相位,透射光谱将基本等于两个透射曲线620和622的乘积。当对光栅之一的中心频率调谐时,在ν1的单个透射峰值将跳跃到下一个相邻峰值,然后再下一个,以此类推。这种结构对作为例如波分复用(WDM)通信系统中的电调谐接收机特别有用。可将该接收机做成只检测特定频带的输出光,而对其它频率的光不敏感。A guided wave embodiment of the device is shown in FIG. 21 , where two
如上所见,假设有75%负载循环的畴反相光栅中的电场为10V/μm,光栅结构可偏移约0.5nm。如果单个频率峰值628的宽度窄于频率间隔的1/100,该连续调谐范围可用于在跨越或许100个频带的结构640中产生50nm范围的不连续调谐。As seen above, assuming an electric field of 10 V/μm in a domain inversion grating with a 75% duty cycle, the grating structure can be shifted by about 0.5 nm. If the width of a single frequency peak 628 is narrower than 1/100 of the frequency interval, this continuous tuning range can be used to produce discrete tuning in the 50 nm range in a
应指出,如果已知输入光的频率例如仅处在图20中曲线620的透射频带内,则仅能用具有曲线622的透射频谱的单光栅结构主要使用Moire效应实现该装置。通过调谐频谱622的中心频率,可选择任何一种所需频带而将其余的反射。图7的T型结构在这种情况下有其特定的意义:由光栅结构100(构成用于如此所述的调谐)将包含多频率分量的输入光束112分成可被检测或用其它方法处理的单透射光束116,和包含所有其它频率分量的反射光束114。光束114中包含的功率不损失,但可路由选择到例如一通信网络中的其它节点。It should be noted that the device can only be realized with a single grating structure having a transmission spectrum of curve 622, mainly using the Moire effect, if it is known that the frequency of the input light is, for example, only in the transmission band of curve 620 in Fig. 20 . By tuning the center frequency of spectrum 622, any one of the desired frequency bands can be selected while the rest are reflected. The T-shaped structure of FIG. 7 has its specific significance in this context: the input beam 112 containing multiple frequency components is divided by the grating structure 100 (configured for tuning as described) into components that can be detected or otherwise processed. A single transmitted beam 116, and a reflected beam 114 containing all other frequency components. The power contained in the light beam 114 is not lost, but can be routed, for example, to other nodes in a communication network.
其它变化可形成该基本结构,其中,例如图20的频谱是单独光栅的反射曲线而不是透射曲线。这种情况下,当反射极化的频率相互对准时,该结构根据反射波的相对相位借助反射性作为一标准器。否则,复合结构的净反射主要是两个单独结构的反射曲线的总和。Other variations can form this basic structure, where, for example, the spectrum of FIG. 20 is the reflection curve of a grating alone rather than the transmission curve. In this case, when the frequencies of the reflected polarizations are aligned with each other, the structure acts as an etalon by reflectivity according to the relative phase of the reflected waves. Otherwise, the net reflection of the composite structure is primarily the sum of the reflection curves of the two individual structures.
通过调节两个光栅之间的光径长度653来优化两个反射的相对相位可能是很重要的。可在两个光栅入口654和655之间使用一电-光结构(如图22中实例所示)控制相对相位,以调节光径长度653。对于铌酸锂晶体和1.5μm的输入波长,光栅之间的触发距离至少需要250μm,以调节高达±π的两光束之间的相对相位,(使用被施加10V/μm电场的z轴)。如果该光栅不是设计用于调谐(构成其平均折射率与所施加的电压无关),经在其电极施加的电场任意控制光栅之一的强度(而不是其频率)。如果两个光栅一起调谐,会造成窄范围连续调谐。作为电子激励的另一种方式或补充,两个反射的相位和光栅的峰值波长都可以通过芯片的热或机械控制一起改变。It may be important to optimize the relative phase of the two reflections by adjusting the
图22示意地示出由移相器部分635隔开并形成具有特性自由光谱范围(FSR)的集成标准器640的两个光栅反射器633和634。(结构630与图21中的结构基本相同,但增加了移相器部分,由能激励横向于波导636的电-光材料区的电极组成)。为简化起见,我们考虑均匀单周期光栅的情况,但个别光栅通常为更复杂的结构。该光栅可被固定或由电子激励。通过调节施加到移相器部分635的电压可使偏离两个光栅的反射在参考频率增加光束的相位。如果由多个FSR分开两个光栅的频率,在第二频率的光束也将增加相位。由于FSR与两个光栅之间的光径长度成反比,光径长度的选择确定了标准器反射峰值结构的密度。例如,在铌酸锂中由220μm隔开的两个短的高反射光栅可具有由多个1nm隔开的光栅反射峰值。图20描述的多峰值结构620或622的每一个可实施作为集成标准器。Figure 22 schematically shows two
图23示出双光栅Y型接头实施例,其中两个光栅690和692跨越两个分开的波导682和684延伸。Y型接头通常具有可处在一个平面或一个空间中的一个输入和多个输出波导。两个波导通过Y型接头688连接到第一波导686。在第二波导682和第三波导684之间分开光输入光束691中的功率,以使近50%的输入光束691入射到每个光栅。两个光栅可具有简单的反射结构,或可具有一系列高反射峰值。光栅可以是永久的,或也可以是电子调节的,这种情况下设置电极694和696激励光栅。然后,跨越晶片(或另一方式是在与波导相同的平面上,类似图21邻接其它电极)设置共用电极698。FIG. 23 shows a dual grating Y-junction embodiment in which two gratings 690 and 692 extend across two separate waveguides 682 and 684 . A Y-junction typically has one input and multiple output waveguides that may be in one plane or one space. The two waveguides are connected to the first waveguide 686 by a Y-junction 688 . The power in the optical input beam 691 is split between the second waveguide 682 and the third waveguide 684 such that approximately 50% of the input beam 691 is incident on each grating. Both gratings can have a simple reflective structure, or can have a series of highly reflective peaks. The grating may be permanent, or may also be electronically adjustable, in which case electrodes 694 and 696 are provided to actuate the grating. A common electrode 698 is then placed across the wafer (or alternatively on the same plane as the waveguides, similar to FIG. 21 adjacent to other electrodes).
波导两个分支的相对光径长度可由配置在电-光作用区上方的电极689调节。通过调节相位调节电极689上的电压,可调节两反向传播反射光束在其在Y型接头相遇时具有相同相位。反射波型根据两个波的相对相位叠加并形成在中心具有相位不连续的波前分布。随着组合波的传播,相移强烈影响引导区中光波型的空间集中。如果其具有相同相位,其分布则形成有效地耦连到输入波导最低阶波型的对称波型,以形成向后反射输出光束693。在Y型接头加入异相的两个反射光束将有很低耦连到波导686的任何对称波型(例如最低阶波型)。如果波导686是单个波型,该反射能量将从波导排除。因此,通过用电极689调节Y型臂之一的光径长度,可迅速将反射从几乎100%调节到几乎接近零的值。此外,如果在此处所述可调谐结构之一中将光栅实施成电子调谐反射器,调制反射特性可移到不同频谱区中。The relative optical path lengths of the two branches of the waveguide can be adjusted by electrodes 689 disposed above the electro-optic active region. By adjusting the voltage on the phase adjustment electrode 689, the two counterpropagating reflected beams can be adjusted to have the same phase when they meet at the Y-junction. The reflected modes superimpose according to the relative phases of the two waves and form a wavefront profile with a phase discontinuity in the center. As the combined wave propagates, the phase shift strongly affects the spatial concentration of the light modes in the guided region. If they have the same phase, their distribution forms a symmetric mode that effectively couples to the lowest order mode of the input waveguide to form the back-reflected output beam 693 . Adding the two reflected beams out of phase at the Y-junction will have very little coupling into the waveguide 686 of any symmetric modes (eg, the lowest order modes). If the waveguide 686 is a single mode, this reflected energy will be rejected from the waveguide. Thus, by adjusting the optical path length of one of the Y-arms with electrode 689, the reflection can be quickly adjusted from almost 100% to a value almost near zero. Furthermore, if the grating is implemented as an electronically tuned reflector in one of the tunable structures described here, the modulated reflection characteristics can be shifted into different spectral regions.
参考图24,示出使用极化光栅722的可切换波导波型转换器720。波导730优选同时支持输入波型和输出波型,其可为两个横向波型或两个极化波型(例如TE和TM)。在波导中的两种波型通常具有由波型的有效折射率确定的不同传播常数。光栅722由通过连线746耦连到电势源744的电极740和742电激励。选择光栅周期Λ(724),以使两波导中的传播常数差的大小等于光栅常数2πn/Λ。当光栅导通时,光栅补偿两波导传播常数之差,以使两波型之间的耦连相位匹配。应设定光栅强度和器件在光栅中的交互作用长度,以使功率流从输入波型到输出波型优选。从一种波型向另一种波型的功率转换之净速率由电-光系数(铌酸锂中为γ51)强度和电场强度确定。Referring to Figure 24, a switchable
对于两种横向波型,其耦连取决于有光栅结构的情况下两种波型的空间叠加和光栅强度。两种波型可通过对称而正交,以致即使波型相位匹配,在对称结构中没有转换。这种情况下,相位匹配结构本身可制成不对称以消除该问题。在图24的优选实施例中,可通过激励极化结构的电场引入不对称。电场的垂直分量在两电极740和742中间反转符号。优选将电极设置在波导中央,以使不同对称的横向波型之间的波型转换优选。当耦连相同对称的横向波型时,其反转为真:现在应将相位匹配结构制成对称以使转换优选。也可使用几种不同方法。一种三电极结构具有一对称的电场垂直分量和一不对称水平分量。可结合水平耦连的电-光系数之一使用该水平电场以耦连不同的对称波型。或者,极化结构可具有基本平分波导的反相平面,这种情况下可用电场的对称分量耦连不同对称的波型(在三电极情况下为垂直电场,两电极情况下为水平电场)。For two transverse modes, the coupling depends on the spatial superposition of the two modes and the grating strength in the presence of a grating structure. The two modes can be made orthogonal through symmetry, so that even though the modes are phase matched, there is no conversion in a symmetrical structure. In this case, the phase matching structure itself can be made asymmetric to eliminate this problem. In the preferred embodiment of Figure 24, the asymmetry can be introduced by an electric field that excites the polarized structure. The vertical component of the electric field reverses sign between the two
由于两种波型的传播常数强烈依赖于波长,其交互作用的差拍长度也依赖于波长。因此,对于两种波型间耦连区的给定长度而言,耦连到第二波型的功率对频率敏感。该耦连具有与之相关的频带宽度。对于给定的光栅强度,一部分带内输入光束耦连到作为耦连的输出光束离开的输出波型,而输入光束的其余部分作为透射输出光束离开第一波导。Since the propagation constants of the two modes are strongly wavelength-dependent, the beat length of their interaction is also wavelength-dependent. Thus, for a given length of the coupling region between the two modes, the power coupled to the second mode is frequency sensitive. This coupling has a frequency bandwidth associated with it. For a given grating strength, a portion of the in-band input beam is coupled to an output mode that exits as a coupled output beam, while the remainder of the input beam exits the first waveguide as a transmitted output beam.
图24所示结构也可用于耦连在TE和TM极化波型之间。例如电-光系数γ51能使铌酸锂晶体中的两个正交极化之间耦连。如前所述,选择光栅周期以使光栅常数等于两波型间传播传输之差。选择交互作用长度以使功率传送优选。The structure shown in Figure 24 can also be used to couple between TE and TM polarization modes. For example, the electro-optical coefficient γ 51 enables coupling between two orthogonal polarizations in lithium niobate crystals. As before, the grating period is chosen such that the grating constant is equal to the difference in propagation transmission between the two modes. The interaction length is chosen to optimize power transfer.
一种诸如支持TE和TM波型的向内扩散钛波导之类的波导被用于两极化可进入或离开转换器的应用中。一种诸如仅支持一种极化(z切割铌酸锂基片中的TM或x切割或y切割中的TE)的质子交换波导之类的波导可用于仅要求单极化的应用中。这种单极化波导可作为用于其它极化的非常有效的滤波器。因衍射造成错误极化分量从波导迅速消散,仅将引导极化留在波导中。例如,质子交换波导731按需要可起到仅引导输入极化或输出极化的作用。如果光栅耦连强并且正确选择交互作用长度和电场,该装置可用作具有优异透射和吸光特性的光调制器。用质子交换波导构成的调制器基本上可透射所有被正确极化的输入光,并产生耦连到垂直极化波型的非常低的透射光。另一种方式,输入波导可以是向内扩散的钛以在输入处接受任一极化。形成两光束的波导的折射率分布优选相似,以使TE和TM波型的分布重叠好,并使耦连效率最大。A waveguide such as an indiffused titanium waveguide supporting both TE and TM modes is used in applications where polarization can enter or exit the transducer. A waveguide such as a proton exchange waveguide that supports only one polarization (TM in z-cut lithium niobate substrate or TE in x-cut or y-cut) can be used in applications requiring only a single polarization. This single polarization waveguide can act as a very effective filter for other polarizations. The wrong polarization component dissipates rapidly from the waveguide due to diffraction, leaving only the guided polarization in the waveguide. For example, the
为触发γ51系数,沿晶体Y或X轴施加电场。达到适当电场方向的电极构造取决于晶体切割。对于具有沿x轴定向的波导的z切割晶体,第一和第二电极可设置在波导的任一侧。另一方面,对于具有沿x轴定向的波导的y切割晶体,第一电极可直接设置在波导上方,而第二电极可设置在波导的任一侧,平行于第一电极。To trigger the γ 51 coefficient, an electric field is applied along the crystal Y or X axis. Electrode configuration to achieve proper electric field orientation depends on crystal cut. For a z-cut crystal with a waveguide oriented along the x-axis, the first and second electrodes can be placed on either side of the waveguide. On the other hand, for a y-cut crystal with a waveguide oriented along the x-axis, the first electrode can be placed directly above the waveguide, while the second electrode can be placed on either side of the waveguide, parallel to the first electrode.
由于光栅722中的极化畴可通过整体基片(例如0.5mm或更厚)延伸,图24的结构也可用于可控制的整体极化转换器。这种情况下,不需要波导730,并且电极最适宜构成在极化材料整体薄板的任一侧上。Since the polarization domains in the grating 722 can extend through a solid substrate (eg 0.5mm or thicker), the structure of Figure 24 can also be used for a controllable bulk polarization converter. In this case, the
参考图25,示出包括Y型功率分离器702和横向波型转换器704的切换光束导向器700。波型转换器以与上面相关的图24描述的横向波型转换器类似方式工作。光栅结构706相位匹配从入射到波导708最低阶(对称)波型到波导的下一个更高阶(不对称)波型的能量转换。选择波导和光栅结构重叠的交互作用区的长度和强度,以便将近似一半输入单对称波型功率转换成较高阶不对称波型。此外,选择光栅波型转换器部分704和Y型分相器702之间的光径长度,以便两波型的相位在Y型分支712之一建设性地增加而在另一分支713破坏性地增加。其结果是功率主要被路由选择到有相长干涉的波导712,只有很少功率漏入另一个分支713。这种情况下,波导713中的反向传播功率基本被排除在耦连到波型耦连器704之后的波导708中的反向传播波型之外。该装置在正向形成一个有效的功率路由选择器而在反向形成隔离结构。Referring to FIG. 25 , a switched beam director 700 comprising a Y-shaped power splitter 702 and a transverse mode converter 704 is shown. The wave mode converter works in a similar manner to the transverse mode converter described above in relation to FIG. 24 . The grating structure 706 phase matches the energy conversion from the lowest order (symmetric) mode incident on the waveguide 708 to the next higher order (asymmetric) mode of the waveguide. The length and strength of the interaction region where the waveguide and grating structures overlap are chosen so as to convert approximately half the input power of a single symmetric mode into a higher order asymmetric mode. In addition, the optical path length between the grating mode converter section 704 and the Y-type phase splitter 702 is selected so that the phase of the two modes increases constructively in one of the Y-type branches 712 and destructively in the other branch 713. Increase. The result is that power is primarily routed to the constructively interfering waveguide 712 with very little power leaking into the other branch 713 . In this case, the counterpropagating power in waveguide 713 is substantially excluded from the counterpropagating mode in waveguide 708 after coupling to mode coupler 704 . The device forms an effective power router in the forward direction and an isolation structure in the reverse direction.
通过调节光栅波型转换器部分704和Y型分相器702之间的光径长度,可将输出功率从波导712切换到波导713。这是通过调节最低阶波型和较高阶波型的相对光径长度以使两波型相互相对滑移π相位,于是在波导713中产生相长干涉和在波导712中产生破坏性干涉进行的。通过用电压源714激励电极对711和709,经基片703中的电-光效应改变电极711下的折射率在光径长度调节部分705中实现相对光径长度调节,基片703优选是铌酸锂(但可以是对诸如锂钽酸盐、KTP、GaAs、InP、AgGaS2、结晶石英等之类波具有透明性的任何电-光材料)。与激励电压一起选择波导708在电极711下的传播距离,以便将两波型的相对相位至少改变所需之量。By adjusting the optical path length between the grating mode converter section 704 and the Y-type phase splitter 702, the output power can be switched from the waveguide 712 to the waveguide 713. This is done by adjusting the relative optical path lengths of the lowest and higher order modes so that the two modes are phase shifted by π relative to each other, thereby producing constructive interference in waveguide 713 and destructive interference in waveguide 712. By exciting the electrode pair 711 and 709 with a voltage source 714, the refractive index under the electrode 711 is changed through the electro-optic effect in the substrate 703 to achieve relative optical path length adjustment in the optical path length adjustment part 705. The substrate 703 is preferably niobium Lithium Oxide (but can be any electro-optic material that is transparent to waves such as Lithium Tantalate, KTP, GaAs, InP, AgGaS2 , crystalline quartz, etc.). The propagation distance of waveguide 708 under electrode 711 is selected, along with the excitation voltage, so as to change the relative phase of the two modes by at least a desired amount.
光栅706可以是用本领域已知的任何一种技术制造的永久光栅。然而,为使本器件的功能优选,希望在对称和不对称波型中的功率几乎完全相等。在现有制造技术中很难实现足够的控制以达到该目的,因此需要在光栅强度中做一些调整。使用至少一些由电极709和710激励的极化光栅部分可实现该调节性,电极709和710由电源715驱动,并且其本身可被用来完成所要求的波型转换,或调节组合极化永久光栅的强度。Grating 706 may be a permanent grating fabricated by any technique known in the art. However, for optimal functioning of the device, it is desirable that the power in the symmetric and asymmetric modes be nearly exactly equal. It is difficult to achieve sufficient control to achieve this in existing manufacturing techniques, so some adjustments in the grating intensity are required. This adjustability can be achieved using at least some portions of the polarization grating excited by electrodes 709 and 710, which are driven by a power source 715 and which can themselves be used to perform the desired mode conversion, or to adjust the combined polarization permanent The strength of the raster.
输入波导708优选实施为一个包括一个(优选是绝热)锥度701的单波型波导,以允许在横向波型耦连器704和Y型分相器702之间引导两波型。波导712和713优选都是单波型。在该器件中也可使用其它波型,只要其对称相反,对于互连目的,最需要的是在输入和输出引线用最低阶波型工作。中间激励波型不太重要,并且例如可以是一较高的不对称波型。The input waveguide 708 is preferably implemented as a single mode waveguide including a (preferably adiabatic) taper 701 to allow two modes to be guided between the transverse wave mode coupler 704 and the Y-type phase splitter 702 . Both waveguides 712 and 713 are preferably of the single mode type. Other modes can also be used in this device as long as their symmetry is reversed. For interconnection purposes it is most desirable to work with the lowest order modes at the input and output leads. The intermediate excitation mode is of less importance and could be, for example, a higher asymmetric mode.
图26示出一平行波导可切换谐振器750,其中输入波导752沿交互作用区753耦连到平行波导754。光栅反射器755和756以在波导中传播向后反射光的方式跨越波导754配置。该对隔开的反射器和波导754形成耦连到输入波导752的集成标准器。选择耦连区753的长度和耦连区中平行波导的间隔,以便将所需的输入光束757的一小部分T耦连到波导754中。耦连到标准器结构754、755和756的光在反射器755和756之间谐振,并耦连出到两主要输出通道:在波导752中的正向传播波759和反向传播波758。在标准器中循环的同一小部分T功率耦连到两个输出通道758和759的每一个。FIG. 26 shows a parallel
就任何标准器而言,集成标准器有一个频率接受结构,该结构带有视谐振器损耗而定的宽度,在频率控制内包括多个峰值,并且间隔等于自由频谱范围。如果输入光束757的光频率与这些谐振频率之一匹配,在标准器中循环的功率将增进到由Pcir=PincT/(T+Γ/2)2确定的值Pcirc,其中Pinc是波导752中的入射功率,Γ是标准器损耗,不包括耦连到波导752中的正向传播波759和反向传播波758的输出,并假设弱耦连和低损耗。来自标准器在波导752中以反向传播的输出耦连波形成反射波758。光束758中的反射功率在谐振峰值上等于Pref=Pinc/(1+Γ/2T)2。当T》Γ/2时,所有入射功率基本被反射。来自标准器在波导752中以正向传播的输出耦连波与输入波757的未耦连部分异相(在空腔谐振上),并且两光束破坏性地干涉,产生低幅度输出光束759。由于两光束幅度不等,输出光束759中的残余功率Ptrans=Pinc/(1+2T/Γ)2不等于零,但可很接近零。如果使耦连Γ与标准器损耗相比非常大,该装置的透射被大大地抑制(如T=10Γ则为26dB)。该结构则在由FSR隔开的频率梳齿处作为非常低损耗的反射器。As with any etalon, an integrated etalon has a frequency-receiving structure with a width dependent on resonator losses, including multiple peaks within frequency control, and spaced equal to the free spectral range. If the optical frequency of the
该器件可通过改变两反射器755和756之间的光径长度来切换。设置电极761和762以穿过波导754在反射镜755和756之间产生电场。用电源763激励电极,通过电-光效应改变电极761下的基片的有效折射率,从而改变反射镜间的光程长度并使集成标准器的谐振移位。如果谐振移位大于谐振宽度或入射光束的频带宽度之一,由于标准器中的循环功率被抑制到约PincT/4,反射将下降到零,透射将基本上升到100%。The device is switchable by changing the optical path length between the two
如前面的附图和说明所示,光栅755和756可以是永久光栅,或它们可以是由电极激励的极化光栅。如果光栅756是极化光栅,可通过切断光栅切换该装置。随着光栅756切断,即不反射,入射波757的损耗等于耦连常数T,但现在消除了梳齿结构而仅由电极761进行频移。两操作波型间切换函数之差可以较明显,例如是宽带输入信号,在此必须切断反射而不是仅改变其频率。对于单频率输入光束,可通过用电极761改变光程长度或通过切断反射镜756破坏谐振器的Q均匀地切换反射。然而,如果维持反射镜756的反射性和用电极761仅移位标准器的频谱,宽带输入波的其它频率分量将被反射,这可能是某些应用中极不希望的。As shown in the previous figures and description,
如果T和Γ较小,在标准器中建立的功率Pcirc可能相当大,并可用于例如诸如二次谐波产生的应用中。在该应用中,铌酸锂基片的一部分中的准相位匹配(QPM)定期极化结构在反射镜756和交互作用区753之间,或可能在交互作用区本身中被引入。然后对标准器的谐振频率之一调谐以便与QPM倍频器的相位匹配频率一致。由于建立因数Pcirc/Pinc的平方,所产生的功率建立增强了器件的频率转换效率。如果FSR足够大以致其它谐振波型不被同时注入锁定,在该频率出现的高反射也可用于将泵激光注入锁定在所要求的频率。上面参考图21和22描述的线性集成标准器的几何结构也可用来完成同样目的。If T and Γ are small, the power P circ built up in the etalon can be quite large and can be used, for example, in applications such as second harmonic generation. In this application, a quasi-phase-matched (QPM) periodic poling structure in a portion of the lithium niobate substrate is introduced between the
为使标准器中反射器755和756之间建立的功率优选,必须使谐振器中的损耗最小。图26的耦连不能″阻抗匹配″,与本领域中已知的整体建立空腔的处理类似,调节耦连到谐振器的输入通过对未耦连到空腔内的入射光束部分进行破坏性干涉而抵消。这是标准器透射干涉峰值的条件。如上所述,集成结构中所发生的是透射光束几乎可被抵消,而同时在所耦连的谐振器中建立功率,但出现一强反射波。该反射波可在环形波导结构中消除,如图27和28所说明的。To optimize the power build-up between
如果需要,可使与标准器内的功率循环成正比的输出751通过光栅756,或另一种方式是通过光栅755。The
图27中示出三臂标准器760,该三臂标准器760包括一个输入波导752、一个平行波导耦连区753、一个由三个波导段764、765和766构成的环形谐振器、三个光栅反射器767、768和769。电极761和762之间形成的光程长度调节部分是任选的。设置光栅反射器767以使从波导764到来的功率优选地反射到波导765。在单波型系统中,设计光栅(和其电极,如果有的话)的空间结构,以使来自波导764的最低阶波型耦连到波导765的最低阶波型。光栅768和769结构相似,以使功率优选地从波导765到波导766然后再到波导764,用确定的光程长度、FSR、光损系数、和用输入波导752的耦连系数T形成一个Fabry-Perot谐振器。现在,阻抗匹配是可能的,并当耦连系数T等于小于输出耦连损耗的谐振器总行程损耗系数,主要是在耦连区753时实现。如果相位匹配倍频器设置在谐振器中,谐振器中循环的基频光束外的转换功率不算作总行程损耗中的一项损耗。Figure 27 shows a three-arm etalon 760 comprising an
如果入射光束757以等于三臂标准器的谐振之一的频率入射到器件上,功率将跨越平行波导交互作用区耦连到该标准器并建立循环功率Pcirc=PincT/(T+Γ)2。由于该环形结构,功率主要在从波导764到波导765、766,并回到764的一个方向循环。从标准器到波导752仅有一个单耦连波并且其在正向传播。输出耦连波与输入波757的剩余部分进行破坏性干涉,形成弱透射波759。输出光束759中的透射功率Ptrans由Ptrans=Pinc(1-Γ/T)2/(1+Γ/T)2给出,如果Γ=T,其值为零,作为阻抗匹配条件。这种情况下,所有入射功率流入谐振器。阻抗匹配状态中,两光束幅度相等,且透射功率降低到零。除来自波导752不连续处的反射外在光束758中基本没有反射功率,通过良好设计可使波导752中的反射最小。If the
光栅767或任何其它光栅可构成可切换光栅,这种情况下,通过关闭光栅可破坏标准器的质量Q,消除整个梳齿结构,但留下一些因耦连到波导764的功率造成的光损耗。可引导输出光束751透射过光栅768,和/或通过光栅767或769。The grating 767 or any other grating can constitute a switchable grating, in which case the quality Q of the etalon can be destroyed by switching off the grating, eliminating the entire comb structure but leaving some optical loss due to power coupled to the waveguide 764 .
图28示出环形波导标准器770。如前所述,输入波导752在平行交互作用区753耦连到波导772。交互作用区753包括图28中的一个光栅(虽然并不需要),以强调光栅耦连在图26、27和28的标准器几何结构中一种有用的选择。波导772随一弯曲封闭路径(有任何几何形状,包括带交叉的电位多环路)将从区段753出现的一部分功率反馈到交互作用区753。如前所述,提供电极761和773以允许调节光程长度并因此而调节FSR,虽然这种情况下它们设置在基片的相同面上。提供平直区771,可根据标准器结构的应用在其中可制备某些重用功能元件。如果标准器装置770用于倍频,有助于将倍频结构插入平直区,例如环的771部分,但必须做出将频率转换光耦连出环形波导的规定。FIG. 28 shows a
器件770在其它方面的功能与器件760的类似。而装置760可在基片上占据较小表面区,器件770在标准器中的损耗较低,如果直径为1cm或更大则更是如此。
器件760和770可起建立倍频空腔的作用,在空腔中到光源的反馈最小。它们也可在没有向后反射情况下切换给定频率的透射,以在包括光通信的应用中使用。
在WDM通信中,一条光纤上可承载由其光波长分隔的许多通信信道。为检测信道,在所需波长区中的光必须首先与路由选择到其它目的地的剩余信道分开。该分隔功能由信道下线滤波器(channel droppingfilter)执行。信道下线滤波器是波分复用(WDM)环境中使用的通信装置。需要通过在不同波长上承载信道多路复用跨越单个传输光纤的信道。该系统中的一个重用元件是允许为路由选择或检测目的而抽取单个信道的信道下线滤波器。理想光纤通过良好的消光比基本上抽取信道中所有的光以便在后面的网络中可使用相同波长而没有串话。由于可将多个信道下线滤波器安装在任何给定的线路上,带外分量的介入损耗必须很低。它优选是可切换的,以使信道可在目的地下线,并在该通信结束后,该信道可继续通过该位置到另一种目的地。与信道下线滤波器对应的是信道上线滤波器,向光纤加入信道而不明显影响其它信道中的功率传播。透射和反射滤波器在[HL91,KHO87]中已详细分析。上面的多种结构可用于信道下线滤波器,包括参考图7、10、26、27和28描述的装置。In WDM communications, a single fiber can carry many communication channels separated by its optical wavelengths. In order to detect channels, the light in the desired wavelength region must first be separated from the remaining channels routed to other destinations. This separation function is performed by a channel dropping filter. Channel drop filters are communication devices used in wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) environments. There is a need to multiplex channels across a single transmission fiber by carrying the channels on different wavelengths. A reused element in this system is a channel drop filter that allows individual channels to be decimated for routing or detection purposes. An ideal fiber draws essentially all the light in the channel with a good extinction ratio so that the same wavelength can be used in the subsequent network without crosstalk. Since multiple channel drop filters can be installed on any given line, the insertion loss of out-of-band components must be low. It is preferably switchable so that the channel can go offline at the destination, and after the communication is over, the channel can continue through the location to another destination. Corresponding to the channel down-line filter is the channel up-line filter, which adds channels to the optical fiber without significantly affecting the power propagation in other channels. Transmission and reflection filters have been analyzed in detail in [HL91, KHO87]. Various configurations above can be used for channel drop filters, including the arrangements described with reference to FIGS. 7, 10, 26, 27 and 28.
图7的T型光栅耦连波导是对带外分量具有低损耗的信道下线滤波器。与现有技术的光栅相比,由于针对带内分量达到99.9%的外耦连需要很长的光栅,该结构对串话有困难。由于使用带有跨越波导整个延伸的尖锐界面的较高阶光栅的能力使得本发明的周期极化光栅的耦连强度比现有技术明显提高。而现有技术受使用浅波导使浅光栅和波导之间的重叠优选的限制,由于我们的光栅结构跨越波导深度整个延伸,能使用深度与宽度基本相等的较低损耗的波导结构。该结构也可用作信道上线滤波器。The T-type grating-coupled waveguide in Fig. 7 is a channel down-line filter with low loss for out-of-band components. Compared to prior art gratings, this structure has difficulties with crosstalk due to the very long grating required to achieve 99.9% outcoupling for in-band components. The coupling strength of the periodically polarized gratings of the present invention is significantly improved over the prior art due to the ability to use higher order gratings with sharp interfaces spanning the entire extent of the waveguide. While the prior art is limited by the use of shallow waveguides to optimize the overlap between shallow gratings and waveguides, since our grating structures extend across the entire depth of the waveguide, lower loss waveguide structures with substantially equal depth and width can be used. This structure can also be used as an inline filter on the channel.
如果按Haus等人在J.光波技术1992年第十期第57-62页″窄带光信道下线滤波器″一文所述构造光栅,图10的装置也是一个信道下线滤波器。这种情况下我们的贡献仅在于极化光栅耦连技术,能使波导之间在短距离内强烈耦连,从而减少制造高效率的更高级光栅的困难。The device in Figure 10 is also a channel drop filter if the grating is constructed as described by Haus et al. Our contribution in this case lies solely in the polarization grating coupling technique, which enables strong coupling between waveguides over short distances, thereby reducing the difficulty of fabricating higher-order gratings with high efficiency.
通过将标准器的谐振调谐到从输入波导752抽取的信道频率,装置750、760和770可用作信道下线滤波器。如果集成标准器接近阻抗匹配,谐振频率处的所有功率基本上传送到标准器。在图27和28的环形几何结构中,可将波导752中的透射和反射功率减小到任何所要求程度,使串话最少。与所要求信道对应的光被完全从输入波导抽出(下线),即不留反射也不留透射。在图26的线性几何结构中,一些光损失到反射中,不明显降低检测效率,但可能会在通信网络引起串话问题。通过将检测器放置在标准器的波导部分上并与波导中的光耦连可检测光中携带的信号。或者,检测器可耦连到例如图26中的输出波导754、图27中的764、765、或766、和图28中的794之一。在装置760的情况下,通过调节谐振器光栅反射器767、768、或769之一的反射使一小部分循环功率外耦连到如用于输出光束751的所示波导的连续部分来完成外耦连。那些连续波导部分也可连接到其它装置的端口,可以是分立器件或集成在同一基片上。在装置770的情况下,平行波导输出耦连器(有或无光栅)可设置在环形的平直区771。虽然仅有一小部分循环功率可外耦连到这些端口,由于标准器中产生的建立造成总外耦连功率可非常接近进入波导752的信道功率的100%。用相邻波导794表示输出耦连,产生输出光束751。By tuning the resonance of the etalon to the channel frequency extracted from the
环形几何结构在消光比(光分隔效率高时消光比高)和低串话方面具有优势,这是由于可对它们进行调节以使几乎全部功率传送进入到标准器。所有标准器器件可设计成对带外光束具有很低的介入损耗。图26-28的所有装置可通过相移电极761和762(和图28中的763)切换。Ring geometries have advantages in terms of extinction ratio (high extinction ratio for high optical separation efficiency) and low crosstalk, since they can be tuned so that nearly all power is delivered into the etalon. All etalon devices can be designed with very low insertion loss for out-of-band beams. All devices of Figures 26-28 are switchable by
如前所述,可用电极761调节光程长度以移位集成标准器谐振频率。可以该方式直接选择所需通道。或者,用上面参考图20、21、和22描述的方法通过该技术可选择多个通道;如果选择标准器的FSR与通道间隔略有不同,可用Moire效应选择带有最小连续调谐的宽间隔通道。(较好的选择是使FSR等于通道间隔加上几倍通道带宽与标准器谐振带宽缠绕时获得的频带宽度)。As previously described, the optical path length can be adjusted with
随着结构750、760、和770的变化,可按上面参考图10描述的光栅辅助式耦连器实施耦连区753。这样有其优点,在极化光栅实施中,可调节耦连系数T。特别是对环形谐振器设计760和770,可调节耦连有助于实现阻抗匹配。随着进一步变化,可在基片的同一面上设置电极,如上所述,以获得较低电压激励。As a variation on
例如,如果加到输出光束759的信号被引入波导766上,或如果其经波导794耦连到平直区771,图27和28的结构也可用作有效信道上线滤波器。这些输入交互作用优选阻抗匹配。For example, if the signal applied to
参考图29A,示出使用极化段806的波导调制器/衰减器800。极化段806的功能是(可切换地)收集从输入波导段802发出的光,并在输出波导段804接通时将其发射到输出波导段804。在该器件中,输入光束820耦连到输入波导802。极化段806位于输入波导段和输出波导段804之间。输入和输出波导段优选是可通过包括向内扩散和离子交换的任何标准技术制造的永久波导。段806优选是一均匀极化基片内的反向极化区,以使其折射率基本没有区别并且当电场切断时没有波导效应。段806是如图29A中所示波导段。(可交替地用几种不同的几何方式构成,例如,一个凸透镜结构、一个凹透镜结构、或在许多这类元件之间传递光的复合结构:见图9)。通过经段806施加电场使其接通。电场改变极化段和周围区的折射率。由于被段806按照基片材料各不相同地极化(优选是反向极化),通过施加正确的电场极性,可使该段的折射率相对于周围材料增加,形成波导。可增加波导边界内侧的折射率,或可降低边界外侧的折射率。当该极化段导通时,形成一连接输入和输出段的连续波导。这是通过将波导连接在一起、在同一轴上对齐、并调节极化段的宽度以使其横向波型分布优选地匹配输入和输出波导802和804的波型分布实现的。Referring to FIG. 29A, a waveguide modulator/attenuator 800 using a polarizing section 806 is shown. The function of the polarizing section 806 is to (switchably) collect light emitted from the
随着极化段切断,输入光束不限制在极化区中,以使光束到达输出波导段前通过衍射充分扩张。如果输入和输出波导段的间隔比非引导光束的瑞利(Rayleigh)范围大得多,以致光束扩展到比输出波导大得多的尺寸,仅有一小部分输入光束将耦连到输出波导段以形成输出光束822。通过相对于瑞利范围调节段806的长度,可将切断状态下的功率透射量减小到所要求的程度。With the polarization section switched off, the input beam is not confined in the polarization region, allowing the beam to expand sufficiently by diffraction before reaching the output waveguide section. If the separation between the input and output waveguide sections is much larger than the Rayleigh range of the unguided beam, so that the beam expands to a size much larger than the output waveguide, only a small fraction of the input beam will couple to the output waveguide section to An
相对输入和输出波导端部的位置调节极化段806端部位置以使不连续性引起的损耗最小。由于永久波导有一扩散边界,极化波导有一不连续边界,和切换段中的折射率改变加到预先存在的折射率,需要在波导802和804的石版印刷所定边界和极化段806端部之间留有相当于一半扩散长度的小间隙。为进一步减少波导802和806间结合部的反射和损耗,通过使激励电极810略短于段806或通过使电极宽度靠近其端部呈锥状也有助于使段806中的折射率变化的开始呈锥状,在两种情况下,通过边缘效应利用电场的降低。The position of the ends of the polarizing section 806 is adjusted relative to the position of the ends of the input and output waveguides to minimize loss due to the discontinuity. Since the permanent waveguide has a diffuse boundary, the polarized waveguide has a discontinuous boundary, and the refractive index change in the switching section adds to the pre-existing refractive index, there is a need for A small gap equal to half the diffusion length is left in between. To further reduce reflections and losses at the junction between
该结构的一个显著方面是在导通和切断两种状态下可使反射功率最小。随着切断,反射由波导802端部803的残余反射支配。通过沿波导长度使折射率差逐渐降低可使该反射最小。由″切断″透射的平方抑制来自波导804端部805的反射。在″导通″状态下,还是通过沿传播方向逐渐减小结构806的折射率差,形成平滑边界而不是锐变界面可使该反射最小。A notable aspect of this structure is that it minimizes reflected power in both the on and off states. With the cut off, the reflection is dominated by the residual reflection at the
当极化区由于边界内的折射率增加而被激励时,被激励的极化区的边界侧向地限定光束。如果极化区的深度等于波导802和804的深度,极化段边界也在垂直方向限制该光束。然而,很难在z切割铌酸锂晶片中控制极化深度。使一深畴极化最容易,并采用几种不同的量度之一在垂直尺度获得限制。优选方法是排列电极以使电场幅度在垂直尺度下降。这是通过图29A所示的同侧电极构造,而不是设置在基片相对侧的电极实现的。通过使两个电极间的间隙变窄和通过减小整个电极结构的宽度可减小电场的穿透深度。When a polarized region is excited due to a refractive index increase within the boundary, the boundary of the excited polarized region laterally confines the light beam. If the depth of the polarized region is equal to the depth of
此外或作为另一种方式,可在输入和输出波导间的空间内制造一个弱永久波导,其本身不足以传送很多能量,但其与极化段806中产生的折射率升高结合后可优选地将光限制在二维,以便基本上将所有光传送到输出波导804。这是通过例如将段内的永久折射率变化(相对于基片)调节到波导802和804中折射率变化的约0.6倍实现的。如果将段806中的″导通″折射率变化调整到同一值的约0.5倍,组合折射率变化足以达到合理的引导,而永久折射率变化则不够。在″导通″状态下,波型被限定在两横向尺寸中,即使在极化区中产生的切换折射率变化可比所要求的波导尺寸深得多:″导通″波导的有效深度主要由永久折射率变化确定。弱波导可在第二掩模步骤中制造,或可在用一较窄的弱掩模段定义弱波导段的同一步骤中制造。Additionally or alternatively, a weak permanent waveguide can be created in the space between the input and output waveguides, which by itself is insufficient to transfer much energy, but which in combination with the rise in the refractive index produced in the polarizing section 806 may be preferable The light is confined in two dimensions so that substantially all light is transmitted to the
作为一种相对替代,输入和输出波导之间的区可以是一平面波导,这种情况下传播波型可在一维中处在最小衍射。接通一极化区的情况下将增加所需的横向限定,而不管比平面波导有更深的折射率变化。由于两种情况下在二维上的波导限定是由两种独立技术实现的,因此可形成基本上有任何宽高比(波导宽度与深度之比)的可切换波导。用相同技术,优选是退火质子交换处理可制造平面和信道波导。可使用分开质子交换步骤定义平面波导和信道波导。通过退火完成波导制造过程,在此期间折射率变化被向下扩散到所要求的深度,并记录材料的旋光性。两组波导优选退火相同时间长度,虽然在第二质子交换步骤进行前可将一组的部分退火做得更深。As a relative alternative, the region between the input and output waveguides could be a planar waveguide, in which case the propagating mode would be at least diffracted in one dimension. Switching on a polarized region will increase the required lateral confinement despite deeper index changes than planar waveguides. Since the definition of the waveguide in two dimensions in both cases is achieved by two independent techniques, switchable waveguides of essentially any aspect ratio (ratio of waveguide width to depth) can be formed. Planar and channel waveguides can be fabricated using the same technique, preferably an annealing proton exchange process. Planar and channel waveguides can be defined using separate proton exchange steps. The waveguide fabrication process is completed by annealing, during which the refractive index change is diffused down to the desired depth and records the optical activity of the material. Both sets of waveguides are preferably annealed for the same length of time, although a partial anneal of one set can be made deeper before the second proton exchange step is performed.
一种重用替换是使用横向于极化段806的全部、均匀永久波导,并使用电子激励段以切断波导。这种情况下,选择电场极性以抑制极化区中的折射率,极化区的深度可以非常深(实际上,这在波型扩散方面有其优点)。这种切换波导通常为导通(即透射),并需要施加电场将其切断。常闭和常断切换器构造就其在功率故障期间的行为而言有其优点,因此重要的一点是本发明能提供两种模式。为将段806中的波导切断,需要一个与永久波导中感应的折射率变化近似相等并相反的折射率变化。随着电场深度处在″切断″状态的变化效应非常小,这是由于其足以抑制大部分波导以使光强烈地扩散所至。One re-use alternative is to use a full, uniform permanent waveguide transverse to the polarized section 806, and use electronically energized sections to cut the waveguide. In this case, the polarity of the electric field is chosen to suppress the refractive index in the polarized region, which can be very deep (actually, this has its advantages in terms of mode dispersion). Such switched waveguides are usually conducting (ie, transmissive) and require the application of an electric field to switch them off. Normally closed and normally open switch configurations have advantages in terms of their behavior during power failures, so it is important that the present invention can provide both modes. To sever the waveguide in section 806 requires a refractive index change approximately equal and opposite to the induced refractive index change in the permanent waveguide. The effect of the variation with field depth in the "off" state is very small, since it is sufficient to suppress most of the waveguide so that the light diffuses strongly.
不需要平面波导,而通过有限深度极化技术可在两维上实现限定。数种极化技术(例如诸如铌酸锂和钽酸锂中的钛向内扩散以及KTP中的离子交换)产生对有限深度的极化,通过特定深度可能对其优化以形成一极化通道波导。然而,这些技术与极化一道产生折射率变化,根据处理参数略微形成一些永久波导。可根据该折射率变化强度用″常闭″或″常断″构造中任何一种制造极化波导段。Planar waveguides are not required, and confinement can be achieved in two dimensions by finite depth polarization techniques. Several poling techniques (e.g. such as titanium indiffusion in lithium niobate and lithium tantalate and ion exchange in KTP) produce poling to a finite depth through which a particular depth may be optimized to form a poling channel waveguide . However, these techniques, along with polarization, produce a refractive index change that slightly forms some permanent waveguides depending on the processing parameters. Polarized waveguide sections can be fabricated in either "normally closed" or "normally open" configurations depending on the intensity of the refractive index change.
优选通过跨越两个电极施加电压产生电场,两个电极与极化波导段布置在同一晶体面。第一电极810布置在极化区上,而第二电极812设置在第一电极一侧或多侧附近。对于z切割晶体,该构成激励基片的d33电-光系数。电压源816基本是经两条导线814连接到电极,以便为装置提供驱动电压。该装置可用作数字或非线性模拟调制器。全导通电压定义为跨越极化区的损耗最低的电压。断开电压定义为将到输出波导段的耦连降到所需程度的电压。在导通电压和断开电压之间连续变化可将该装置用作模拟调制器或可变衰减器。The electric field is preferably generated by applying a voltage across two electrodes arranged on the same crystal plane as the polarizing waveguide segments. The
在另一种结构中,结构806形成切换弯曲波导,再次与输入波导802和输出波导804对齐。该结构模式被称为″耳语廊″波型,在极个别情况下,曲率较小并且内侧边缘上的波型限定变成与波导内侧波导边缘无关。对于较大的曲率,波型是一种改进的耳语廊波型,由波导内侧边缘提供某些限制。该极化结构在可切换性之外提供了另一优点,即在其外壁上的尖锐折射率极大地改善了在弯曲波导中传播的改进耳语廊波型的限定。这种情况下,输入和输出波导不必同轴或平行,在切断状态下可能增加正向隔离。如果输入和输出波导沿其轴相互成一角度排列,结构806可以是带有单曲率半径或锥状曲率半径的弯曲波导段,当弯曲波导结构806导通时用来在它们之间优选地耦连功率。In another configuration, structure 806 forms a switched curved waveguide, again aligned with
图29B示出另一种结构801,为一切换透镜调制器/衰减器,其中段806的棱形结构被改成透镜型结构,其中局部光程长度与局部(加符号)折射率的乘积随着离波导802和804的轴的横向距离呈平方地减小。设置透镜型结构以便其将从输入波导802端部803发出的光束821会聚或再聚焦到输出波导804的端部805。允许光波衍射离开端部803并通过透镜型结构807。应指出,在该结构中,多个元件可彼此相邻放置,以增加净聚焦效应。增加区807内的折射率以获得聚焦效应。如果周围区以与区807相反方向极化,或如果周围区的电-光系数与区807的电-光系数相反,透镜间的间隔也可作为聚焦区。(透镜807间的区形成的且被激励到较低折射率值的凹透镜作为会聚透镜结构)。电极810设置在结构806上,电极812设置在该结构外侧与电极810相邻,但相隔所要求的间隙。未激励电极时,光束连续发散,并且仅有很少功率再聚焦到波导端部805。当切换器接通时,光束再聚焦,并且一小部分功率连续通过波导804。在导通状态,需要垂直限制以便有效功率的收集,而在切断状态则不需要。例如,可根据需要通过跨越结构图形的整个表面提供均匀平面波导835来提供垂直限制。如果极化深入到基片,也可由透镜型结构806提供垂直限定,作为深度函数的电场降低适合收集能量并将能量再聚焦回到波导端部805。当然,图29B的结构也可在一个或两个波导802和804都不存在的其它情况下使用。Fig. 29B shows another
参考图30,示出使用一极化波导段的极化全内反射(TIR)光能变向器830。该图说明用于高切换反射的极化TIR反射器与用于低介入损耗的极化波导段二者的组合。输入波导832跨越整个器件延伸。极化区836以一角度848跨越波导延伸,形成当极化区被电-光激励时用于在波导传播光束的TIR界面。一部分极化区还形成连接到输出波导段834的极化波导段837。极化波导段和输出波导段以角度848的两倍相对于输入波导布置。电压源846为切换器提供电子激励,并通过两导线844连到切换器。Referring to FIG. 30, a polarized total internal reflection (TIR)
根据附图,由六个垂直面界定极化区836,其中一个面以等于TIR角并小于用于所需电极激励的全内反射的临界角的小角度848横向于波导832。该面是TIR反射界面。该极化区接下来的三个连续垂直面包围波导832外侧的一个突出部分。该突出部分是可切换波导段。接下来的两个垂直面并不重要,可随波导边界并与其相交90°。According to the figure, the
畴(836和基片外侧836的区)的特征在于静态折射率分布,是无施加电场情况下折射率的空间分布。当施加激励电场分布通过这些畴时,它们将具有与相应的静态分布不同的激励折射率分布。激励分布根据施加电场可达到的范围也具有一个范围。将两种类型的畴相互靠近并列的优点在于两个畴中的电场响应可相反,提供跨越并列区有两倍折射率变化的过度。在折射率或折射改变的情况下,该过度形成一反射边界,其反射比用单类型畴获得的反射大。The domains (836 and regions outside the substrate 836) are characterized by a static refractive index profile, the spatial distribution of the refractive index in the absence of an applied electric field. When an actuating electric field distribution is applied across these domains, they will have a different actuated refractive index distribution than the corresponding static distribution. The excitation profile also has a range according to the reachable range of the applied electric field. An advantage of juxtaposing the two types of domains close to each other is that the electric field response in the two domains can be reversed, providing a transition of twice the refractive index change across the juxtaposed region. In the case of a change in refractive index or refraction, this transition forms a reflective boundary whose reflectance is greater than that obtained with a single type of domain.
当切换器导通时,耦连到波导的输入光束反射离开TIR界面,向下传播到极化波导段,并进入输出波导段834形成偏转输出光束854。当切换器切断时,输入光束穿过极化界面传播并继续通过输入波导,形成未偏转输出光束852。由于在TIR界面的折射率变化较低,在切断状态下反射很低。由于永久波导段834是由来自波导832的数个波型指数型衰减长度隔开的,光束通过切换区域时因散射造成的功率损耗也非常低。″切断″切换器对波导而言基本上是不可见的,在输入波导中产生非常低的损耗。在切断状态下切换区的附加损耗与未激励波导的相同长度相比被称为介入损耗,当输入波导是带有许多极化切换器的总线时特别需要低介入损耗。When the switch is on, the input beam coupled to the waveguide reflects off the TIR interface, propagates down the polarized waveguide section, and enters the
极化界面相对于输入波导的角度θ(848)必须小于最大或临界TIR角θc,从斯涅尔(Snell)定律导出:
由于折射率变化发生在有相反符号的极化边界的每一侧,有效折射率变化为2Δn。该表达式假设远离边界的折射率变化缓慢改变(绝热)。由于有效折射率变化变为两倍,用一个极化TIR切换器能够达到的最大切换角度增加到用一对电极且没有极化界面的现有技术切换器的 倍。由于其增加了使用一个TIR切换器可达到的切换器阵列的最大存储密度,因此这是一个很明显的提高。Since the refractive index change occurs on each side of the polarization boundary with opposite signs, the effective refractive index change is 2Δn. This expression assumes that the refractive index changes away from the boundary slowly (adiabatically). Since the effective refractive index change is doubled, the maximum switching angle achievable with a polarized TIR switcher increases to that of a prior art switcher with a pair of electrodes and no polarized interface. times. This is a significant improvement since it increases the maximum storage density of the switch array achievable using one TIR switch.
由于折射率变化Δn取决于极化,临界角θc取决于输入光束的极化。例如,在z切割铌酸锂中,带有垂直电场E3,TM波借助r33对超常折射率中的变化很敏感,而TE波借助r13对普通折射率中的变化很敏感。由于r33》r13,更容易切换TM波。使用退火质子交换波导很方便,这是由于它们仅在z方向极化的波所至。另一方面,在x-切割y-传播(或y-切割x-传播)的铌酸锂中,TE波具有更高的折射率变化。应指出,这种情况下,必须改变电极构造,以便在基片平面的z方向而不是垂直方向产生电场分量。Since the refractive index change Δn depends on the polarization, the critical angle θc depends on the polarization of the input beam. For example, in z-cut lithium niobate, with a vertical electric field E 3 , TM waves are sensitive to changes in the extraordinary refractive index via r 33 , while TE waves are sensitive to changes in the ordinary refractive index via r 13 . Since r 33 >r 13 , it is easier to switch TM waves. The use of annealed proton exchange waveguides is convenient since they only arrive at waves that are polarized in the z direction. On the other hand, in x-cut y-propagation (or y-cut x-propagation) lithium niobate, the TE wave has a higher refractive index change. It should be noted that in this case the electrode configuration must be changed so that the electric field component is generated in the z-direction of the substrate plane rather than perpendicular to it.
实际TIR切换器的设计角度必须在数个因素优选化后选定。待切换的波型包括两角状分布(在波导制造平面内和平面外),如果两平面中波导宽度不同,两角状分布可不同。给定平面中波型的角含量几乎覆盖δΦ=±λ/πwO,其中wO是该平面中的1/e2波型收敛部分。我们希望大部分光在TIT界面反射,因入射角度必须比临界角度θc小大约切换波导平面中的角含量εΦ。角含量δΦ与收敛部分的大小成反比,但因此是我们希望优选的存储密度。波型在波导平面外的方向上的角含量也必须考虑,由于它也对有效入射角起作用,虽然其几何结构更复杂。The design angle of a practical TIR switch must be selected after optimizing several factors. The modes to be switched include two angular distributions (in and out of the plane of waveguide fabrication), which can be different if the waveguide widths are different in the two planes. The angular content of the wave modes in a given plane nearly covers δΦ=±λ/πw O , where w O is the 1/e 2 mode convergent fraction in that plane. We expect most of the light to be reflected at the TIT interface, since the angle of incidence must be smaller than the critical angle θc by approximately the angular content εΦ in the plane of the switched waveguide. The angular content δΦ is inversely proportional to the size of the convergent part, but is thus the storage density we wish to prefer. The angular content of the mode in directions out of the plane of the waveguide must also be considered, since it also contributes to the effective angle of incidence, although its geometry is more complex.
生产TIR切换器的另一种方式是应变场代替电场,或在电场外增加一应变场。应变场最便于在永久方式中实施;电场在产生反射变化时最有效。施加在畴边界的定向应变场在折射率中产生不同变化,在两个畴中通过光弹性效应在折射界面产生一折射率。如上述参考图2所述,可通过将样品加热到高温,沉积一层有不同热膨胀系数的薄膜,并冷却到室温来产生应变场。通过蚀刻出例如条状区施加到薄膜上的图形将在薄膜中的间隙周围产生应变场。然后,可使用该应变场在畴边界激励变化。如果所施加薄膜是一电介质,只要电极的沉积不是不按要求地改变应变场,可施加电场通过电介质到极化区。该薄膜优选是吸光率低的薄膜,以使其可直接接触基片,而不是由缓冲层隔开。Another way to produce a TIR switch is to replace the electric field with a strain field, or to add a strain field in addition to the electric field. Strain fields are most convenient to implement in a permanent fashion; electric fields are most effective when producing reflective changes. A directional strain field applied at the domain boundary produces a differential change in the index of refraction, which in the two domains produces an index of refraction at the refraction interface through the photoelastic effect. As described above with reference to Figure 2, the strain field can be generated by heating the sample to high temperature, depositing a film with a different coefficient of thermal expansion, and cooling to room temperature. A pattern applied to the film by etching out, for example, stripes will create a strain field around the gaps in the film. This strain field can then be used to stimulate changes at the domain boundaries. If the applied film is a dielectric, an electric field can be applied through the dielectric to the polarized regions as long as the deposition of the electrodes does not undesirably alter the strain field. The film is preferably a low absorbance film so that it is in direct contact with the substrate rather than being separated by a buffer layer.
极化区包括一部分输入波导和一个垂直于波导传播轴的界面。包含TIR交叉界面的输入波导部分定义切换器长度如下:
其中θ如前面所定义的where θ is defined as before
L=沿输入波导测量的切换器长度,和L = switcher length measured along the input waveguide, and
W=波导宽度W = waveguide width
因此,为使切换器尺寸最小,必须将波导宽度做得尽可能小。对于空间临界应用,波导段优选是单波型。例如,如果单波型波导的宽度是4μm,最大折射率变化Δn是0.0015,折射率是2.16,TIR角θ则为3°而切换器长度L为76μm。Therefore, to minimize the size of the switch, the waveguide width must be made as small as possible. For space critical applications, the waveguide section is preferably of the single mode type. For example, if the width of the single-mode waveguide is 4 μm, the maximum refractive index change Δn is 0.0015, the refractive index is 2.16, the TIR angle θ is 3° and the switch length L is 76 μm.
极化波导段与输入波导形成等于2θ的夹角,其为TIR界面的偏转角。为了有效地将偏离TIR界面的反射光束波型匹配到极化波导段,极化段应与输入波导具有近乎相同的横向波型分布。通过选择极化波导的宽度和折射率差的适当组合可实现有效波型匹配。极化波导沿由切换器界面占据的波导后半侧与输入波导相交。确定波导的准确尺寸和位置,以使从全内反射处理发出的近场波型分布优选地匹配到以传播方向和横向分布表示的波导的波型。对于极化波导段和永久波导段834之间的匹配也是如此,类似于上面参考图29A所述内容。The polarized waveguide section forms an angle equal to 2θ with the input waveguide, which is the deflection angle of the TIR interface. In order to effectively mode-match the reflected beam off the TIR interface to the polarized waveguide section, the polarized section should have nearly the same transverse mode distribution as the input waveguide. Effective mode matching can be achieved by choosing an appropriate combination of polarized waveguide width and refractive index difference. The polarized waveguide intersects the input waveguide along the rear half of the waveguide occupied by the switch interface. The exact dimensions and positions of the waveguides are determined such that the near-field mode distribution emanating from the total internal reflection process preferably matches that of the waveguide in terms of propagation direction and transverse distribution. The same is true for matching between polarized waveguide segments and
永久波导段基本上是极化波导段的继续。极化段长度取决于输入波导和切换波导中的优选损耗。为避免切换器起断时输入波导中的未偏转光束之间的散射作用,永久波导段必须与输入波导分开一段距离(至少一个光波长)。对于带有许多切换器的总线波导,输入波导中的损耗必须降低到与切换器数量成反比的值。输入波导中光束的形态分布在波导未扩散边缘之外延伸一特定距离,在该处呈指数衰减。如果永久段与输入波导隔开数个指数衰减常数,损耗可减小到总线波导可接受的程度。The permanent waveguide section is basically a continuation of the polarized waveguide section. The polarized section length depends on the preferred losses in the input waveguide and the switched waveguide. To avoid scattering effects between undeflected beams in the input waveguide when the switcher is switched on and off, the permanent waveguide section must be separated from the input waveguide by a distance (at least one optical wavelength). For a bus waveguide with many switches, the loss in the input waveguide must be reduced to a value that is inversely proportional to the number of switches. The profile of the beam in the input waveguide extends a certain distance beyond the undiffused edge of the waveguide, where it decays exponentially. If the permanent segment is separated from the input waveguide by several exponential decay constants, the loss can be reduced to an acceptable level for the bus waveguide.
极化段的长度也影响反射光束中的损耗。由于高壁的粗糙度,造成极化波导段每单位长度的损耗比未扩散波导的损耗高。另外,在波导的每一端存在上述波型转换损耗,可通过优选地匹配该波型分布使波型转换损耗最小。如果极化段较短(相当于光束的瑞利范围),透射光束实质上未转换成极化段的波型,因而降低耦连损耗。极化段的优选长度取决于输入波导和切换波导内的光束中可承受的相对损耗。The length of the polarizing section also affects the losses in the reflected beam. Due to the high wall roughness, the loss per unit length of the polarized waveguide section is higher than that of the undiffused waveguide. In addition, there is the above-mentioned mode conversion loss at each end of the waveguide, which can be minimized by preferably matching the mode distribution. If the polarization segment is short (equivalent to the Rayleigh range of the beam), the transmitted beam is substantially not converted into the mode of the polarization segment, thereby reducing coupling loss. The preferred length of the polarizing section depends on the relative losses that can be tolerated in the input waveguide and the beam within the switching waveguide.
在图29A所示波导段调制器/衰减器的情况下,在切换波导837中需要对波型有垂直限制。上面描述的相同任选方案可在此实施。图30示出一平面波导835,将光束限制在平行于基片表面的平面中。由于平面波导均匀,它的存在对波导切换器汇接点在其切断状态的损耗不会造成影响。也可实施其它方式代替平面波导或其某些组合,包括设计电场深度以获得垂直限制,使用短深度极化,使用通过电场感应折射率变化扩大的部分波导,以及使用由场激励极化区关闭的全永久波导。后两种替代方式具有因相邻折射率不连续造成光束通过波导832的损耗较高的缺点。In the case of the waveguide segment modulator/attenuator shown in FIG. 29A , vertical confinement of the wave modes is required in the switched
水平限制也是优选化切换区中的一个问题。如果要求高切换效率,优选具有较大的TIR反射角。输入波851左半部分首先反射出界面838形成右半部分反射波。然而,反射后,反射波的右半部分在横向尺寸中未受限制,直到其到达波导段837。在其未受限制通过期间将因衍射而扩张,而使耦连到输出波导834的光束功率减少一小部分。该效应降低了切换器在其导通状态的效率。然而,平均未引导距离近似地被限定在角848四倍的正弦值所划分的波导宽度。输入波右半部分通过波导段837后仍受限制,直到其因波导832右半侧造成永久折射率变化而反射离开界面838为止。然后,较好地匹配到输出波导834。输入光束851的两部分从TIT表面838反射后经受所不希望的来自波导832侧面的反射。由于该表面与光束传播轴和表面838的夹角相同,但仅有一小部分折射率不同,从该表面仅是部分而不是全反射,该反射也增加切换器损耗。Horizontal constraints are also an issue in optimizing handover regions. If high switching efficiency is required, it is preferable to have a larger TIR reflection angle. The left half of the
为使反射器效率优选并使波导损耗最小,电极设计是该切换器的一个重要方面。优选使用两个电极触发切换器。第一电极840设置在TIR界面838上方,而第二电极842设置在第一电极旁边,与该界面相邻。优选化的主要参数是两电极的间隔和第一电极边缘与极化边界之间的距离,电极边缘和极化边界可以重叠,也可以不重叠。两电极间的间隔影响激励该器件所需的电压,以及透入基片并产生折射率变化分布的电场图形的宽度。进一步分开的电极需要更高电压,但产生比靠近隔开的电极更向基片深度延伸的电场。To optimize reflector efficiency and minimize waveguide losses, electrode design is an important aspect of the switch. Preferably two electrodes are used to trigger the switch. A
电场穿入深度对获得较大净反射很重要。由于离电极越远电场越弱,极化边界的感应折射率变化也随深度降低,与TIR角一样。在被称为有效深度的某一特定深度折射率变化变得不足以维持光束中央射线在切换结构的角度的全反射。由于反射在最小TIR值之下的值随折射率变化迅速下降,TIR反射镜在此深度实质上不起作用。对于进入波导837和834的高净反射,可调整该器件设计,以便在波导832中主要电场分布下方产生有效深度。The depth of penetration of the electric field is important to obtain a large net reflection. Since the electric field becomes weaker the farther away from the electrode, the induced refractive index change at the polarization boundary also decreases with depth, as does the TIR angle. At a certain depth, called the effective depth, the refractive index change becomes insufficient to maintain total reflection of the central ray of the beam at the angle of the switching structure. TIR mirrors are essentially ineffective at this depth because reflection values below the minimum TIR value drop off rapidly with refractive index changes. For high net reflections into
由电极设计影响的第二主要操作参数是在TIR界面838之外反射波渐逝场的穿透。虽然在导通状态下没有功率可透射到TIR界面之外,电磁场穿透TIR表面相当于一个波长的距离。在TIR表面之外也存在空间对所施加电场的依赖关系,电场强度在靠近其它电极842的区内降低(实际是反向)。因此,折射率变化在TIR界面之外降低。必须注意的是在电场中发生实质变化之前渐逝场衰减到一可忽略的值,或功率漏过TIR界面。优选情况是第一电极与极化界面重叠一段距离,针对最大折射率变化和在界面838之外有足够的电场稳定性选定该段距离。The second major operating parameter affected by electrode design is the penetration of the evanescent field of reflected waves beyond the
第一电极还跨越极化波导段836延伸,并且可能进入相邻区。通过使流经波导段并进入永久波导834的功率优选化来确定激励该区836的两个电极的形状。可使用其它电极以改善极化区中的电场强度。例如,如果第二电极围绕延伸而形成U形,第一电极下方的电场平均增加,但其形成有些象凸起的波导,可能无法提供理想的折射率分布。The first electrode also extends across the
TIR切换器是一个光能路由器并且也可作为一个调制器。如果电压源连续可变,调制器则为模拟,在电压和反射性之间有非线性关系。随着所施加电压的增加,全反射界面的深度增加,从波851产生连续可调节的反射进入波854。该调制器可用于反射或透射波型,取决于移去电压时透射是否应到零或100%。对于特殊的非线性应用,反射和透射系数的非线性作为电压的函数可能有用,例如接收机对信号程度呈对数敏感。The TIR switcher is a light energy router and also acts as a modulator. If the voltage source is continuously variable, the modulator is analog, with a non-linear relationship between voltage and reflectivity. As the applied voltage increases, the depth of the total reflection interface increases, producing a continuously adjustable reflected
图31示出带有两个TIR反射器的TIR切换器。如果要求增加输出波导834和输入波导832之间的角度,可加入第二TIR界面839。输入波导832和输出波导834之间的角度为图30中的两倍,并可通过加入附加TIR界面一次又一次地加倍。以与相对界面838有一角度849建立界面839,该角度等于角度848的两倍。(如果增加TIR界面,后续TIR界面应在相对前面的TIR界面有相同角度838的情况下增加)。由于双TIR反射镜使光远离输入波导832,以致永久波导834可直接靠在极化区836的端部,不对波导932造成明显损耗,因此不再需要图30的切换波导部分837。另外,极化区836中提供垂直限制。构成极化区836和输出波导834并对齐,以使在TIR链和波导段中传播的电场分布优选地匹配输入波导832的局部最低阶波型电场分布。在TIR反射器之后,偏转光束匹配到永久波导834以便当切换器导通时形成输出光束854。Figure 31 shows a TIR switcher with two TIR reflectors. If it is desired to increase the angle between
由通过一个接一个的TIR反射镜的输入波导反射定义输入波导832外侧极化区内侧边界的形状。内侧边界的这种确定在从两TIR反射镜反射时实现了波导波型内侧边缘的优选引导。The shape of the inner boundary of the polarized region outside the
图32示出带极化TIR切换器831的TIR切换光束导向器,该导向器有一电子切换波导段。在该结构中,区836反向极化,位于界面838之后,并且如前所述由一对电极840和842激励,电极由经导体844所连接的电压源846激励。再次选择激励极性以产生来自输入光束851方向的负折射率变化。切换器导通时,光束离开TIR界面838反射到永久波导834,但与图31不同,二者之间没有极化波导段连接它们。代之以电极842在输入波导和输出波导834之间的中间区上延伸。通过向包含TIR反射边界的输入波导832段的侧向边界和输出波导834的输入边界之间的区施加电场可形成耦连波导段。如同以往一样,借助电极和Maxwell方程确定电场的三维分布。由该电极产生的电场通过电-光效应产生正折射率变化,提供所需的切换波导段。如上所述,也构成该波导段并对齐,以使输入波型优选地耦连到输出波型854。作为这种和任何TIR切换器实施的替换,输出波导可在有可忽略间隙的输入波导处开始。该替换方式在切换器切断(直通)构造时具有更高介入损耗。Figure 32 shows a TIR switched beam guide with a polarized TIR switch 831 having an electronically switched waveguide section. In this configuration,
参考图33,示出使用极化段的两位置波导路由器,不以全内反射为基础。极化区866形成可电激励的波导段,以一小角度跨越输入波导862。施加电场时,段866中的折射率增加,而输入波导中相邻区中的折射率降低。因此输入光束880至少部分地耦连到极化波导段。当切换器切断时,输入光束继续通过输入波导传播,以形成未切换的输出光束882。如果需要将所有或大部分输入光切换到输出波导864作为经切换的输出光束884离开该器件,该小角度可绝热地成为锥状,形成低损耗波导弯曲。Referring to Figure 33, a two-position waveguide router using polarized segments is shown, not based on total internal reflection. The
至少用两个电极跨越极化区施加电场以激励波导。第一电极870设置在极化波导段上方,而第二电极872与第一电极相邻设置。第二电极872与第一电极相邻并可位于极化波导段的两侧,以达到高功率分配比。如前所述,由电源846经导体844激励电极,使用平面波导835,或电场随深度下降,或在此描述的其它方法之一获得切换传播波型的垂直限制。At least two electrodes are used to apply an electric field across the polarized region to excite the waveguide. A
参考图34,数个极化TIR切换器并列放置形成阵列900。形成TIR界面的极化区912和914沿波导910一个接一个地设置。每个极化区具有相同晶体取向,晶体z轴在区912和914中与其余晶体相反。该构造的其它方面和许多变化已在上面参考图30描述。Referring to FIG. 34 , several polarized TIR switches are placed side by side to form an
用通过导线928连到电极的多输出电压控制源926分别激励每个切换器。当所有切换器切断时,输入光束902向下传播到输入波导910以形成损耗可忽略的未切换输出光束904。如果第一切换器导通,输入光束反射离开TIR界面,以便在波导916中形成第一反射输出光束908。如果第一切换器切断而第二切换器导通,输入光束反射离开第二TIR界面,以便在波导918中形成第二反射输出光束906,对后续切换器以此类推。该多切换器结构可延续到n个切换器。Each switch is individually energized by a multiple output
电极如上所述配置在每个TIR界面。电极920、922、和924中的一个或多个作为一个切换器的阴极和另一个切换器的阳极。例如,电压施加在第二电极922与第一和第三电极920和924之间,以激励第二切换器形成输出光束906。作为阳极和阴极的电极922优选应延伸到预先被极化的段912的TIR界面附近,同时覆盖一个极化区914的TIR界面和极化区域914的一个波导段。仅示出一部分结构,其中有两个完整的极化段912和914以及一个完整的电极922。该结构可通过对齐复制完整电极和极化段复制n个切换器。Electrodes are arranged at each TIR interface as described above. One or more of the
为避免通道中串话,以输入光束直到进入被激励切换器为止不能看到任何电-光折射率变化的方式向电极上施加电压。例如,为激励第二极化区914的TIR界面,可在电极922和924之间施加电压,使电极920和922与以前电极保持相同电位。To avoid crosstalk in the channel, a voltage is applied to the electrodes in such a way that no electro-optic index change is seen by the input beam until it enters the activated switch. For example, to excite the TIR interface of the
虽然极化区的总长度比L长,给定区沿波导占据的距离等于所定义的L。带有100%存储密度的TIR切换器的线性阵列因此在开始每隔距离L处具有新极化区。将其称为100%存储密度是由于在该密度下相邻区仅在波导内极化区的内侧角相互接触。由于被在先极化的结构中引导的某些光漏出到与该结构接触的下一个极化结构,相邻区相互接触是不利的。Although the total length of the polarized regions is longer than L, the distance occupied by a given region along the waveguide is equal to L as defined. A linear array of TIR switches with a storage density of 100% therefore has a new polarization region at every distance L initially. This is referred to as 100% storage density because at this density adjacent regions only touch each other at the inside corners of the polarized regions within the waveguide. It is disadvantageous for adjacent regions to touch each other since some of the light guided in a previously polarized structure leaks to the next polarized structure in contact with that structure.
我们已在上面指出,与在先极化区接触的角部是由极化区的两个垂直面形成的,其位置并不重要。通过移动这些面使极化区宽度在该内侧角部一侧变薄,可使这些区不再相互接触排列,从而减少光能泄漏。例如,通过使90°横向于波导的面的长度减半可使内侧角移动到波导中部。用来与波导平行的面现在与TIR界面平行,并变成一重要的位置表面。我们称具有该几何形状的极化区为″密集存储″极化区。(存在其它方式实现使漏光最小的目的,例如在两个不重要的面之间加入第七垂直面,但此变化如前所述在密集存储方面有另一优点)。We have pointed out above that the corners in contact with the preceding polarization zone are formed by the two perpendicular faces of the polarization zone and their position is not important. By moving these faces to make the width of the polarized region thinner on the side of the inner corner, the regions can no longer be arranged in contact with each other, thereby reducing light energy leakage. For example, the inside corner can be moved to the middle of the waveguide by halving the length of the 90° face transverse to the waveguide. The face that used to be parallel to the waveguide is now parallel to the TIR interface and becomes an important location surface. We refer to polarized regions with this geometry as "dense storage" polarized regions. (There are other ways to achieve the goal of minimizing light leakage, such as adding a seventh vertical plane between two unimportant planes, but this variation has another advantage in terms of dense storage as previously stated).
图35示出一种结构,其中通过使用用于极化区的密集存储几何形状和使相邻极化区的极化相反来使切换器的线性密度加倍。横向经过波导的极化区的界面现在相同,但仅用于沿波导轴转移。极化区将因此沿波导牢固地叠层,使切换器密度加倍。实际上,由于其它区与基片的极化方向相同(在优选情况下基片完全极化),仅有相反区在空间上完全界定。图35示出两个相反极化的区952和954。可认为TIR界面是极化区的第一面或输入面以及第二面或输出面,在波导950中传输的未切换光很可能分别进入或离开未激励极化区。Figure 35 shows a structure in which the linear density of switches is doubled by using a dense storage geometry for polarized regions and reversing the polarization of adjacent polarized regions. The interface of the polarized region transverse to the waveguide is now the same, but only for transfer along the waveguide axis. The polarized regions will thus be firmly stacked along the waveguide, doubling the switcher density. In fact, since the other regions are in the same direction of polarization as the substrate (in the preferred case the substrate is fully polarized), only the opposite region is spatially fully delimited. FIG. 35 shows two oppositely
用于输出光束946的TIR界面形成在极化基片和反向极化区952的第一(输入)面之间,由电极966激励。用于输出光束947的TIR界面形成在反向极化区952的第二(输出)面和极化基片之间,由电极967激励。用于输出光束948的TIR界面形成在极化基片和反向极化区954的第一面之间,由电极968激励。用于输出光束949的TIR界面形成在反向极化区954的第二面和极化基片之间,由电极969激励。电极沿连接到永久输出波导956、957、958和959的切换波导段在相应的TIR界面上延伸。电极966、967、968、969和970中的一个或多个优选作为一个切换器的阴极和另一个切换器的阳极。因此,每个电极沿前一切换器TIR界面的整个长度平行延伸。A TIR interface for the
每个切换器由电压源926经导体928施加电场而可分别切换。当所有切换器切断时,输入光束942向下传播到总线波导950形成一未切换输出光束944。当第一切换器导通时,输入光束反射离开其对应的TIR界面耦连到第一输出波导段956,以形成第一反射输出光束946。对应后续切换器,输入光束反射离开对应的后续TIR界面耦连到波导段957、958、或959以形成反射输出光束947、948、或949。电极上电压的典型设定是不存在来自相邻切换器的光干扰:所有在前切换器断开。例如,将所有前一电极保持在相同电位作为已切换电极可实现此目的。该多切换器结构可延续到n个切换器。Each switch is individually switchable by applying an electric field from a
需要将密集存储极化区的上游端明显地延伸到输入波导950边缘之外,保持垂直表面相对于波导的角度。该延伸捕捉输入波导波型的全指数尾部,并将所延伸的密集存储极化区的其余不重要定位表面推出波导950,从而消除光损耗。(上游和下游定义为相对于输入光束942传播的方向)。It is desirable to extend the upstream end of the dense storage polarization region significantly beyond the edge of the
如果如上所述参考图30设计极化区的切换波导,输出波导的间隔变成与其在最高密度存储中的宽度相同,以便其归入平面波导。对于某些应用平面输出波导可能有用,可使用每个切换器中的第二极化TIR界面隔开输出波导。已参考图31描述了在一个切换器中使用两个TIR界面。应指出,在图35的情况下,极化区的几何形状略有不同,以实现叠层。延伸密集存储极化区的″输出波导″部分绕第一TIR界面端部相对于输入波导942旋转一角度3θ,保持其面的平行。该″输出波导″部分因此而变成第二TIR反射器段。If the switched waveguide of the polarization region is designed as described above with reference to Figure 30, the spacing of the output waveguides becomes the same as its width in the highest density storage so that it falls under the planar waveguide. For some applications planar output waveguides may be useful, which can be separated using a second polarized TIR interface in each switch. The use of two TIR interfaces in one switcher has been described with reference to FIG. 31 . It should be noted that in the case of Figure 35, the geometry of the polarized regions is slightly different to achieve stacking. The "output waveguide" portion extending the dense storage polarization region is rotated by an angle 3Θ relative to the
第二TIR反射器段的宽度比输入波导约大50%。第二TIR反射器段内的波型传播在其内侧不限制于约2W/sinθ的距离,其中W已定义为波导宽度。在该侧出现的任何衍射将导致耦连到输出波导956-959的功率降低。应保持该距离小于约瑞利范围。在4μm宽的波导在4.5°TIR角工作的情况下,总的未限制距离约为100μm,近似等于蓝光束的瑞利范围。使这种切换器阵列性能优选的一种解决方案是在第二TIR反射器段内的关键位置增加一折射率的永久减量(不劣化电-光系数)。该关键位置是由延伸密集存储极化区的内壁和由如参考图31定义的极化区836内壁所界定的区。永久折射率减量在其从两个连续TIR反射镜反射时在波型限制的优选位置界定一个永久波导边界。所增加的折射率减量在其到达输入波导时逐渐减小到零,通过截去足够远离波导的折射率减量区可使加到输入波导的损耗明显减少。折射率减量也不干扰前一个TIR界面的TIR功能(实际上有帮助)。The width of the second TIR reflector segment is about 50% larger than the input waveguide. Mode propagation within the second TIR reflector segment is not limited to a distance of about 2W/sin[theta] inside it, where W has been defined as the waveguide width. Any diffraction that occurs on this side will result in a reduction in the power coupled to the output waveguides 956-959. This distance should be kept less than the Rayleigh range. In the case of a 4 μm wide waveguide operated at a 4.5° TIR angle, the total unconfined distance is about 100 μm, approximately equal to the Rayleigh range of the blue beam. One solution to optimize the performance of this switcher array is to add a permanent decrement of the refractive index (without degrading the electro-optic coefficient) at strategic locations within the second TIR reflector segment. The critical location is the region bounded by the inner walls of the extended dense storage polarization region and by the inner walls of the
因此,已切换的光束从两个连续的TIR界面反射,使切换器的全偏转角度加倍到4θ。通过加倍输出角度,使得空间可供宽度等于输入波导的输出波导使用,间隔等于其最密结构中的宽度。Thus, the switched beam is reflected from two consecutive TIR interfaces, doubling the full deflection angle of the switcher to 4θ. By doubling the output angle, space is available for output waveguides with a width equal to that of the input waveguides, spaced equal to their width in their densest configuration.
输出波导在第二TIR反射器的最终角落连到图35中的极化区,相对于第二TIR界面的角度为θ,并优选地对准以便收集离开第二TIR界面的光反射。优选将用于给定开关的两个TIR反射器无介入波导段地连接。这样可使必须在极化波导中传输的偏转光束的路径长度最小,因壁面粗糙和不对称造成可能比永久信道波导具有更高损耗。The output waveguide connects to the polarized region in Figure 35 at the final corner of the second TIR reflector, at an angle Θ relative to the second TIR interface, and is preferably aligned so as to collect light reflections off the second TIR interface. Preferably the two TIR reflectors for a given switch are connected without intervening waveguide sections. This minimizes the path length of the deflected beam that must travel in the polarized waveguide, which may have higher losses than a permanent channel waveguide due to wall roughness and asymmetry.
在另一种极化边界结构中,在两个相邻极化区之间的边界可以是弯曲TIR结构。该结构的波型也是耳语廊式波型,可能由波导内侧边界上的某些限制改进。使极化边界的曲率半径足够小以使耳语廊波型与耦连在两种类型波导之间的较大功率的波导波型有良好匹配,在波型内针对角度分布在足够大的实际全内反射发生。In another polarization boundary structure, the boundary between two adjacent polarization regions may be a curved TIR structure. The mode of this structure is also a whispering gallery mode, possibly modified by some confinement on the inner boundary of the waveguide. Make the radius of curvature of the polarization boundary small enough to have a good match between the whispering gallery mode and the larger power waveguide mode coupled between the two types of waveguides, within the mode for the angular distribution within a sufficiently large practical full Internal reflection occurs.
图36示出用于更高存储密度的双交叉波导结构980。该结构有两种改进:一个不对称损耗波导交叉997,和90°反射镜976和977。密度随着平行于第一输入波导984的第二输入波导982的加入而增加,第一和第二波导在基片981的同一表面上,有效地使存储密度加倍。切换器元件983和985已作为上述极化TIR切换器的变化之一概略说明,但可用本文中描述的任何集成光切换器替换,因此,我们在此或图36中不详细描述该切换器。(该切换器也可用这里描述的其它方式实施,例如参考图7描述的光栅切换器、参考图10描述的耦连器、参考图25描述的分配器、和参考图33描述的引导切换器。)Figure 36 shows a double
第一输入光束992向下传播到第一波导,而第二输入光束994向上传播到第二波导。两光束可从不同光源发出,或由同一光源经一主动或被动分离器发出。当相关切换器切断时,输入光束992和994通过其传播分别形成未偏转输出光束993和995。如果相关切换器导通,第一输入光束994偏转进入输出光束996,同时第二输入光束992偏转进入输出光束998。The
在不对称波导交叉997中,两波导相互交叉,调节折射率分布,以一个波导中损耗略微增高为代价使另一波导中的损耗最小。两个交叉波导彼此相对以较大夹角布置(此处说明为90°),以使交叉损耗最小。参考图36的几何形状,第二偏转光束998跨越第一波导984(这种情况下,已切换输出光束可平行于输出波导986和988传播)。波导988在交叉点处与波导984分开,留下间隙990和991。这样使波导984中的损耗最小,产生不对称损耗结构,该结构中,波导988中的损耗比交叉区中波导984中的损耗高。为便于后面叙述,我们称不对称交叉沿波导有较低损耗为″定点″。不对称交叉997沿波导984定点。如果间隙990和991比波导984中波型的数个指数衰减长度宽,交叉结构基本不会对波导984提供附加损耗。然后可沿波导984将多个不对称交叉结构依次定点,以产生交叉许多波导的低损耗波导。间隙990和991将对在断开波导988中传播的光束998产生一些反射和散射,在两波导中所要求低损耗的组合限制下可使间隙宽度最小。为使来自在波导988中传播的光束998的光损耗在交叉结构最小,可调制横向于波导传播轴的折射率分布或沿波导轴使其逐渐减小。其目的是在波导984中保持很低损耗,同时使波导988中损耗最小。如果与波导984相邻的区中折射率变化较小并且与波导984本身的折射率变化相比变化缓慢则可实现该目的。(在此所称的所有折射率变化是相对于基片而言)。In an asymmetrical waveguide crossing 997, two waveguides cross each other, adjusting the refractive index profile to minimize loss in one waveguide at the expense of slightly higher loss in the other waveguide. The two intersecting waveguides are arranged at a relatively large angle (here illustrated as 90°) relative to each other in order to minimize the crossing loss. Referring to the geometry of Figure 36, the second deflected
第二波导中的损耗有两部分:一个是折射率不连续引起的反射造成的,另一个是因衍射扩张造成的。由波导中折射率变化大小和其在波导端部和侧面的锥形分布确定反射损耗。例如,如果在两波导芯的折射率变化相同,都是Δn=0.003,在四个界面的净反射损耗将小于5%,可减少反射的准确折射率分布引起的校正可忽略不计。由于间隙宽度通常比自由空间瑞利范围小得多,衍射损耗甚至更低。例如,如果最窄波型尺寸的深度是2μm,假设材料折射率为2.2,波长为0.5μm,瑞利范围则为55μm。假设间隙宽度为3μm,每个间隙的衍射损耗小于1%。如果波导深度为4μm,衍射损耗实质上更小。通过相对于间隙尺寸增加波导大小可使衍射损耗最小。The loss in the second waveguide has two parts: one is due to reflections caused by the refractive index discontinuity, and the other is due to diffractive expansion. The return loss is determined by the magnitude of the refractive index change in the waveguide and its taper distribution at the ends and sides of the waveguide. For example, if the refractive index variation in the two waveguide cores is the same, Δn = 0.003, the net reflection losses at the four interfaces will be less than 5%, and the correct refractive index profile that reduces reflections will cause negligible corrections. Since the gap width is typically much smaller than the free-space Rayleigh range, the diffraction loss is even lower. For example, if the depth of the narrowest mode dimension is 2 μm, assuming a material with a refractive index of 2.2 and a wavelength of 0.5 μm, the Rayleigh range would be 55 μm. Assuming a gap width of 3 μm, the diffraction loss per gap is less than 1%. If the waveguide depth is 4 μm, the diffraction loss is substantially smaller. Diffraction loss can be minimized by increasing the waveguide size relative to the gap size.
通常,″间隙″900相邻交叉区有一折射率分布。相对于基片折射率定义该折射率分布。间隙中折射率可从一等于波导988折射率分布的值逐渐减小到相邻交叉区的另一值。交叉区的重要部分是波导984的光波型在其中传播的体积。为使波导984中的损耗最小,该重要部分中交叉区附近的折射率比波导984内折射率分布小得多。Typically, "gap" 900 has a refractive index profile adjacent to the intersection region. The refractive index profile is defined relative to the substrate refractive index. The index of refraction in the gap may taper from a value equal to the index profile of the
带有不对称光损耗的交叉波导几何形状可由许多几何变化组合。例如,对于已切换输出波导横向于输入波导的多个交叉点可使用三个或更多输入波导。对优选波导的选择也可以许多方式进行,优选是在使其在交叉点损耗最小的意义上进行选择。我们已讨论了一个优选波导为平行的实例。然而,在更复杂的系统中,可能有彼此交叉的优选波导,以及交叉非优选波导得到的优选波导。如何实现优选波导的交叉的选择取决于其应用。在一器件中的波导交叉结构可以是不对称损耗交叉和间隙宽度为零的对称损耗交叉的任何组合。Crossed waveguide geometries with asymmetric optical loss can be combined by many geometric variations. For example, three or more input waveguides may be used for multiple intersections where the switched output waveguides are transverse to the input waveguides. The choice of the preferred waveguide can also be done in many ways, preferably in the sense that it minimizes losses at the intersection points. We have already discussed an example where it is preferred that the waveguides be parallel. However, in more complex systems it is possible to have preferred waveguides that cross each other, and preferred waveguides that cross non-preferred waveguides. The choice of how to achieve the crossover of the preferred waveguides depends on its application. The waveguide crossing structure in a device can be any combination of asymmetric lossy crossings and symmetric lossy crossings with a gap width of zero.
对于以小角度偏转光束的切换器(例如TIR切换器),可提供诸如976和977之类的附加光束旋转器件,以便在波导交叉处获得大交角。光束旋转器件976和977优选是垂直微型反射镜,安装在固定位置。通过使基片材料在其体积内移动,留下一个与波导相邻的平坦垂直表面(粗糙度优选较低)并在将反射光优选地向下导向输出波导986或988的角度定向来形成每个微型反射镜。可采用传统处理技术制造微型反射镜,包括用例如高功率激元激光或离子束蚀刻的激光烧蚀,二者可在掩模的帮助下界定反射镜的几何形状。体积内可充以低折射率,低损耗材料,例如氧化铝或二氧化硅,以防止反射镜表面受到污染并保持反射镜的全内反射性质。For switches that deflect beams at small angles (such as TIR switchers), additional beam rotation devices such as 976 and 977 can be provided to obtain large intersection angles at waveguide intersections. The
优选将微型反射镜相对于波导之一的输入的角度调整到提供全内反射。微型反射镜体积在其反射表面垂直方向的厚度优选比光波长大得多,以使反射光波渐逝尾部通过微型反射镜的泄漏最小。调整相对于其它波导的角度,以使反射光束的中间传播方向平行于其它波导中轴。调整微型反射镜的位置以使从一个波导到另一个波导的光耦连优选。优选调整反射镜在结合区的位置,以使照亮反射镜表面的两光束的″重心″在同一位置。反射镜横向于入射和反射光束的长度大于波导宽度的两倍,以便将整个波型全部反射,包括光束尾中的指数降低强度。从波导波型之一输入的光通过波导结合区衍射到微型反射镜,在耦连到输出波导波型之前以反射角通过波导结合区反射和衍射回来。在反射镜附近两波导之间的结合区优选地保持在与未限制光束的瑞利范围相比较小范围内,使波导宽度在2至5微米范围内即可实现。The angle of the micromirror relative to the input of one of the waveguides is preferably adjusted to provide total internal reflection. The thickness of the micromirror volume perpendicular to its reflective surface is preferably much larger than the wavelength of light to minimize leakage of the evanescent tail of the reflected light wave through the micromirror. The angles relative to the other waveguides are adjusted so that the mid-propagation direction of the reflected beam is parallel to the mid-axis of the other waveguides. The position of the micromirrors is adjusted to optimize optical coupling from one waveguide to the other. The position of the mirror in the junction area is preferably adjusted so that the "center of gravity" of the two light beams illuminating the surface of the mirror is at the same location. The length of the mirror transverse to the incident and reflected beams is greater than twice the width of the waveguide in order to fully reflect the entire mode, including the exponentially reduced intensity in the beam tail. Light input from one of the waveguide modes diffracts through the waveguide junction to the micromirror, where it is reflected and diffracted back through the waveguide junction at a reflection angle before being coupled to the output waveguide mode. The junction region between the two waveguides near the mirror is preferably kept small compared to the Rayleigh range of an unconfined beam, achievable with waveguide widths in the range of 2 to 5 microns.
图36的结构使已切换光分布波导的大叉指阵列成为可能。整个结构980沿一对输入波导复制多次,用交替来源(图形rentage)的小图形产生一组交错输出波导(本文中,来源是指从一特定″来源″输入波导得到的光功率)。每个输入波导可连接到大量输出波导,只要切换元件具有很小的介入损耗,如同上面列出和在此描述的元件的情况。由于不对称交叉结构,在其它波导(包括附加切换器、微型反射镜、不对称波导交叉、和交错输出波导)上方增加更多的输入波导不明显增加较低输入波导的损耗或影响其在长距离上向许多输出波导分配光的能力。它将适度地增加每个附加输入波导所需的光源功率,以便向其相应输出波导的端部传送相同功率。可平行使用和所要求一样多的输入波导以分配尽可能大的总的光功率。其输出波导可使用图36的方法以许多不同图形交错。使用光栅反射器代替TIR切换器可得到相同结果。如果光栅反射器相对于输入波导以较大的角度定向,则不再需要微型反射镜。The structure of Figure 36 enables a large interdigitated array of switched light distribution waveguides. The
上一段描述的结构是一种一对多构造,其中每个切换器一个输出伴随每个输入多个切换器。无法将许多输入连到同一输出。需要一种多对一构造。通过组合一对多和多对一构造获得多对多构造。The structure described in the previous paragraph is a one-to-many structure where one output per switch is accompanied by multiple switches per input. It is not possible to wire many inputs to the same output. A many-to-one construct is required. Many-to-many constructions are obtained by combining one-to-many and many-to-one constructions.
图37示出有TIR切换器的波导阵列1060排列成多对一构造。所示结构中,两个输入波导1072和1074将两输入光束1062和1064切换成一个输出波导1076中的一个输出光束1070。输入TIR切换器1090和1092,以及输出切换器1094和1096已在前面参考图30-32和36描述,因此仅将其概略示出,为清楚起见省略许多元件(例如电极、接点、功率源、控制器、垂直限制器件、极化区深度、输出波导限制类型)。如参考图36所述,输入TIR切换器被排列成以正向传播光束,而输出TIR切换器被排列成以反向传播光束。切换器1090和1092基本上同时切换,如同切换器1094和1096,由于需要二者完成将功率注入输出切换器1076。如参考图36所示,当切换器1090或1094导通时,光束1062和1064的一小部分分别切换到波导1078或1084。剩余的输入光束沿输入波导的延伸传播到一输出路径成为光束1066或1068,其可被用于其它元件或将其束流收集器以吸收或散射到系统之外。设置微型反射镜以便将来自波导1078和1084的光束分别反射到波导1080或1086。在其导通状态下,TIR切换器1092或1096接收分别在波导1080或1086中传播的光束,形成输出光束1070。如果需要将光束1062切换到输出光束1070,很显然,切换器1096和所有后续切换器必须断开。(否则,将所需要的大部分光束反射出波导1076)。在多切换器阵列中的所有其它切换光束也适用类似限制。Figure 37 shows a
如在此所述处理基片1098,以产生所说明的结构。当切换器1090或1094切断时,输入光束通过切换器区1090或1094传播,其损耗可忽略,然后横向于波导1076(如果需要,在不对称交叉中),并分别以输出光束1066或1068出现,可作为附加切换器的输入。
也可提供附加输入波导,耦连到波导1076(或如需要可不耦连),在输出光束1070方向以修改方式重复该结构。也可提供附加输出波导,如果需要耦连到输入波导1072和/或1074,在光束1066和1068方向以修改方式重复该结构。Additional input waveguides may also be provided, coupled to waveguide 1076 (or uncoupled if desired), repeating the structure in a modified fashion in the direction of
图38以多对多构造示出光栅反射器阵列1210。在所示结构中,两个输入波导1222和1224将两输入光束1212和1214切换成靠近或接触该输入波导的两个输出波导1226和1228中的两个输出光束1220和1221。包含光栅1238、1240、1244和1246的光栅TIR切换器1230、1232、1234、和1236已在前面参考图7、8、12、和13描述,因此仅将其概略示出,为清楚起见省略许多元件(例如电极、接点、功率源、控制器、垂直限制器件、极化区深度、极化区锥状或电极间隔)。当切换器1230或1232导通时,光束1212的一小部分分别切换到输出光束1220或1221。剩余的输入光束沿输入波导的延伸传播到一输出路径成为光束1250,其可被用于某些其它元件或将其束流收集器以吸收或散射到系统之外。当切换器1234或1236导通时,光束1214的一小部分分别切换到输出光束1220或1221。剩余的输入光束沿输入波导的延伸传播到一输出路径成为光束1252,其可被用于某些其它元件或将其束流收集器以吸收或散射到系统之外。Figure 38 shows a grating reflector array 1210 in a many-to-many configuration. In the configuration shown, two input waveguides 1222 and 1224 switch two input beams 1212 and 1214 into two output beams 1220 and 1221 in two output waveguides 1226 and 1228 that are close to or touch the input waveguides. The grating TIR switches 1230, 1232, 1234, and 1236 including the gratings 1238, 1240, 1244, and 1246 have been described above with reference to FIGS. Components (such as electrodes, contacts, power sources, controllers, vertical confinement devices, polarization zone depth, polarization zone taper, or electrode spacing). When switch 1230 or 1232 is turned on, a fraction of beam 1212 is switched to output beam 1220 or 1221, respectively. The remaining input beam propagates along the extension of the input waveguide to an output path as beam 1250, which can be used by some other element or its beam dump to absorb or scatter out of the system. When switch 1234 or 1236 is turned on, a fraction of beam 1214 is switched to output beam 1220 or 1221, respectively. The remaining input beam propagates along the extension of the input waveguide to an output path as beam 1252, which can be used by some other element or its beam dump to absorb or scatter out of the system.
如在此所述处理基片1248,以产生所说明的结构。当切换器切断时,输入光束通过开关区(如果需要,其中波导可构成为不对称交叉)传播,并分别作为输出光束1250或1252出现,可作为附加切换器的输入。波导可相互以简单的大角度结合,或可以是实质上不影响光栅1238、1240、1244、和1246位置的不对称交叉。应指出,实际光栅可以是覆盖基片和由所要求电极仅在不同切换器区激励的单个大型光栅的一部分。例如,如果光栅由极化畴构成,这样可允许整个基片极化为光栅所用,可使生产更简单。另一方面,可将光栅排列成条纹状或其它组群。Substrate 1248 was processed as described herein to produce the illustrated structures. When the switch is off, the input beam propagates through the switch region (where the waveguides can be configured as asymmetrical crossovers if desired) and emerges as output beam 1250 or 1252 respectively, which can be used as input to an additional switch. The waveguides may join each other at simple large angles, or may be asymmetrical intersections that do not substantially affect the position of the gratings 1238, 1240, 1244, and 1246. It should be noted that the actual grating may be part of a single large grating covering the substrate and being actuated by the required electrodes only at different switch regions. For example, if the grating is formed of polarized domains, this allows the entire substrate to be polarized for the grating, making production simpler. Alternatively, the gratings may be arranged in stripes or other groups.
也可提供附加输入波导,耦连到波导1226或1228(或如需要可不耦连),在输出光束1220和1221的方向以修改方式重复该结构。也可提供附加输出波导,如果需要耦连到输入波导1222和/或1224,在光束1250和1252方向以修改方式重复该结构。Additional input waveguides may also be provided, coupled to waveguides 1226 or 1228 (or uncoupled if desired), repeating the structure in a modified fashion in the direction of output beams 1220 and 1221 . Additional output waveguides may also be provided, if desired coupled to input waveguides 1222 and/or 1224, repeating the structure in a modified fashion in the direction of beams 1250 and 1252.
图39A示意地示出另一种切换器阵列在n×n通信路由选择应用中的应用实例。在该应用中,输入光通道中的光功率以最小损耗和最小串话路由选择到输出光通道。控制器在两通道之间建立可编址路径。通过重复图38的结构形成一简单的方形阵列,直到n个输入排列在左侧和n个输出排列在底部,切换器位于波导所有n2个相交点处。交角可以是任何适宜角度。在该结构中,通过激励切换器之一实现将一个通道切换到另一个通道。光束在波导交叉处以较小串话量相互交叉,可通过使波导几何形状优选减少串话量。该结构能够在任何输入和任何输出之间独立地一对一连接。还应指出,该连接可以是双向的,以便实际上可以同时在两个方向同样使用通过通道。所示切换器作为光栅的特定应用,但也可用如参考图37所述的双TIR切换器通过复制图37的结构形成n×n输入和输出,或用已知或已发现的任何其它光切换技术来将其实施。应指出,在TIR切换器的情况下,光数据路径不通过输入和输出波导之间相交顶点,而是通过相交处附近的另一个波导。根据切换器的特定几何形状,输入和输出波导可以如图37、38、和39所示大角度,或一斜角相交。在波导倾斜相交的情况下不需要双TIR切换几何形状中的固定反射器1088和1082。Fig. 39A schematically shows another application example of switch array in nxn communication routing application. In this application, the optical power in the input optical channel is routed to the output optical channel with minimum loss and minimum crosstalk. The controller establishes an addressable path between the two channels. A simple square array is formed by repeating the structure of Figure 38 until n inputs are arranged on the left and n outputs are arranged on the bottom, with switches at all n2 intersections of the waveguides. The angle of intersection may be any suitable angle. In this configuration, switching from one channel to the other is achieved by energizing one of the switches. The beams cross each other at waveguide intersections with a small amount of crosstalk, which can be reduced by optimizing the waveguide geometry. The structure is capable of independent one-to-one connections between any input and any output. It should also be noted that the connection can be bi-directional, so that in fact the through channel can be used equally in both directions at the same time. The switch is shown as a specific application of an optical grating, but a dual TIR switch as described with reference to Figure 37 can also be used to form n x n inputs and outputs by replicating the structure of Figure 37, or any other optical switch known or discovered technology to implement it. It should be noted that in the case of a TIR switch, the optical data path does not pass through the apex of the intersection between the input and output waveguides, but through another waveguide near the intersection. Depending on the particular geometry of the switcher, the input and output waveguides may intersect at large angles as shown in Figures 37, 38, and 39, or at an oblique angle. The fixed
在该带有n个平行输入波导的简单方形几何形状中,有一个输入波导通过单个切换器连接到最近的输出波导,形成具有最低损耗的优选情况。在另一个极端方面,有一个波导必须横向于切换到最远输出波导的2(n-1)个波导交叉。这种最坏情况的连接将比优选情况的连接具有高得多的损耗。为减少切换器阵列结构的最大介入损耗,可采用参考图36所述的不对称交叉连接。在每个波导交叉在其横向于沿输入或输出波导中的一个的光传播方向定点的不对称交叉优选地帮助最坏情况连接的损耗。很明显,由于在中间结合中不对称切换器的使用将以其它切换器为代价帮助某些切换路径,该结构不能在内部波导普遍化。需要一种选择不对称交叉优选方向的算法。一种配置不对称交叉的好方式是在每个方向定点大约一半交叉。观察到对角线左上方上的n(n-1)个交点(不包括对角线)主要用于向右侧分配能量。这种交点因此应沿输入波导方向定点而右下方的交点应定点在输出波导的方向。在双向结构中,对角线上的交点应是简单的对称交点,在此被称为不对称交点的简单对角线排列。根据不同应用图形可使用其它排列,但这对一般目的的排列较好。In this simple square geometry with n parallel input waveguides, one input waveguide is connected to the nearest output waveguide through a single switch, forming the preferred case with the lowest loss. At the other extreme, there is one waveguide that must cross 2(n-1) waveguides that switch to the farthest output waveguide transversely. This worst case connection will have much higher losses than the best case connection. To reduce the maximum insertion loss of the switch array structure, an asymmetrical cross-connect as described with reference to FIG. 36 can be used. An asymmetric crossing at each waveguide crossing at its point transverse to the direction of light propagation along one of the input or output waveguides preferably aids in losses of the worst case connection. Clearly, this structure cannot be generalized in internal waveguides, since the use of asymmetric switches in the intermediate junction will help some switching paths at the expense of others. What is needed is an algorithm for selecting the preferred direction of the asymmetric crossing. A good way to configure asymmetric crossings is to spot about half the crossings in each direction. Observe that the n(n-1) intersections on the upper left of the diagonal (not including the diagonal) are mainly used to distribute energy to the right. This intersection point should therefore be positioned in the direction of the input waveguide and the lower right intersection point should be positioned in the direction of the output waveguide. In a bidirectional structure, the intersections on the diagonal shall be simple symmetric intersections, referred to herein as a simple diagonal arrangement of asymmetrical intersections. Other arrangements of graphics may be used depending on the application, but this is the preferred arrangement for general purposes.
一个n×m(其中n>m)排列仅允许n个″输入″线和m个″输出″线之间的全连接线。在此,由于所有线路是双向的,″输入″和″输出″仅用于识别目的。附加的n-m″系统″线路可用于监控和广播功能中的系统控制。例如,如果线路A希望连接到线路B,它将针对该功能发送系统请求,直到应答。例如,线路m+3可用于扫描系统请求的所有″输入″线路。(为提供类似线路来监测″输出″线路,需要大型矩阵线路,例如图39A所示的n×n矩阵,其中m×m个线路子群中的m条线路提供给用户。一条线路,例如线路n-2可用于监控″输出″线路)。在监控中,系统将接通对应于″输入″或″输出″线路的连续光栅,并检测线路是否运行。如果所监控的线路中任何一条运行,通过依次接通与监控检测器在同一线上的光栅可使某些功率切换到监控检测器。一条运行的线路具有将其连接到另一条所选线路的激励反射器。然而,通过激励反射器时将泄漏一些功率,形成可由监控检测器检测到光束。当本实例中连到线路m+3的监控检测器将切换器1255(为具体起见将其画成一个光栅切换器)切换到导通并从线路A接收请求,控制系统将检测线路B是否忙。当该连接通过切换器1253到线路n-2时,通过线路B连接切换器泄漏的残余光束将警告系统线路B在运行中。如果未检测到运行,系统请求将发送到线路A和B二者(如果其具有多路发送/接收能力可能通过同一监控线,或可能通过分离的系统线路),切换器1254可闭合以建立连接。An nxm (where n>m) arrangement allows only fully connected lines between n "input" lines and m "output" lines. Here, "in" and "out" are used for identification purposes only, since all lines are bidirectional. Additional n-m "system" lines are available for system control in supervisory and broadcast functions. For example, if line A wants to connect to line B, it will send a system request for that function until answered. For example, line m+3 can be used to scan all "incoming" lines requested by the system. (To provide similar lines to monitor "outgoing" lines, a large matrix of lines is required, such as the n x n matrix shown in Figure 39A, where m lines in m x m line subgroups are provided to the subscriber. A line, such as line n-2 can be used to monitor "output" lines). In monitoring, the system will switch on the continuous light barrier corresponding to the "input" or "output" line and detect whether the line is running. If any of the lines being monitored is active, some power can be switched to the supervisory detectors by sequentially switching on the light grids on the same line as the supervisory detectors. A running line has an active reflector connecting it to another selected line. However, some power will leak through the excited reflector, forming a beam detectable by the monitor detector. When the supervisory detector connected to line m+3 in this example switches switch 1255 (drawn as a raster switch for concreteness) to conduction and receives a request from line A, the control system will detect that line B is busy . When this connection goes through
由于即使部分地接通与来自给定输入的所有输出对应的所需行的切换器将干扰其它信道之间某些已建立和可能会运行的通信连接,用于一对一连接的基础m×m切换单元内的线路不适用于广播功能。从作为图39A所说明的m×m切换单元″外侧″的系统线路最适合于广播。(几何形状的″内侧角落″是″输入″侧上的线路1和″输出″侧上的线路1之间具有最低损耗的波导连接的优选情况)。以广播为例,所示线路C借助光栅1256运行地连接到图39A中大多数或所有″输出″线路。线路C上的切换器1256必须仅部分导通,以便有足够的功率传送到每个″输出″线路。可使用类似的协议以防止广播时在简单通信连接情况下信道之间冲突。仅用不起作用的信道建立广播连接,系统可将信道组合在一起和/或等待单独信道以便允许对它们广播。Since even a switch that partially switches on the desired row corresponding to all outputs from a given input will interfere with some established and possibly operational communication connections between other channels, the basis for a one-to-one connection m× mThe wiring inside the switching unit is not suitable for the broadcast function. The system line "outside" from the mxm switching unit illustrated in FIG. 39A is most suitable for broadcasting. (The "inner corner" of the geometry is the preferred case for the lowest loss waveguide connection between
为提高切换效率,波导可为较大的多波型波导,在单波型通信网络的情况下用别处描述的绝热扩展器连接单波型输入和输出端口1至m。To improve switching efficiency, the waveguides may be larger multi-mode waveguides, in the case of a single-mode communication network connecting the single-mode input and
上面参考图39A描述的整个结构可作为非同步传送波型切换器,或任何点对点通信应用。该结构的一个有效变化是用于WDM网络中的多波长操作。可使用极化光栅切换器,或使用调谐进入和离开特定通信频带的可调谐固定光栅如在此所述来实施波长选择光切换器。在WDM网络中,所需要的是在信道之间切换特定波长,而不影响可能在同一信道中传送(双向)的其它波长。对于可选择反射频率同时在WDM光谱中实质地传输其它组频率的可调谐切换器,图39A的简单几何形状是合适的。然而,如果使用单操作频率的切换光栅,每个波长需要分开的连接路径。The entire structure described above with reference to FIG. 39A can be used as an asynchronous transmission mode switcher, or any point-to-point communication application. An efficient variation of this structure is for multi-wavelength operation in WDM networks. Wavelength selective optical switches may be implemented as described herein using polarized grating switches, or using tunable fixed gratings tuned in and out of specific communication frequency bands. In WDM networks, what is required is to switch a particular wavelength between channels without affecting other wavelengths that may be transmitted (bidirectionally) in the same channel. For a tunable switch that can selectively reflect frequencies while transmitting substantially other sets of frequencies in the WDM spectrum, the simple geometry of Figure 39A is suitable. However, if a switched grating with a single operating frequency is used, separate connection paths are required for each wavelength.
图39B示出带有分开路径的切换WDM通信网络1260,用于网络中使用的每个频率。该实例用于双频率WDM网络,但可推广到任何数量的通信频率。图39B示出连接到三个端口1a、2a、和3a的″输入″波导1276,并示出连接到三个端口1b、2b、和3b的″输出″波导1276。波导形成9个交点。在每个交点,有三个连接到每个″输入″和每个″输出″的附加光径。在该实例中附加路径相同,并包括三种类型。第一类光径1266包括一对固定频率切换反射器,两个反射器可反射WDM系统的两信号频带中的第一个。反射器优选是横向于与该交点相关的″输入″和″输出″波导的光栅,并反射对应波导和连接到两光栅的附加波导段之间第一频带中的功率。第二类光径1268包括一对固定频率切换反射器,两个反射器可反射WDM系统的两信号频带中的第二个。另外,反射器优选是横向于相应波导放置的光栅,并反射对应波导和连接到两第二光栅的附加波导段之间第二频带中的功率。第三类光径1270包括一对频率独立切换反射器,两个反射器可反射WDM系统的两信号频带。第三类光径可由波导和固定反射镜连接的TIR反射器对实施(参考图37所述)。Figure 39B shows a switched WDM communication network 1260 with separate paths for each frequency used in the network. This example is for a dual frequency WDM network, but can be generalized to any number of communication frequencies. Figure 39B shows an "input" waveguide 1276 connected to three ports 1a, 2a, and 3a, and an "output" waveguide 1276 connected to three ports 1b, 2b, and 3b. The waveguides form 9 intersections. At each intersection, there are three additional optical paths connected to each "input" and each "output". The additional paths are the same in this example, and include three types. The first type of optical path 1266 includes a pair of fixed frequency switching reflectors that reflect the first of the two signal frequency bands of the WDM system. The reflector is preferably a grating transverse to the "input" and "output" waveguides associated with the intersection point and reflects power in a first frequency band between the corresponding waveguides and additional waveguide segments connected to the two gratings. The second type of optical path 1268 includes a pair of fixed frequency switching reflectors that reflect the second of the two signal frequency bands of the WDM system. In addition, the reflector is preferably a grating placed transversely to the respective waveguide and reflects power in a second frequency band between the respective waveguide and an additional waveguide segment connected to the two second gratings. The third type of optical path 1270 includes a pair of frequency independently switched reflectors, the two reflectors can reflect the two signal frequency bands of the WDM system. A third type of optical path can be implemented by a TIR reflector pair connected by a waveguide and a fixed mirror (described with reference to Figure 37).
这种情况下,端口1a、2a、1b、和2b加相关波导1276、1277形成一2×2切换网络,该网络可在任何″输入″端口和任何″输出″端口之间同时切换双频通道。带有相关波导1276,1277的系统控制端口3a和3b提供监控和系统通信功能。例如,如果需要在端口2a和1b之间切换WDM系统的第一频率,与第一类光径1266相关在波导交点连接到端口2a和1b的两切换器导通,通过连接两切换器的波导在端口2a和1b之间在第一频率路由选择光功率。如果与给定端口相关的所有频率被路由选择到另一端口,切换器和第三类光径1270则在与两端口对应的交点导通。由于切换任意两信道之间之间的两WDM频率,可触发两个对应光径1266和1268,因此在2×2网络中光径1270实际是多余的。然而,在具有许多WDM频率的更高级通信网络中,由于其将具有最小损耗,一个单的全频连接是所要求的。In this case, ports 1a, 2a, 1b, and 2b plus associated waveguides 1276, 1277 form a 2x2 switching network that simultaneously switches dual frequency channels between any "input" port and any "output" port . System control ports 3a and 3b with associated waveguides 1276, 1277 provide monitoring and system communication functions. For example, if it is necessary to switch the first frequency of the WDM system between ports 2a and 1b, the two switches connected to ports 2a and 1b at the intersection of the waveguides associated with the first type of optical path 1266 conduct, through the waveguide connecting the two switches Optical power is routed at a first frequency between ports 2a and 1b. If all of the frequencies associated with a given port are routed to another port, the switch and
图40中示出了一种二维一对多路由选择结构。第一行波导路由选择切换器把一从输入波导来光功率连接到象素波导的各列。在此未示出该切换器的细部结构,在此仅以光栅形式示出,但可以数种不同方式实施。″象素″切换器二维阵列将离开象素的功在″象素位置″定向。(功率在象素位置所发生的情况视应用不同而定)。双层切换器被用来到达所有象素。此结构可用于显示器,启动或控制过程或装置,或是读取特定形式数据。在后一种场合中,功率流动方向相反而装置的操作有如一多对一定向结构。A two-dimensional one-to-many routing structure is shown in FIG. 40 . The first row of waveguide routing switches connects an optical power from the input waveguide to the columns of pixel waveguides. The details of the switch are not shown here, only in the form of a grating, but can be implemented in several different ways. A two-dimensional array of "pixel" switches directs the work leaving a pixel at a "pixel location". (What happens to the power at the pixel location depends on the application). Double layer switches are used to reach all pixels. This structure can be used to display, start or control a process or device, or read certain forms of data. In the latter case, the power flow is reversed and the device operates as a one-to-one directional configuration.
输入光束1342在输入波导1352中传输且由切换元件二维阵列1356耦连到许多象素波导1354中的其中之一。切换元件1364可做为光栅切换器,如上文中结合图7,8,12,13,和38所述,或可做为TIR切换器,如上文结合图30-32和37所述,或可做为其他可切换元件。所述光束1344由切换元件1358切换到一象素波导,在此它被切换元件1360第二次切换,形成传到象素元件1362的光束1346。象素元件1362可由所示的波导段而与波导1354隔开,或可靠在波导上一小段距离,使未切换光一小部分由象素元件通过。An
在显示器应用的情况下,所述象素元件可以是用于产生出自基板1348的光1342的辐射。该象素元件可以是处于基片1348表面上的粗糙斑点(patchs),或斜角微型镜面,或用于光散射的粗糙斜角微镜,或荧光凹点,或产生可见光的其他器件。在显示器的情况下,输入光束1342可以包含几种颜色,在这种情况中,所述波导能够波导向所有的颜色,所述切换器能够耦连所有的颜色。顺序地对波导切换器扫描,以产生显示器的图象。光栅切换器可按多周期光栅实现,但TIR切换器用于此目的不需要什么修改。如果为单模波导,则它们必须有效地波导向最短波长的光束。优选对该输入光束1342进行外部调制(包括其所有的颜色成分),以便转换元件是单纯的开-关器件。注意,如果象素元件以约直线的方式设置,且是可沿行电连接的,则可以跨越各纵列波导设置一单排电极,以激励一行象素切换器。In the case of a display application, the pixel elements may be radiation for generating light 1342 from a
在投影显示器的情况下,需要一个附加透镜,以收集由阵列中所有象素发射的光,并把它们重会聚到距该透镜一定(大的)距离的屏幕上。该透镜优选应该具有一个良好的轴外特性,以便在屏幕上聚焦面被合理地变平,和它应该具有一个足够大的数值孔径(NA),以收集由该象素阵列辐射的光的大部分。把一个透镜矩阵耦连到象素结构上以减小由各个透镜产生的光束的散射将是有利的,从而减小在投射透镜上的(昂贵的)NA需求。实现这种情况的另一种方式是再使波导递减到象素的最大可能尺寸。把象素递减到大的横向尺寸是相对容易的,但获得一种深波导是困难的。可通过把一个宽波导与一个长光栅耦连器耦连来形成大的象素。In the case of projection displays, an additional lens is required to collect the light emitted by all the pixels in the array and refocus them onto the screen at a (large) distance from the lens. The lens should preferably have a good off-axis characteristic so that the focal plane is reasonably flattened on the screen, and it should have a numerical aperture (NA) large enough to collect a large portion of the light radiated by the pixel array. part. It would be advantageous to couple a matrix of lenses to the pixel structure to reduce the scattering of the beams produced by the individual lenses, thereby reducing the (expensive) NA requirements on the projection lenses. Another way to achieve this is to taper the waveguide again to the largest possible size of the pixel. It is relatively easy to scale down pixels to large lateral dimensions, but it is difficult to obtain a deep waveguide. Large pixels can be formed by coupling a wide waveguide with a long grating coupler.
在路由选择结构中分布的光也可被用于激励过程,例如在DNA读出器或过敏症读出器,或蛋白质读出器的情况下。在上述每一种特定情况中,利用可被光激活的荧光标记制备DNA或过敏症或蛋白质的分离阵列。可为每一象素期间的激活按排一种分子或分子的一种制备。在不同象素期间对光进行电扫描,该扫描的速度和顺序可根据结果确定。可对荧光进行收集,以便通过一个外部透镜和检测器进行检测。然而,对于一些应用来说,收集和把发射的辐射波导向到一个光能检测装置以及对源光的辐射进行控制,对于象速(和其透镜)和波导结构本身是有利的。取决于所需的光照和收集形态,该透镜可以是准直透镜,重聚焦透镜,甚至是可以想到的能产生发散光束的透镜。通过透镜的焦距把准直透镜与波导的一端分开,以便该发射(和收集)的光束基本是平行的。如果存在将由质询光束往返移动的大量材料,准直透镜是非常有用的。通过物距把重聚焦透镜从该波导的一端分开,该物距的倒数与象距的倒数和焦距的倒数之差有关,其中象距是从透镜到所需成象光束点的距离。如果需要把取样集中到一个小的光点上,和照射和或从波导读取它,则要使用重聚焦透镜。利用一个由小于其焦距之距离与波导分开的透镜生成散射光束。如果接近透镜的波的散射在两个平面上是不同的,则自该透镜输出光束不必是环绕的。产生光束环绕的最简单方法(对于在重聚焦后的最小光点)是在该波导的一端实现环绕光束开始,这可通过对波导进行设计实现,或通过逐渐缩小波导来实现。该透镜优选具有合适的数值空径,以允许来自波导的整个波,和根据应用把其聚焦到一个衍射受限点或准直光束。The light distributed in the routing structure can also be used to activate the process, for example in the case of DNA readers or allergy readers, or protein readers. In each of the specific cases described above, separate arrays of DNA or allergies or proteins are prepared using fluorescent labels that can be activated by light. One molecule or one preparation of molecules can be arranged for activation during each pixel. The light is electrically scanned during the different pixels, the speed and sequence of the scanning being determined from the results. Fluorescence is collected for detection through an external lens and detector. However, for some applications, the collection and waveguide of the emitted radiation to an optical energy detection device and the control of the radiation from the source light are advantageous both for the image speed (and its lens) and for the waveguide structure itself. Depending on the desired illumination and collection modality, this lens can be a collimating lens, a refocusing lens, or even a conceivable lens that produces a diverging beam. The collimating lens is separated from one end of the waveguide by the focal length of the lens so that the emitted (and collected) beams are substantially parallel. Collimating lenses are useful if there is a large amount of material that will be traversed by the interrogation beam. The refocusing lens is separated from one end of the waveguide by an object distance, the inverse of which is related to the difference between the inverse of the image distance and the inverse of the focal length, where the image distance is the distance from the lens to the desired imaging beam spot. If it is necessary to focus the sample into a small spot and illuminate and/or read it from the waveguide, a refocusing lens is used. The scattered beam is generated using a lens separated from the waveguide by a distance less than its focal length. If the scattering of waves approaching a lens is different in the two planes, the output beam from the lens need not be circumscribed. The easiest way to produce beam wrapping (for the smallest spot after refocusing) is to achieve a wraparound beam start at one end of the waveguide, which can be achieved by designing the waveguide, or by tapering the waveguide. The lens preferably has a suitable numerical aperture to admit the entire wave from the waveguide and focus it to a diffraction limited spot or collimated beam depending on the application.
象素元件1362可以是上述情况中的任何一种元件,它可以与要被激活的材料直接结合,或通过与该材料已结合的一外部片配合间接地结合。每个象速元件可包含一个如上所述的准直透镜,以便一切换器阵列可以通过在一基本公共的聚焦面中的成象光束点与一个透镜阵列耦连。(在这种情况下,基本公共意味着在真聚焦面的瑞利(Rayleigh)区域内的上下,由于象差它可能大大地发生了畸变)。如果所述路由选择结构也被用于检测荧光辐射,则在象素元件1362中优选使用一种反射体来取代散射体,该反射体把辐射耦连回其所来自的波导。只要用于某一给定象素的切换器被激励,这种耦和就被维持。如果需要,可在切换到另一象素元件之前将光源切断,以便解决辐射的衰减。
当被作为数据读出器使用时,光传播的方向从图40中所示方向反过来。来自一设备包括数据的光在各象素元件被收集,并被耦连到路由波导结构,该路由波导结构,将其波导向回输入波导1352。被连接到波导1352的是一个用于读取数据的检测器。该检测器经位于波导1352与用于数据媒体照明的光源之间的一个分光镜可被同时连接到该波导。象素元件1366(或只是″象素″)优选经透镜与各数据光点耦连,以收集选定路由通过结构1350的光,并将其送到数据媒体。耦连的透镜还用于收集从该数据媒体反射或发射的光,和将其重聚焦到与该象素元件耦连的波导的一端上。数据可以是在靶体积中,在此种情况下,透镜可被构造成与光束平行,数据可以是在靶面上,在此种情况下,不同的象素元件可以对应着旋转磁光盘数据存储面(例如CD)上的不同轨迹。构造透镜使其以一种衍射受限的方式把来自象素的光重聚焦到数据光点上。通过把不同的象素与不同的轨迹组合,可电子地实现逐轨迹地切换,基本没有时延。When used as a data reader, the direction of light propagation is reversed from that shown in FIG. 40 . Light, including data, from a device is collected at each pixel element and coupled to a routing waveguide structure that directs its wave back to the
不同的象素也可被耦连到数据媒体的不同面上。这对于读取已被记录在该媒体上的多个面中的数据是有用的,以增加整个存储容量。各面之间的切换也可通过在耦连到不同面的象素之间的切换电子地实现。Different pixels may also be coupled to different sides of the data medium. This is useful for reading data that has been recorded in multiple sides on the medium to increase the overall storage capacity. Switching between planes can also be accomplished electronically by switching between pixels coupled to different planes.
此外,几个不同的象素元件可被集中到由(优选正交于)一给定轨迹的轨迹分割横截面之几分之一分开的各位置上。当轨迹偏移时,通过在象素之间切换可电子地实现正跟踪,以取代机械地跟踪。需要一个传感器和电子设备对轨迹偏移进行检测,需要一个控制器用于切换到所需的象素。可以对不同信道中的信号强度或信噪比(SNR)进行检测,以确定优选(对的最准的)信道。如果沿波导1352的转换器被做成4通接头而不是3通接头,第四腿在基片的边沿露出,则检测器阵列1368可以按与该第四腿对准的方式设置。各个检测器1367单独地与各列对准,用于检测来自每一列的返回功率。如果使用检测器1367,为了使来自检测器阵列1368上数据媒体的返回功率最大化,对于沿波导1352设置的光栅的优选反射率是大约50%。如果在路由器结构的上游、波导1352中设置一个单独的分光镜,其优选反射也是50%。In addition, several different pixel elements may be grouped into locations separated by (preferably orthogonal to) fractions of the track division cross-section of a given track. When the track drifts, positive tracking can be achieved electronically by switching between pixels instead of mechanically. A sensor and electronics are needed to detect the track offset and a controller is needed to switch to the desired pixel. The signal strength or signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) in different channels can be detected to determine the preferred (most accurate) channel. If the transducer along the
注意,通过对沿输入波导或象素波导的切换器部分地激活可实现不同象素的部分激活。可通过施加电场的方式对切换元件1364进行调整,以改变它们的反射系数。光束中的一些可通过供另一象素中同时使用的所需部分激活的切换器发送。多象素激活在轨迹偏移校正情况中具有特殊的意义,因为多个检测器也可被构造在路由器1350中。例如,如果路由选择结构1350的三个不同列上的三个不同象素要被同时激活,则它们的相应象素列切换器将需要被部分地激活。所述控制器需要进行计算,以确定合适的多个切换器的激活。忽略切换器的损耗,对于优选SNR,为了在其各自检测器上产生相等的强度,与第一象素列对应的第一切换器应被激活,以反射约3/16的入射光,与第二象素列对应的第二切换器应被激活,以反射约1/4的已通过第一切换器的剩余光,和与第三象素列对应的最后的切换器应被激活,以反射约1/2的已通过前两个切换器的剩余光。假设来自媒体的反射为100%和100%的光收集效率,则大约15%的入射光被反射到每个检测器。与单一象素的情况中单一检测器上接收的光束为优选25%比较,这一结果是相当不错的(优选切换器激活=50%反射率)。确实,采用三个光束比仅用一个光束收集的光要多。电子跟踪将产生更低成本、更快和更可靠的数据读/写设备。Note that partial activation of different pixels can be achieved by partial activation of switches along the input waveguide or pixel waveguide.
可以采用这些方法(电子跟踪切换,电子数据平面切换,和电子跟踪)的任意组合提高数据存储设备的性能。还需要一种方法来实现电子可变聚焦,用于从驱动装置中潜在地除去所有机械的运动(除了媒体的旋转外)。正如下面参考图54所描述的,利用一个波带片透镜通过改变光束1342的波长可以实现电子可变聚焦。Any combination of these methods (electronic tracking switching, electronic data plane switching, and electronic tracking) can be used to improve the performance of the data storage device. There is also a need for a way to achieve electronically variable focus for potentially removing all mechanical motion (other than media rotation) from the drive. As described below with reference to FIG. 54, electronically variable focusing can be achieved by changing the wavelength of
如图所示,图40的路由选择结构是一个偏振结构,90度光栅切换器仅反射TM模式。结果,仅可以使用根据强度的分光方法。能够使用偏振分光器将是非常有利的,因为这将在一给定光强度的信号强度中产生4倍增加的因数。然而,需要切换结构能够转移和然后分离这两种偏振。虽然以一可忽略的充分切线TIR角可实现各TIR切换器的偏振关系,但是在使用很低的角切换几何结构中存在着存储密度损耗。As shown, the routing structure of Figure 40 is a polarized structure, and the 90-degree grating switch only reflects the TM mode. As a result, only intensity-dependent spectroscopic methods can be used. It would be very advantageous to be able to use a polarizing beam splitter as this would produce a factor of 4 increase in signal strength for a given light intensity. However, there is a need for a switching structure capable of shifting and then separating these two polarizations. While the polarization relationship of each TIR switch can be achieved with a negligible substantially tangential TIR angle, there is a storage density penalty in using very low angle switching geometries.
图41示出了一个被设置作为数据读出器1370的与切换器有关的强偏振的线性阵列。所述切换器由被TM偏振和在激励切换器1372中被高反射的光束1342激活使用波导1376和1378(诸如铌酸锂中的钛散射波导)为两种偏振进行波导向。象素元件由与集成透镜1380组合的微型镜面1347实现。数据光点(例如1382)被设置在绕轴1388旋转的盘1386上的轨迹中。从该数据轨迹上的双折射数据光点(或分离符)反射的垂直偏振光被透镜1380收集,重聚焦回到波导1378,并由微型镜面反射回到具有TE偏振的波导向面上。因为TE模两者都以光栅的Brewster角被偏振和具有不同的非相位匹配的用于反射的传输常数,所以它通过切换器传输,不反射回检测器阵列1368的检测器1367。(可替换地,如果该切换器是一个TIR切换器,则TE波的反射率小小于TM波,大部分TE波通过该切换器发送,照射到该检测器上。)如果另一切换器1373被激励而不是切换器1372,光束将传播到不同的象素1375,并根据该象素1375与其微透镜1381的校准被或者聚焦到另一数据轨迹,或者另一数据平面,或者同一轨迹但具有几分之几轨迹宽度的横向偏差(根据该象素1375是否用于轨迹切换,数据平面切换,或跟踪控制)。FIG. 41 shows a linear array of strongly polarized switches associated with a
在参考图40和41描述的结构上的许多变异是显而易见的,诸如可对该路由器中的任何切换器定向,以改变光在该平面这中的传播方向;在一单独设备中可使用多种类型的切换器,以及可附加更高的切换电平。其他变异不胜枚举。Many variations on the structure described with reference to Figures 40 and 41 are evident, such as any switch in the router that can be oriented to change the direction of light propagation in the plane; a variety of type switchers, and higher switching levels can be attached. Other variations abound.
图42示出了一个可切换集成谱分析器930。输入光束进入输入波导932一定距离后停止。输入光束912可在另一波导中转播,或它可以是一个被对准和模匹配的自由空间光束,以使到达波导932的功率优选。设备930被提供有一个用于将转播限制在平面内的平面型波导835。自输入波导的端面射出的光束927在平面型波导内的一个平面中散射,直到其通过集成透镜元件925为止。该集成透镜具有一个相对于该平面波导提高了的折射指数,其中该平面波导处在一限定了自光轴约平方地减小光学厚度的边界内。(若如果它具有一被降低的指数,则光学厚度约平方地增加。)该透镜可通过掩膜衍射或离子交换制造,或者它也可以是一个由电极激励的相反被极化段(reverse poled segment)。FIG. 42 shows a switchable integrated spectrum analyzer 930 . The input beam enters the input waveguide 932 and stops after a certain distance. The
透镜925使光束对准,该光束然后转到三个光栅部分929,931,和933中的至少一个。所述光栅由各个单元(cell)形成,每个单元为一个畴,从背景材料中将这些畴区别开来,并根据应用不同有不同间隔量。所述单元具有不同于基片的不变或可调整折射指数,且不同的单元可以具有不同的畴类型。不变的畴类型例如包括散射区域,离子交换区域,蚀刻区域,粒子辐射区域,和通常通过任何折射指数类型的改进方法形成的区域。所述光栅部分可通过蚀刻,离子交换,或向内扩散形成,在这种情况下,这些光栅是永久性的,但是在本优选实施例中示出的光栅是由极(poled)域形成的。电极932,934,和936连同公共电极938一起被用于分别激励所述光栅。为简便起见,公共电极可被设置在如所示基片的对边,或者围绕电极932,934,和936设置,以用于低电压激励。Lens 925 collimates the light beam, which then goes to at least one of the three grating sections 929 , 931 , and 933 . The grating is formed of individual cells, each of which is a domain, which are distinguished from the background material by varying amounts of spacing depending on the application. The cells have a constant or adjustable index of refraction different from the substrate, and different cells may have different domain types. Invariant domain types include, for example, scattering regions, ion-exchanged regions, etched regions, particle-irradiated regions, and regions generally formed by modification of any refractive index type. The grating portions may be formed by etching, ion exchange, or inward diffusion, in which case these gratings are permanent, but in the preferred embodiment the gratings are shown formed from poled domains . Electrodes 932, 934, and 936, along with common electrode 938, are used to drive the gratings, respectively. For simplicity, common electrodes may be placed on opposite sides of the substrate as shown, or around electrodes 932, 934, and 936 for low voltage excitation.
在个别光栅中的单元可以形式按排,以在所需方向形成所需周期性,以提供具有所需动量的虚光子。它们可以按行排列,以限定某些特定平面,这些平面具有与由行间隔所限定之动量的平面垂直的虚光子动量。此时,沿具有由行中各单元之间隔所限定的动量的平面也将具有拥有动量的虚光子。为了使后向反射相位匹配,虚光子动量正好为入射光子动量的两倍,并且以相反方向被波导向。任何其他反射过程有较小动量,而且被导向横向于入射轴。因而,行间隔的周期Λ部分地与入射波长λ相关,其中Λ为量λ/2neff的分数。在一般情况下,单元可由一距离分布所隔开,而该距离分布随着通过光栅的位置变化,以便使沿任何入射轴的虚光子动量由沿该轴分布的单元的空间频谱(通过富里叶变换确定)所决定。The elements in individual gratings can be arranged in a pattern to create the desired periodicity in the desired direction to provide virtual photons with the desired momentum. They can be arranged in rows to define certain planes with virtual photon momentums perpendicular to the plane of momentum defined by the row spacing. At this point, there will also be virtual photons with momentum along the plane with momentum defined by the spacing between cells in the row. To phase match the backreflection, the virtual photon has exactly twice the momentum of the incident photon and is waveguided in the opposite direction. Any other reflection process has less momentum and is directed transverse to the axis of incidence. Thus, the period Λ of the row spacing is partly related to the incident wavelength λ, where Λ is a fraction of the quantity λ/2n eff . In general, cells can be separated by a distance distribution that varies with position through the grating such that the virtual photon momentum along any axis of incidence is determined by the spatial spectrum of the cells along that axis (via Fourier transformation determined) determined.
通过调整相应电极的电位状态,光栅929,931,或933中至少有一个被接通。在图42中,光栅929被激励。被激励的光栅提供虚光子给入射光子,相位匹配散射过程到一输出方向,以形成具有不同波长的多个输出光束935和937,输出光束根据其波长而在角度上被分开。来自被激励光栅929的输出光束通过透镜939,透镜939将该输出光束重聚焦到一个检测器阵列941上。该检测器是一组传感器,被设置接收输出光束的一部分以用于检测,且优选是如图所示地被粘在装置930的边缘上。然而,若需将装置930集成到一个较大的基片上,该基片在此位置也可不需要有一边缘。此时,可以使用其他抽取光束的方法(诸如垂直折射镜子)以将光束935,937的一部分折射到检测器阵列中。传感装置被大约设置在输出透镜939的聚焦平面的一个瑞利区域内,在此位置,输入光束角可映射到输出光束位置。由于光栅将输入波长映射到输出光束角,准直输入光束导致不同波长在聚焦平面上要被映射到不同位置,而波长的空间分辨率取决于光栅的特性。检测所得功率(为阵列941中检测器位置的函数)与输入光束921的功率频谱有关。因此,装置930是一个谱分析器。若输入光束被分成占据数个不同信道的信道时,它也可以是一个多信道检测器,而该装置被构成将信道分散到预定检测器或一组检测器。At least one of the gratings 929, 931, or 933 is turned on by adjusting the potential state of the corresponding electrode. In Figure 42, the grating 929 is activated. The energized grating provides virtual photons to incident photons that phase match the scattering process to an output direction to form multiple output beams 935 and 937 with different wavelengths, the output beams being angularly separated according to their wavelengths. The output beam from the energized grating 929 passes through a lens 939 which refocuses the output beam onto a detector array 941 . The detector is a set of sensors arranged to receive a portion of the output beam for detection and is preferably glued to the edge of the device 930 as shown. However, if device 930 is to be integrated on a larger substrate, the substrate need not have an edge at this location. At this point, other methods of beam extraction, such as vertically refracting mirrors, can be used to refract a portion of the beam 935, 937 into the detector array. The sensing device is positioned approximately within a Rayleigh region of the focal plane of the output lens 939 where the input beam angle can be mapped to the output beam position. Since the grating maps the input wavelength to the output beam angle, collimating the input beam causes different wavelengths to be mapped to different locations in the focal plane, and the spatial resolution of the wavelengths depends on the properties of the grating. The detected power (as a function of the position of the detectors in the array 941 ) is related to the power spectrum of the input beam 921 . Thus, device 930 is a spectrum analyzer. It may also be a multi-channel detector when the input beam is divided into channels occupying several different channels, and the arrangement is configured to distribute the channels to predetermined detectors or a group of detectors.
通过将不同光栅接通,本装置在不同频率范围作用。例如,如果光栅931或933被激励,则分散光被透镜939聚焦到一不同检测器阵列943或延伸检测器阵列941的不同部分。光栅的频率范围由光栅到光束的角度及光栅的周期性确定。所示的光栅931到光束拥有一较浅角度,以便使其被激励时选定一较高光频率范围。光栅933具有彼此横向的多周期性,以便能够选择多个重叠频率范围。多个频率可被映射到极区边界,如上文参考图18所述。光栅933的极化元件一般可按排在垂直于两主要虚光子动量方向的平面上。平面的定相是由将所需光栅分量频率抄录到畴边界的过程来决定。然而,一般光栅可在所有方向有动量分量,在此种情况下,造成的畴边界不会组织到平面内,除可能在一主要方向上外。By switching different gratings, the device acts in different frequency ranges. For example, if grating 931 or 933 is activated, the scattered light is focused by lens 939 to a different detector array 943 or to a different portion of extended detector array 941 . The frequency range of the grating is determined by the angle of the grating to the beam and the periodicity of the grating. The grating 931 is shown having a shallower angle to the light beam so that it is excited to select a higher optical frequency range. The gratings 933 have multiple periodicities transverse to each other to enable selection of multiple overlapping frequency ranges. Multiple frequencies may be mapped to polar region boundaries, as described above with reference to FIG. 18 . The polarizing elements of the grating 933 can generally be arranged on a plane perpendicular to the two main virtual photon momentum directions. The phasing of the plane is determined by the process of transcribing the desired grating component frequencies to the domain boundaries. In general, however, gratings can have momentum components in all directions, in which case the resulting domain boundaries will not organize into the plane, except perhaps in one dominant direction.
一透射光913被集成透镜907再聚焦到一输出波导段909,以形成输出光束911,其包括并未与光栅交互作用的输入光束921的带外部分的至少一部分。A transmitted light 913 is refocused by an integrated lens 907 to an output waveguide section 909 to form an output beam 911 that includes at least a portion of the out-of-band portion of the input beam 921 that did not interact with the grating.
已切换范围频谱分析器的一项有用变化与图42和30-35的元件组合,其基本概念源于这样一个事实,即光栅的频谱范围可通过改变其角度或等效于该源点而被位移。在此变化中,其使用一波导路由选择结构以允许该源点被切换。波导切换器被设置在输入波导923(而且可能在发射波导)上的一个或多个位置以产生一平行源波导阵列,输入光束921可在其中切换。所有波导都在同一平面上终止,优选是在输入透镜925的聚焦面上。频谱分析器的其余部分保持不变,虽然具有多个输入,但其不必要有额外光栅931和933。多个已切换波导的分隔根据应用而作调整,以达到分析器930所需的可切换频谱范围。A useful variation of the switched-range spectrum analyzer is combined with the elements of Figures 42 and 30-35, the basic concept of which stems from the fact that the spectral range of a grating can be changed by changing its angle or equivalent to the source point displacement. In this variation, a waveguide routing structure is used to allow the source to be switched. Waveguide switchers are placed at one or more locations on the input waveguide 923 (and possibly the launch waveguide) to create an array of parallel source waveguides in which the input beam 921 can be switched. All waveguides terminate in the same plane, preferably at the focal plane of the input lens 925 . The rest of the spectrum analyzer remains the same, although it has multiple inputs, it does not necessarily have the additional gratings 931 and 933 . The separation of the multiple switched waveguides is adjusted according to the application to achieve the desired switchable spectral range of the analyzer 930 .
图43示出了一种被极化的声波多层干涉结构953。入射声波972可以是一主体或表面声波。被极化结构被制造在一压电基片965的区域955中,其包括两种形态的畴963和964。众所周知,极性反转造成部分声波反射(例如米勒等人的美国专利4,410,823)。到光束973的反射以及到光束961的透射被极区之间的界面的间隔所影响。若需要高反射和低透射,相邻界面间隔应等于1/2声波长的整数倍。若需要高透射且低反射地穿过一结构,该间隔应等于1/4声波长加1/2声波波长的整数倍。通过在一其中声阻抗改变的界面附近提供适当数目的极区,可制造不反射(AR)结构,假设反射波的相位被选定成与从该界面来的反射波相位不同但幅度相同。Figure 43 shows a polarized acoustic
图44示出了一种被极化的主体声波换能器971。一入射声束972入射在包含一对电极974、975的压电性基片965的极区。该极区包括优选为相反的两种畴963和964。通过每1/2声波长反向极化方向,由声波在每一极区所感应的电场可被选为相同。此时,可使用单电极来拾取感应电压而非现有技术的叉指式电极。使用电极974和975来检测输入波972的存在。输出电压(由导体979引出并可见于电控器978)随正弦变化(对于一窄频带而言)而且是时间和与该声波之振幅相关的振幅的函数。如上所述,若被极化的界面间隔为1/2波长,结构也做为一高反射器,在一给定实施中也许不需要。这一特征可通过在图44中所示波长的1/4和1/3处交替地间隔界面消除。此时,该结构为一不反射涂层,以消除不需要的反射。由于几乎整个声波穿入被极化的结构,其能量在该处可几乎完全被吸入检测电子设备,所述结构971为一个有效的声能调谐检测器。该结构的带宽反比于声波周期数目,其落在由电极覆盖的被极化的结构内。其效率与在电极之下的声路径长度有关。因此,带宽与检测器的效率有关,而且可通过改变检测器的尺寸而进行调整。Figure 44 shows a bulk acoustic wave transducer 971 that is polarized. An incident
结构971可做为一个发声器,其主要是运行相反的过程。以要被激励的声波之频率在两电极之间提供一个与时间有关的电信号。基片的压电系数在声波频率下产生一周期性张力且产生一对声波,其中一个961在前进方向传输,另一个973贼在相反方向传输。若需仅产生一个波,可通过将装置953和971合并制造一个高效单向发生器,而装置953可被做成用于不需要的波的全反射器。如果该全反射器是与不需要的波夹90度角被定向,且被反射波相位选定成与所需声波同相,则这两个波将出现在同一方向上,如同一个单一波。Structure 971 acts as a sound generator, which basically runs the reverse process. A time-dependent electrical signal is provided between the two electrodes at the frequency of the acoustic wave to be excited. The piezoelectric coefficients of the substrate create a periodic tension at the acoustic frequency and generate a pair of acoustic waves, one 961 traveling in the forward direction and the other 973 traveling in the opposite direction. If it is desired to generate only one wave, an efficient unidirectional generator can be made by combining
图44中的结构的一个变化是应变启动式光交互作用装置。在此装置中,极取964和963由一应变场所激励,通过光弹性效应产生折射率的改变。现在,结构975为一个应变感应衰减器,其可在温度上升下被沉积到基片965上,以便使薄膜和基片的不同热膨胀系数在室温下产生一应变场。该机械式应变场经光弹伸张器作用后,在基片中从畴到畴改变的折射率变化,再度产生具有成型折射率的基片,其也可以用于本文所述的其他场合。如果电极的沉积过程并不影响所需应变场,使用电-光效应的电场可与光弹效应合并。A variation on the structure in Figure 44 is a strain-activated light interaction device. In this device,
图45的结构890为一对光波用的调谐相干检波器。其调谐方式使其仅能检测在一特定带宽(大约所需中央″共振″频率差)中的光波之间的频差。在最简单的情况下,该装置被构造成在叉指式电极885和886之间有相等的间隔,其形成具有周期为Λ的周期性结构。在一给定瞬间,出现在输入光束887中的两个输入频率在波导888中产生一电场的干涉图形,其空间周期取决于光频率差及基片889在光频的折射率。在一频差下,(此时干涉图形的空间周期等于周期Λ)电极结构是处于谐振状态,而且由于在波导顶部的感应位移电荷,电极将被激励到一电位差。The structure 890 of Figure 45 is a tuned coherent detector for a pair of light waves. It is tuned in such a way that it can only detect frequency differences between light waves within a certain bandwidth (approximately the desired central "resonance" frequency difference). In the simplest case, the device is constructed with equal spacing between the interdigitated electrodes 885 and 886, which form a periodic structure with a period Λ. At a given instant, the two input frequencies present in the input beam 887 produce an interference pattern of electric fields in the waveguide 888, the spatial period of which depends on the difference in optical frequencies and the refractive index of the substrate 889 at the optical frequency. At a frequency difference (where the spatial period of the interference pattern is equal to the period Λ) the electrode structure is in resonance, and due to the induced displacement charge at the top of the waveguide, the electrodes will be excited to a potential difference.
频率响应特性是与一正弦平方函数有关,而其谐振频率由光频差确定,两光波在该处的被极化的光栅周期中的相移为2π。当电极结构被制定后,需要缓冲层891来降低传输光波的损耗。若其厚度远小于周期Λ,在此实质上不能降低感应电位强度。干涉图形有一低频分量,其以两光波之间的频率差振动。因此,由电控器978经由波导线979拾取的电子信号也是在该频差下振动。电子信号的幅度在谐振频差下很大,且根据装置带宽而降到其他频差,其与叉指式电极结构中的脉动周期数目的倒数有关。The frequency response characteristic is related to a sinusoidal square function, and its resonance frequency is determined by the optical frequency difference, and the phase shift of the two optical waves in the polarized grating period is 2π. After the electrode structure is formulated, the buffer layer 891 is needed to reduce the loss of transmitted light waves. If its thickness is much smaller than the period Λ, the induced potential intensity cannot be reduced substantially. The interference pattern has a low frequency component that vibrates at the frequency difference between the two light waves. Therefore, the electronic signal picked up by the electronic controller 978 via the waveguide 979 also vibrates at this frequency difference. The amplitude of the electronic signal is large at the resonance frequency difference and drops to other frequency differences depending on the device bandwidth, which is related to the inverse of the number of pulsation cycles in the interdigitated electrode structure.
叉指式电极也可以构造成具有多频分量,以便具有数个谐振频率,或以便对响应带宽进行修改。请注意此装置也可对多阶敏感。如果与1/2周期比较该电极是窄小的话,在谐振差频的奇次谐波处将具有明显响应。通过将指针彼此相对移动而使沿波导轴具有不对称性,可以产生对偶次谐波的响应。较高阶响应仅可在降低第一阶响应下改进,这可通过将电极彼此相对置于中心和增加其带宽而使其最小化,最后,波导888并不是严格地必须。它可以被省略,但被检测波应该被带到很靠近电极之处,以使信号拾取优选化。Interdigitated electrodes can also be configured with multi-frequency components, in order to have several resonant frequencies, or to modify the response bandwidth. Note that this device can also be multi-order sensitive. If the electrode is narrow compared to 1/2 period, there will be a significant response at odd harmonics of the resonant difference frequency. Responses to even harmonics can be generated by having asymmetry along the waveguide axis by moving the fingers relative to each other. Higher order responses can only be improved by reducing the first order response, which can be minimized by centering the electrodes relative to each other and increasing their bandwidth. Finally, the waveguide 888 is not strictly necessary. It can be omitted, but the detected wave should be brought very close to the electrodes to optimize signal pickup.
图46示出了一个低损耗切换式波导分离器780,该装置有一永久Y型波导分离器774,其由一输入波导段构成,该输入波导段加宽进入一Y型接点且分支到两个输出波导段775和776,775和776可做为入射在输入段的光的路径。输入和输出段的宽度及指标优选相等。分离器780也有一被极化的结构778,其电-光系数位于Y形分离器774的区域内。极区778可为在基片顶端附近的一薄层,其可有多层,或可延伸通过整个基片。基片的其他部分可为被极化的或非极化的。一对平面电极777,779彼此靠近地设置在波导上方,其中一电极777覆盖一输出波导775的一部分,而另一电极779则覆盖另一输出波导776的一部分。电极为平面状,以使制造便利及行使功能:若其设置表面为平坦或弯曲,它们一致。电极777的边缘781在很浅角在跨过波导775,且在Y形接头处形成波导776的平滑连续内缘。同样地,电极779的边缘783以很浅角度跨过波导776,且在Y形接头处形成波导775的平滑连续内缘。当电极彼此相对被激励而有一极性时,在电极777下方的折射率降低,而在电极779下方的折射率增加。结果,在电极边缘781下方的一个激励区形成一波导边界,将输入光束789几乎完全转入输出光束784,只有很少的功率漏入另一输出光束782。电极779下方所增加的折射率有助于将光能导离边界781。当在电极之间施加相反电极时,输入光束几乎完全转入其他输出光束782。若没有施加电压,假使结构对称,则输入功率被均匀分到两个输出端口。因此,此结构为3dB分离器,其可被电气切换为一光束波导在低损耗下进入其中一方向。Figure 46 shows a low-loss switched waveguide splitter 780, the device has a permanent Y-shaped
电极777,779在结构输入处呈锥状远离Y形结构774,以形成朝向波导的渐进低折射区,使光损最小。静电场分布的平滑作用在两电极下方产生很平滑的折射过渡折射率。跨越输出波导远离Y分支区域的电极优选与波导夹90度角以降低损耗。The electrodes 777, 779 taper away from the Y-shaped
Y形分离器可按排成不对称方式,在电场关闭时产生与3dB不同的分离比,这可通过增加其中之一波导的偏移角和/或降低另一波导的偏移角而完成。该切换功能操作几乎如同有一不对称结构和一对称结构,假设有足够大的电场施加到电极上。虽然有很大的不对称性,吸光比率(接通波导中的功率与断开波导中的功率之间的比率)可维持很大。然而,在不对称切换式波导分离器的两个腿处,光损将稍不同。因此,装置780可构造成具有任何所需分离比率的分离器,而且可在良好效率及高吸光比率下被切换。The Y-splitters can be arranged in an asymmetric manner to produce a split ratio different than 3dB when the electric field is turned off. This can be done by increasing the offset angle of one of the waveguides and/or decreasing the offset angle of the other waveguide. The switching function operates almost as if there is an asymmetric structure and a symmetric structure, assuming a sufficiently large electric field is applied to the electrodes. Despite the large asymmetry, the extinction ratio (the ratio between the power in the on waveguide and the power in the off waveguide) can be maintained very large. However, the optical loss will be slightly different at the two legs of the asymmetric switched waveguide splitter. Thus, device 780 can be configured as a splitter with any desired split ratio, and can be switched with good efficiency and high absorbance ratio.
此装置可级联以允许两个以上输出波导之间的切换。例如,若输出波导775被连接到的一类似780的第二装置的输入端,其功率可被动或主动地被切入额外的一对波导。可以用类似于780的四组切换器(分别为1,2,4和8个)来完成十六条已切换输出线路。这些线路之间的功率分配比在未切换状态下相等,或为任何其他功率分配比。当这些切换器被激励时,可将一单一输出波导接通,一单一输出波导可被切断,或是任何输出波导组合可被接通和切断。This device can be cascaded to allow switching between more than two output waveguides. For example, if the
光在装置中的传播方向可反向,此时在输出端口775和776中任一个上面的输入可被切换以从输入端口出现。若无施加电压,在每一输出端口的功率被耦连到输入端口且有一衰耗(在对称装置的情况下为3dB)。当电场被接通时,处在″接通″波导中的功率在很低损耗下被连到输入端口,同时,处在″切断″波导中的功率很有效地从输入波导衍射离开。所述″切断″波导与该输入端口基本上隔开。The direction of light propagation in the device can be reversed, at which point the input on either of the
或者,一镜象装置可背对背地与切换器连接,使输入波导结合在一起,形成一个2×2切换器或路由器。在任一对波导端口上的输入可切换到其他对端口的任一波导。同样地,可以进行级联,以产生一n×n切换器/路由器。Alternatively, a mirror device can be connected back-to-back to the switch so that the input waveguides are joined together to form a 2x2 switch or router. Inputs on any pair of waveguide ports can be switched to any waveguide of the other pair of ports. Likewise, cascading can be done to create an nxn switch/router.
图47示出了使用多极区的切换式波导分离器的替换实施例790。在此结构中,沿在Y形区域中各波导之边界的已切换折射率差被加强,从而更佳地将光模限制到一更窄区,且使进入被切断输出波导的残余耦连降低。沿Y形分离区的输入波导774的每一侧有两个极区785和786,该极区之边界787,788已浅角跨过输出波导775和776,且在Y形接头处形成波导776,775的平滑连续内缘。极区的边界慢慢地从输入波导处变细以允许电气激励折射率变化的缓慢启动,且它们在远离Y形接头(电场在此处实质上降低)处跨越输出波导以降低光损。电极791,792实质上设置在极区785,786上方。Figure 47 shows an
一电位差被施加到电极上,以激励一电场,其为静电形式且穿过电极之间和围绕电极的空间。该电场穿透极区及周围区域,引起光相应形式的折射率变化。该局部光折射率变化与局部电场方向及局部电-光系数的积有关。极区优选是由有相反极性的区所围绕,此时其电-光系数的符号与周围区域相反。在介面787和788处有尖锐的折射率变化,在波导其中的一侧,折射率在介面处降低,以产生远离低折射率区的波导向趋势。对波导的另一侧而言则相反。若施加的电场足够大,则具有降低折射率的介面形成波导边界。由于波导引介面平滑连接如同从极区跨越的输出波导内侧边界的延伸,因而输入光束被波导入该输出波导。如果波导引边界的曲率为渐进的,则进入″切断″波导的光漏很低。在输入处的损耗很低,这是因为极区缓慢地接近波导。在Y形接头处的损耗很低,这是因为延伸到接合区之外的极区一部分降低了″切断″输出波导的的波导引效应,且加强了″接通″输出波导的波导引。A potential difference is applied across the electrodes to excite an electric field, electrostatic in form, across the space between and around the electrodes. This electric field penetrates the pole region and the surrounding area, causing a light-responsive form of refractive index change. The local optical refractive index change is related to the product of the local electric field direction and the local electro-optical coefficient. The polar region is preferably surrounded by regions of opposite polarity, in which case the sign of the electro-optic coefficient is opposite to that of the surrounding region. There is a sharp index change at
做为一种替换,极区可由未被极化材料所围绕,在此,在介面787,788处仍有突然的折射率变化,使本装置作用,但当极区是由相反极化材料所围绕时,其折射率仅为所得之值的一半,使施加电场必须更高。以前所述的各种改变也可应用于本装置。As an alternative, the polar region can be surrounded by unpolarized material, where there is still a sudden change in the refractive index at the
图48示出了一个1×3切换器的主要设计元件,在此所示的设计元件显示如何将图46的装置780转变为有一单一极区和成型电极的1×3切换器。此装置包括一永久分支波导,它具有所需的分支数目n(n=3)。该波导通过一极区,此极区延伸到比波导更深处(用于良好吸光比率)而且明显地到接合区之外,波导在该处是由大间隔隔开(例如其宽度的三倍)。数个区域是由波导边界限定,通过其平滑地延伸回到输入波导边界内,以及通过其明显地在接合区外一距离处跨越输出波导的正常边界。在此有(n2+2n-2)/2个如此限定的区。使最外面的一区延伸到最外侧波导外之外是有用的,以使输入变细。在每一区上方设有分开的电极,在所有电极之间有一小间隙,但该间隙足以防止激励时的电气断损。Figure 48 shows the main design elements of a 1x3 switch, the design elements shown here show how the device 780 of Figure 46 can be transformed into a 1x3 switch with a single polar region and shaped electrodes. The device consists of a permanently branched waveguide with the desired number of branches n (n=3). The waveguide passes through a polar region that extends deeper than the waveguides (for good light absorption ratio) and well beyond the junction region where the waveguides are separated by a large space (e.g. three times their width) . Several regions are defined by the waveguide boundaries, by which they extend smoothly back into the input waveguide boundaries, and by which they span the normal boundaries of the output waveguides at a distance outside the junction. There are (n 2 +2n-2)/2 regions defined in this way. It is useful to have the outermost region extend beyond the outermost waveguide in order to taper the input. Separate electrodes are provided over each zone, with a small gap between all electrodes, but sufficient to prevent electrical breakage during actuation.
为操作本装置,电场被独立地施加到各区而其极性取决于相关区是否限制在所需波导内。例如,在图48中的5个区则根据表I被激励。如前所述,电场大小被调整,以沿着以不同极性被激励的相邻区的边界产生一良好的波导引边界。To operate the device, an electric field is applied to each region independently with a polarity depending on whether the region concerned is confined within the desired waveguide. For example, the five fields in Figure 48 are activated according to Table I. As before, the magnitude of the electric field is adjusted to produce a good waveguide boundary along the boundary of adjacent regions excited with different polarities.
表ITable I
或者,图48的设计元件也示出了如何将图47中装置转变成具有多极区的1×3切换器,此装置包含一永久分支波导,其具有所需的分支数目n(n=3)。数个区域是由波导边界限定,通过其平滑地延伸回到输入波导边界内,以及通过其明显地在接合区外一距离处跨越输出波导的正常边界。使最外面的一区延伸到最外侧波导外之外是有用的,以使输入变细。每一区以与具有公共边界的相邻区相反方向被极化。有相同极化方向的区域可共用至多一个顶点。输入波导区优选是相反于最内侧之区(即最靠近输入波导的区)被极化。在图48中,最内侧的区被标为区2和区4,以区为基础的极性的选择程序造成只有区和4反向地被极化,同时区1,3,5(其为输出波导区)被正向极化(与周围区方向相同,如果周围区被极化)。若使用4个输出波导,则有9个区,其中6反向极化,包括所有的输出波导区。因此,偶数个输出波导的分离器有一些优点,因为只有偶数分离器的输出波导区极化相反于一电压基片极化,其优点为在最终分割点有增加限制而且有较高透射以用于″接通状态,而且在″切断″状态有较佳的反向隔绝。在每一区上方设有分开的电极。Alternatively, the design elements of Fig. 48 also show how the device in Fig. 47 can be transformed into a 1 × 3 switch with multiple poles, the device comprising a permanently branched waveguide with the required number of branches n (n=3 ). Several regions are defined by the waveguide boundaries, by which they extend smoothly back into the input waveguide boundaries, and by which they span the normal boundaries of the output waveguides at a distance outside the junction. It is useful to have the outermost region extend beyond the outermost waveguide in order to taper the input. Each zone is polarized in the opposite direction to adjacent zones that share a common boundary. Regions with the same polarization direction can share at most one vertex. The input waveguide region is preferably polarized opposite to the innermost region (ie the region closest to the input waveguide). In Figure 48, the innermost zones are labeled
为操作此装置,电场被独立地施加到各区而其极性现为相反。极性是由以下两因素决定:相关区是否限制在所需波导内,以及下方极区的极性。例如,若施加一正极性到一正极化区产生折射率的增加,则其选择规则为:若一区正向极化,其电子激励极性选定为正(若该区是在所需波导内)或负(若该区在外面);若一区反向极化(负),其极性选定为负(若该区是在所需波导内)或正(若该区在外面)。表II中所示为区的优选极化方向,此时n=3且其三个输出端口如图48所示。1×n及n×n切换器的设计可从关于图46,47和48的描述中得出。To operate the device, an electric field is applied to each region independently and its polarity is reversed. Polarity is determined by two factors: whether the region of interest is confined within the desired waveguide, and the polarity of the underlying polar region. For example, if applying a positive polarity to a positively polarized region produces an increase in the refractive index, the selection rule is: if a region is positively polarized, its electronic excitation polarity is selected to be positive (if the region is in the desired waveguide inside) or negative (if the region is outside); if a region is reversely polarized (negative), its polarity is chosen to be negative (if the region is inside the desired waveguide) or positive (if the region is outside) . Table II shows the preferred polarization direction of the zone when n=3 and its three output ports are shown in FIG. 48 . The design of 1xn and nxn switches can be derived from the description with respect to FIGS. 46 , 47 and 48 .
表IITable II
在此描述的平面组成元件可以被叠层成包括电-光控制的设备与波导组件的多层三维结构。通过交替铺设或设置电-光活性的可极化薄膜(优选是聚合物)与缓冲隔离层(可以是介电材料或导电材料),以制造上述平面波导与切换器的三维构造。叠层的结构的优点包括由被隔的更远的波导元件所造成的串话隔离。叠层的结构还可达成更高的功率处理能力,因为更多的光功率可被分配在各层之中。如果希望在显示设备中分配独立的波导,也可使用独立层。The planar constituent elements described herein can be stacked into multilayer three-dimensional structures including electro-optic controlled devices and waveguide assemblies. The three-dimensional structure of the above-mentioned planar waveguide and switch is manufactured by alternately laying or disposing electro-optical active polarizable films (preferably polymers) and buffer isolation layers (which may be dielectric materials or conductive materials). Advantages of the laminated structure include crosstalk isolation caused by further spaced waveguide elements. The stacked structure can also achieve higher power handling capability because more optical power can be distributed among the layers. Independent layers can also be used if it is desired to allocate independent waveguides in the display device.
一旦被放在一适当的基片上,使用以上所述的技术即可完成上述活性光波导/切换层的极化。为了使一活性层与其他的活性层隔离,具有低指数的缓冲层是必须的,且被设计在与上述平面垂直的方向中建立所需的引导。例如,可使用二氧化硅的缓冲层。接着的是一接地平面和一厚缓冲层,可利用一金属层制造该接地平面,因为它与上述光学活性层隔离。上述缓冲层还必须能承受施加在上述不同电极层与接地平面之间的电压。在聚合物之中,一个大的区域可被极化,且通过如上所述的UV去辐射技术,所需区域被选择性地去极化,以产生波导特性,即使在一透光缓冲层(例如二氧化硅已被铺设)以后。或者,可以电的方式来执行极化。以聚合物而言,利用UV去辐射对一层进行的去极化将不影响在其后的一层,这是因为上述垫在下面的金属接地平面所提供的屏蔽。然后利用标准掩膜和涂敷技术来设下金属的电极与导电路径,接着是另一介电缓冲层与下一活性层。上述缓冲层应被平面化以使在接下来的活性光波导/切换层之中的损失减到最少。只要给定装置需要,上述添加层的过程可被重复。Once placed on a suitable substrate, the polarization of the active optical waveguide/switching layer can be accomplished using the techniques described above. In order to isolate one active layer from other active layers, a buffer layer with a low index is necessary and designed to create the required guidance in a direction perpendicular to the above-mentioned plane. For example, a buffer layer of silicon dioxide may be used. This is followed by a ground plane and a thick buffer layer, which can be made with a metal layer since it is isolated from the above optically active layer. The above-mentioned buffer layer must also be able to withstand the voltage applied between the above-mentioned different electrode layers and the ground plane. In polymers, a large area can be polarized, and by UV de-radiation techniques as described above, the desired area is selectively depolarized to produce waveguide properties, even in a light-transmitting buffer layer ( For example after silica has been laid). Alternatively, polarization may be performed electrically. In the case of polymers, depolarization of one layer with UV de-radiation will not affect the layer following it because of the shielding provided by the underlying metal ground plane mentioned above. Standard masking and coating techniques are then used to lay down metal electrodes and conductive paths, followed by another dielectric buffer layer and the next active layer. The aforementioned buffer layer should be planarized to minimize losses in the following active optical waveguide/switching layer. The above-described process of adding layers can be repeated for as long as required by a given device.
为上述被极化装置叠层制造活性路径和电极所用制造技术的一种变异是在上述电-光层涂上一绝缘层,随后杂质被掺杂或注入到绝缘层,以利用标准摄影蚀刻掩膜技术在上述缓冲层内产生电导性图形。把上述电极并入上述缓冲层可使叠层在一起的装置的厚度减到最小。A variation of the fabrication technique used to fabricate the active pathways and electrodes for the polarized device stack described above is to coat the electro-optic layer with an insulating layer, and then dope or implant impurities into the insulating layer to allow the use of standard photoetching masks. Membrane technology creates a conductive pattern within the aforementioned buffer layer. Incorporating the above-mentioned electrodes into the above-mentioned buffer layer can minimize the thickness of the stacked devices.
由不同电-光活性材料组成的被混合的装置被用来改进制造复杂性。例如,包含波导器件的第一电-光活性层可被制作在一铌酸锂基片中,其还可用于支撑基片。接着为上述铌酸锂器件提供一缓冲层与电极层。随后,把夹住一导电平面的两绝缘缓冲层涂敷在所述器件上,随后设置下一活性层,该活性层可以是一种可极化的聚合物。接下来的若干层如上所述地被建立,被极化和被构制图形。在缓冲层之间的导电平面可作为电极以允许每一聚合物层的区域极化,且可使之前的若干层不受极化过程的影响。Hybrid devices composed of different electro-optically active materials are used to improve fabrication complexity. For example, the first electro-optical active layer comprising the waveguide device can be fabricated in a lithium niobate substrate, which also serves as a support substrate. Next, a buffer layer and an electrode layer are provided for the lithium niobate device. Subsequently, two insulating buffer layers sandwiching a conductive plane are applied to the device, followed by the next active layer, which may be a polarizable polymer. The next several layers are built, polarized and patterned as described above. The conductive planes between the buffer layers can act as electrodes to allow the area polarization of each polymer layer and can make the previous layers unaffected by the polarization process.
例如,叠层波导阵列可当做供自由空间光束操控用的转向设备。被电子激励和可个别寻址的波导元件被紧紧地层叠在一起并与一源阵列对齐以形成可控制的定相阵列以发射光辐射。如前所述,可通过改变在被极化区域上的电压对上述光束的相对相位进行调整。通过以线性等变率调整这些相位,从波导阵列发射的光可在上阵列的平面内快速被扫过。因而,在一平面上的器件的线性阵列可仅在该平面内扫描。然而,当被极化波导阵列平面被垂直地集成到一三维整体器件中时,自该器件发射出的光束可被引导在二维中。For example, stacked waveguide arrays can be used as steering devices for free-space beam steering. Electronically activated and individually addressable waveguide elements are tightly stacked together and aligned with an array of sources to form a controllable phased array to emit optical radiation. As previously mentioned, the relative phase of the beams can be adjusted by varying the voltage across the polarized regions. By adjusting these phases with linear scaling, the light emitted from the waveguide array can be swept rapidly in the plane of the upper array. Thus, a linear array of devices on a plane can only be scanned within that plane. However, when the polarized waveguide array plane is vertically integrated into a three-dimensional monolithic device, the beam emitted from the device can be directed in two dimensions.
这种概念的一种延伸是使用一叠层波导光栅反射器所进行的对多模激光器棒阵列的模式控制。上述波导叠层被空间地吻合以对接一激光器二极管阵列。通过控制上述各元件的相位,多元件激光器棒的发射模形式可以被控制。例如,在不需要对单模波导限制的设备中,多模或整个阵列可被层叠在一起,以增加被切换的被极化设备的功率处理能力。An extension of this concept is the use of a laminated waveguide grating reflector for mode control of an array of multimode laser bars. The waveguide stacks are spatially aligned to interface with a laser diode array. By controlling the phase of each of the elements described above, the emission mode form of a multi-element laser rod can be controlled. For example, in devices that do not require confinement to single-mode waveguides, multiple modes or entire arrays can be layered together to increase the power handling capability of switched polarized devices.
图49示出了定相阵列波导叠层部分1630的一个实施例,为清楚起见,仅示出了波导的一个单列。光学辐射1640透过若干波导1638进入叠层1630,上述波导1638被做在电-光活性薄膜1650(诸如可极化的聚合物)中。在此,示出的输入光束1640被间隔,以表示相同的波长但有不同相位的光束。光沿着波导1638传输,在其中它们遭遇被极化的区域1634,在该区域内利用在此所描述的技术,折射率可被电子地修改。光束1642表示在每一光波的相位单独地被调整以产生输出成分光束(其相位被对齐)以后的定相阵列的输出。Figure 49 shows an embodiment of a phased array
许多其他输入和输出波情况是可能。例如,具有平相位波前的单模激光束可照明波导元件区,其随后施加任意的相位延迟跨过激光束的空间模式,由此允许该光束在自由空间中被电子地操纵。利用该方法的定向光束控制装置将比当前机械的或A-O装置更快速和更小型化。利用在此描述或本领域公知的光-电拾取装置可检测所述叠层器件内或外的相位差或多频成分的存在,以便为一反馈环提供瞬时信息。Many other input and output wave situations are possible. For example, a single-mode laser beam with a flat phase wavefront can illuminate a waveguide element region, which then imposes an arbitrary phase delay across the spatial mode of the laser beam, thereby allowing the beam to be electronically manipulated in free space. Directional beam steering devices utilizing this method will be faster and more compact than current mechanical or A-O devices. The presence of phase differences or multi-frequency components within or outside the stack can be detected using opto-electrical pickup devices described herein or known in the art to provide instantaneous information for a feedback loop.
以后述方式,通过交替地设置电极,缓冲层,和可极化材料,在这里表示的器件段1630被做在基片1632(例如二氧化硅)上。沉积一个宽面积平面电极1654(由不透明金属膜或透明的导电性材料制成,例如铟锡氧化物),随后为一电绝缘缓冲层1652(例如二氧化硅),该电绝缘缓冲层1652还做为构造在下层可极化材料1650中波导1638的边界层。在该可极化材料层1650的上部,另一缓冲层1652被添加其上以形成上波导边界,随后施加用于激励被极化结构的成形电极1636。另一缓冲层1652随后被添加,这次是使该成形电极与下一层-另一宽面积平面电极1654电绝缘。成形电极1636仅通过一厚缓冲层与一平面电极隔开,并通过缓冲层与可极化材料与其他平面电极隔开。因为需要跨越可极化材料施加电场,所以跨越可极化材料的电隔离应该小于仅跨越缓冲层的隔离。两宽面积平面电极之间的分层顺序被重复,直到最后一层可极化材料1650为止,之后,仅需要添加缓冲层1652,成形电极1636和光学的最终绝缘层1652以完成上述叠层。通过本领域公知的集成和接合技术电引线1646与1648分别接触电极1636与1654,且连接到电压分布控制单元1644。The
电压控制单元1644具有双重目的:分别激励上述被极化器件,和使它们与用来控制相邻激励元件层的电场隔离。实质上,电压控制单元1644可以是一些耦连浮动电源的集合,其中夹住一活性层的电极1636与1654之间的电压可被控制,而无需改变任何其他活性层两端的电压差。The
区域1634表示一个具有一个或多个畴的被极化区域,电极1636表示一个未被打破的或被分段的或已绘制图形区域,其具有一个或多个绝缘元件。波导叠层1630被描述成用于相位控制的设备,但波导叠层结构可以包括在此描述的被极化器件(光学上串联或以其他方式构造)之组合的任意多个。
图50示出了一个现有技术的可调衰减器1400。一输入波导1402横切于基片1404的一电-光活性区域。输入光束1406沿该输入波导传播进入一输出波导1408,形成输出光束1410。电极1412,1414和1416被设置在该波导之上,以便当电极1414在相对于电极1412与1416的一给定极性(正或负)被激励时,由于电-光效应,在上述波导区域段1418内、在上述电极之下和靠近该电极之处具有一折射率改变。该电极结构是任意的并可以是不同的且可比图50所示现有技术的结构更复杂,但全部图形的共同因素是当它们被激励到一电压时,它们将降低在核心的折射率并增加周围区域的折射率。Figure 50 shows a prior art adjustable attenuator 1400. An
当施加的电场不存在时,上述波导段的损耗是低的,其主要通过由沿所述波导壁的粗糙度引起的散射来确定。然而,当电场被施加时,上述损耗可被增加到一个非常大的值。三电极图允许当一正折射率改变发生在该波导之外的同时,一负折射率改变发生在该波导之中,显著地使折射率分布变平和变宽。当电场被提供时,在所述电极之下的波导1418的被修改部分从该波导的输入1402和输出1408具有很宽的最低阶模式分布。结果,当输入光束1416传入部分1418时和当部分1418中的光耦连回到输出波导1408时,模式耦连损耗都会发生。若折射率改变足够大,该最低阶模式降到截止以下,从波导1402的端面发出的光几乎自由地绕射到基片上,在波导1408的开始造成大的耦连损耗。In the absence of an applied electric field, the losses of the above-mentioned waveguide segments are low, mainly determined by scattering caused by roughness along the waveguide walls. However, the above losses can be increased to a very large value when an electric field is applied. A three-electrode pattern allows a negative index change to occur within the waveguide while a positive index change occurs outside the waveguide, significantly flattening and broadening the index profile. The modified portion of the
当一给定模式进入所述波导的被修改部分1418时,该被修改段的折射率分布的改变减小了在其强度分布和所述修改部分1418的任何模式分布之间的重叠。如果段1418是多模的,几种传输模式与辐射模式将被激励。若段1418是单模的,则多种模式将被激励。这些模式的结合然后被传播到该段1418的远端,并耦连到输出波导部分1408,在此,仅所述光的一小部分回到所述波导的一种模式中以形成输出光束1410。通过控制施加到所述电极的电压,可把在设备1400中的损耗从非常低调整成非常高。When a given mode enters the modified
可被获得的最大损耗依赖于所述折射率改变的大小,被激励区域的尺寸,它们的长度,以及取决于该输入和输出波导是否为单模还是多模的。在其几何形状的一种变异中,在波导段1418上仅可能设置两个电极,从而减少该波导段中的折射率和使折射率增加到一侧而非两侧。其功能是再次做为一个衰减器,但被拒绝的辐射场将倾向于离开所述设备而向着所述被增加折射率的一侧。这种引导被损失的辐射的能力在希望对被拒绝光进行控制的一些系统中是有优点的。一个吸收器还可被安放在段1418的下游(在一侧或两侧),以防止被拒绝光在系统中其他地方干扰其他功能。The maximum loss that can be achieved depends on the magnitude of the refractive index change, the size of the excited regions, their length, and on whether the input and output waveguides are single-mode or multi-mode. In a variation of its geometry, it is only possible to place two electrodes on the
图51示出了一个被极化切换衰减器1420。该设备为图50所示现有技术设备的一种改良,其中被极化区域被用来增加折射率改变的分辨率,并增加折射率的不连续性,由此增加在一单一阶段功能获得的衰减量。区域1422和1424以与周围材料相反的反向被电-光极化。(做为一替换方案,周围材料可以不被极化,或无光电系数,或其仅以与区域1422和1424相反的方向被极化)中央电极1426覆盖在被极化区域与周围材料上方。其被激励与电极1428和1430相关,以在极化区域1422,1424和周围材料中产生一折射率改变。设备1420的工作方式与上述设备1400的工作方式类似。被施加电压降低且使波导段1418的折射率分布加宽,降低了输出波导1408的模式与在段1418中由输入波束激励的模式之间的耦连。在这种构造中,在被修改的波导区域1448的开始,所述折射率分布的改变是很剧烈的,因此损耗较大。只要与被激励波导段1418耦连的模式异于与未被激励波导段耦连的模式,就可对被极化波导段1422和1424的数量和形状进行改变。本设备可被做成在未被电激励的状况下有高损耗,而在电激励状况下调整到低损耗。在此种情况下,被电激励区域和/或被极化区域形成波导段1418的结构的一部分。波导段1418自身可以多种方式被构造,最引人注意的是若其不存在而完全无激励,在这种情况下,本设备与图29的切换波导调制器相同。Figure 51 shows a polarization switched
如上所述,这些设备可以级联以增加最大的衰减。As mentioned above, these devices can be cascaded to increase maximum attenuation.
图50和图51的设备,也可被当做一种可变强度局部化的(″点″)光源。在波导1402中传播的光被限制成只遵循该波导的路径,直到一个电压被施加到该电极结构为止。当通过改变折射率使波导效应降低或摧毁时,原先被限制的光束的部分或全部将根据自由空间衍射理论而传播。该衍射光束将继续以向前的方向传播,同时光束区域在二维中扩展而大大于波导1408的核心。在远离该电极结构的一适当距离之处,所述光束区域可占据基片孔径的大部分,对于观测者呈现为一个从靠近所述电极结构的空间位置而来的点光源。The apparatus of Figures 50 and 51 can also be considered as a variable intensity localized ("point") light source. Light propagating in
如果需要,可使用这种技术制造一种一维局部化光源。图50和51中的波导段1418可被埋在一个利用现有技术制造的平面波导结构中,以便当一合适电压电平被加到该电极结构上时,模的横向限制被摧毁而所述平面波导中的垂直限制却保留。因此,所述光束区域在一维中扩展,将光限制到一个窄平面上。If desired, this technique can be used to create a one-dimensional localized light source. The
图52示出了一个具有加宽角的极化光栅的极化设备1500。所示用于加宽带宽的方法是参考图18等所描述带宽修改方案的一种替换方案。如图所示,一个周期结构1500具有若干极化区域1502,它们优选被极化到结构1504的一个极化区域,诸如波导和电极以及光栅的其他结构根据需要设置。畴1502跨越输入光束传播的中央轴线,其图形可以是严格周期性的,具有50%占空比。该极化区域的顶面四周都沿着从一对齐点画出的线对齐。在进入所述材料的一段距离处,各极化区域复制其表面形状。其结果是一种具有极化的结构而其周期的改变与在所述极化基片中的横向位置有线性的关系。射过该极化区域的输入光束1508可以是一个自由传播的高斯光束(如果这些畴被深度极化)或其可被限制在波导1512中。根据光栅的功能,该输入光束可被耦连成一个被滤波的或频率被转换的输出光束1510,或被耦连成后向反射光束1514。光栅结构中的周期范围(由此到它的带宽)取决于该光束的宽度和点1506距该光束的轴线的间隔。通过调整这些量,可在由适合上述光栅的第一阶周期数量确定的最小值上充分地增加该极化结构的带宽。对被极化边界的最大所需角度有着限制,因而,图52中所示结构不能无限制地扩展。然而,通过将几个段级联在一起能够获得一长交互作用区域。为了使各段之间的相干最大,沿光束中央轴线的畴的周期在各段之间的连接处不应被修改。FIG. 52 shows a
虽然增加光栅的带宽减少了交互作用的强度,但它却让使用该光栅的设备对小频率漂移大大地不敏感。例如,使用角加宽光栅的倍频器设备更能容忍温度漂移。另一应用的例子是频道下降滤波器,由于其必须使用强光栅,所以它倾向具有窄的带宽。角加宽光栅的使用使得加宽的通带能够接受高带宽的通信信号。所述角加宽光栅还能够应用于以上讨论的其他光栅结构中。Although increasing the bandwidth of the grating reduces the strength of the interaction, it makes the device using the grating substantially less sensitive to small frequency drifts. For example, frequency doubler devices using angularly widened gratings are more tolerant to temperature drift. An example of another application is a channel drop filter, which tends to have a narrow bandwidth because it must use a strong raster. The use of an angle widening grating enables widening of the passband to accept high bandwidth communication signals. The angular widening grating can also be applied in other grating structures discussed above.
有一些实施角加宽光栅的替换实施例而不遵循上述图形。例如,光栅周期的角与沿传播轴线的距离之间的关系可能比线性的更复杂。对于大多数交互功率存在于所述光栅之一端的一些应用中,二次的或指数的变化可能更为适合。角加宽技术也适用于现有技术的光栅类型,诸如散射,离子交换,和被蚀刻的光栅。There are alternative embodiments implementing an angular widening grating that do not follow the above pattern. For example, the relationship between the angle of the grating period and the distance along the axis of propagation may be more complex than linear. For some applications where most of the interactive power exists at one end of the grating, a quadratic or exponential variation may be more suitable. The angular broadening technique is also applicable to prior art grating types such as diffuse, ion exchanged, and etched gratings.
图53示出了使用弯曲波导的另一角加宽设备。在此种情况中,极化区域1522具有平行的面,该些面的角相对于波导内的局部传播方向是倾斜的。其次,利用经历光栅的不同富里叶成分的波的不同成分使上述带宽加宽。该弯曲波导具有比直波导更高的损耗,但并不需要大的曲率。图53中示出的几个部分可被连在一起,例如形成沿着一基本上直的线前、后蜿蜒的波导结构。Figure 53 shows another angular widening device using curved waveguides. In this case, the
图54示出了一可控极化透镜1530。同心设置的畴1532,1534,1536,和1538被极化到一电-光基片1540中,而其极性与该基片的极性相反。两个透明电极1542与1544被放置在所述设备的相反两面(在所述极化区域的上下)。当一电场被施加在两电极之间时,该极化区域的折射率根据极性增加或减小。该极化区域的几何形状由聚焦给定色彩的光波的衍射需求确定。边界之间的间隔随半径约平方地改变。例如,如果所述应用需要把平面波聚焦到一圆点上,则该极化区域将是圆的(用于相等地聚焦在两个平面上),且随着所述极化区域的直径增加,上述极化区域的数量被减小,因此上述极化区域被分开。所述极化区域的边界由相对于在该透镜结构的面上的输入波的输出波的相位确定。每次波的相对相位变化到π,一个极化区域边界就出现。例如,如果来的波是一个平面波,则沿着该表面其相位是不变的。若出去的波是收敛的波(将聚焦在远离所述面的一个点上),则它基本为一球形波且在该球形波中的相位变化决定所述边界。透镜1530是具有根据所加电压可调相位延迟的相位板,上述畴占据目标的Fresnel域。FIG. 54 shows a controllable polarizing lens 1530 . The concentrically disposed domains 1532, 1534, 1536, and 1538 are polarized into an electro-optical substrate 1540 with a polarity opposite to that of the substrate. Two transparent electrodes 1542 and 1544 are placed on opposite sides of the device (above and below the polarized area). When an electric field is applied between the two electrodes, the refractive index of the polarized region increases or decreases depending on the polarity. The geometry of this polarized region is determined by the diffraction requirements to focus light waves of a given color. The spacing between boundaries varies approximately squarely with the radius. For example, if the application required focusing a plane wave onto a circular spot, the polarized region would be circular (for equal focusing on both planes), and as the diameter of the polarized region increases, The number of the above-mentioned polarized regions is reduced, and thus the above-mentioned polarized regions are divided. The boundaries of the polarized regions are determined by the phase of the output wave relative to the input wave on the face of the lens structure. Every time the relative phase of the waves changes by π, a polarized region boundary appears. For example, if the incoming wave is a plane wave, its phase is constant along the surface. If the outgoing wave is a convergent wave (will focus on a point away from the face), then it is essentially a spherical wave and phase changes in the spherical wave determine the boundaries. The lens 1530 is a phase plate with an adjustable phase retardation according to the applied voltage, and the above-mentioned domains occupy the Fresnel domains of the target.
为了使一给定色彩的平面波聚焦,提供一足以使该平面波滞后(或超前)π的电压。每种不同的频率都具有由极化透镜1530的不同的Fresnel域结构限定的不同焦距。较高的频率具有较长的焦距。如果不是散射的话,每个波长都以同一电压优选地聚焦。该电压可被调整,以对基片材料1540中的散射进行补偿。若调整该电压远离优选值,则被聚焦到所述点上的光的量被减少,因为来自不同域的光的相位不再最适宜地添加。它们将部分破坏性地干涉,减小了纯强度。To focus a plane wave of a given color, a voltage sufficient to cause the plane wave to lag (or lead) by π is applied. Each different frequency has a different focal length defined by a different Fresnel domain structure of the polarizing lens 1530 . Higher frequencies have longer focal lengths. Each wavelength is preferably focused, if not scattered, at the same voltage. This voltage can be adjusted to compensate for scatter in the substrate material 1540 . If this voltage is adjusted away from the preferred value, the amount of light that is focused onto the spot is reduced because the phases of the light from the different domains no longer add optimally. They will interfere partially destructively, reducing the pure intensity.
图55示出了一个激光器反馈装置1450。激光源由放大器区域1452,后反射器1454,和一个低反射输出区域1456组成,所述低反射输出区域1456例如可以是一个不反射涂膜窗。虽然通常的激光器将具有另一高反射器,但在本发明中,该高反射器被取消,以便一光栅反馈装置能控制该激光器的振荡。来自输出区域1456和耦连器1458的反射是足够地低,以便如果没有来自外部源的额外反馈,该激光器不发射激光。所述外部反馈源由一个光耦连系统1458和一个极化材料1460组成,当该极化材料1460被一电场激励时反射来自光放大器的光束。因为极化材料1460的反射谱在频率空间上可以是非常的窄,所以其可以选择一个窄的区域,在该区域中激光器可根据光栅周期的分布围绕决定光栅的单一频率或多个频率进行工作。若谐振腔足够长以便FSR是处在与该反射谱的宽度相同的阶上,则该组合装置将以单一纵向模式振荡。Figure 55 shows a
用于在所述光放大器和材料1460之间耦连光能的装置1458收集激光器的输出模和把其重聚焦到极化材料上。耦连器可以由多种替换构造组成,包括一个或多个下列部件:高数值孔径透镜,例如GRIN(渐变折射率),非球面的,衍射的,或多元素球面透镜;锥形波导;在从波导到波导对头耦接情况中使用的贴近调整器和对准器。该耦连器1460的表面优选是不反射涂敷的。AR涂敷可以是一种多层电介质涂敷,或可溶凝胶涂敷,或具有合适折射率的材料的四分之一波层(两相邻媒体的几何平均)。如果所述材料被整体地极化,该材料1460中的优选聚焦具有一近似与该被极化区域的长度相等的瑞利区域。若该材料具有一用于限制传播光束的波导,则该光耦连系统应该将激光器模式优选地转换成在该波导入口处的模式分布,根据相位前角,曲率半径,和横向尺度,该模式分布与该波导的所需模式匹配。所述极化结构由至少两种类型的畴组成,它们优选是彼此相反地被极化。极化材料具有电极1462和1464,它们跨越被极化区域延伸并能由电源1466电激励。当一电压被施加到两电极上时,在所述材料中的感应电场使折射率产生变化,折射率将根据极化方向和电场强度部分地改变。通过在极化中感应周期性结构,能够根据折射率产生电可控制周期调制。
为放大器1452提供必须的附件和激励以在具有中央光轴特征的延伸区域之上产生一个光增益系数。该放大器的光带宽根据产生增益的过程被加以限制。所述带宽是增益分布的宽度(典型地为3dB全带宽):该增益作为光频率的函数的关系。半导体二极管技术(诸如InGaAs,AlGaAS,AlGaInP,InGaAsP,ZnSe,GaN,InSb)对于提供大的带宽是有利的,虽然它们没有提供高功率的容量。光反射器1454是一反馈镜,它可以是一个按半径与该模式的相前对准和匹配的整体镜,以把传播出该放大器后面的模式反射回其自身。或者,在波导放大器的情况下,(Nd:YAG,Er:YAG,Nd:LiNbO3,Er:LiNbO3,和稀有氧化离子和结晶或玻璃基质的各种组合),其可以是所述放大器的一个面,它与所述波导垂直地贴附或被抛光。如果谐振腔的几何形状是个环(允许单一方向的光的传播),则该光反射器是一个由至少两个元件组成的多元件结构,以收集从材料1460反射的并不通过该放大器的光,和对准以及将返回通过该放大器的光再聚焦到材料1460上,它将再次具有与其先前通过时所具有的模特征。
几个光束与周期极化的材料1460的交互作用是可能的。若选择周期为为不反射放大器1452增益内的光所需周期的倍数,则该装置将做为一个(较高阶的)场控制反馈镜。当电压1466被接通时,激光器可被打开,由此在光栅的带宽内产生不反射。然后通过调制所述电压,该激光器输出被放大调制,因为该激光器振荡与该电场强度成正比变化。调制控制装置1466提供所需的电压和电流以在材料1460中建立做为时间函数的所需电场。还可通过以一频率操作调制控制装置使所述激光器锁模,该频率等于材料1460与激光器反射器1454之间光的来回行程频率的倍数。因为以相同的频率对极化结构1450的反射率进行调制,在两个反馈镜1450和1454之间谐振的光束倾向于分裂成一个(或多个)脉冲,当然它以所述来回行程频率环绕脉动。如果频率是来回行程频率的倍数(1x,2x,3x,...),则所述脉冲每次接近反射器1450该反射率将是高的。在更高的倍数,反射率保持高一较短的时间,因此产生一个较短的脉冲,但可能需要一些装置以抑制倾向于在来回行程传输时间内以其他高反射倍数形成的附加脉冲。也可通过以来回行程频率向反射器1450施加一信号的分量对该附加脉冲进行抑制,也可通过调制放大器1452,或通过其他包括普通附加部件的装置进行抑制。一个光输出可被抽取成光束1468或1649。Interaction of several beams with the periodically poled
通过使用反馈装置1450使激光器频率稳定,因为周期反射器仅以特定的频率工作。入射频率外侧,被极化结构的带宽不被反射。在一个简单结构中,由第一阶光栅周期数的倒数确定该带宽,该第一阶光栅周期与包含所述频率成分的极化区域的长度相适应。在一个具有多周期的更复杂的结构中,带宽由沿入射和反射光束传播方向的等分角的极化结构的富里叶变换确定。因为反馈仅出现于一受限频率区域期间,所以装置1450的输出频率可以比一自由振荡激光器振荡器的输出频率窄得多,在自由振荡激光器振荡器中极化结构已被一单独镜子所取代。若该反射的带宽可与由反射器1454和极化结构形成的扩展腔的纵向模式的间隔相比较,则该装置将以单一频率模式工作。The laser frequency is stabilized by using the
在半导体二极管激光器器的情况下稳定性特征是特别重要的,在这种激光器中增益很高且是宽带的。由于是二极管激光器器,所以所有不需要的内部反射(诸如来自输出区域1456的反射)都应优选被保持在很低(例如10-3以下)的程度。根据场的深度和应用的优选电压,电极1462和1464可以处在结构的同侧或相反侧。包括激光器和切换反射器的谐振腔也可以是一个环形谐振腔,而不是图5所示的线性谐振腔。正如现有技术所知,需要一些附加光学元件来形成所述环形谐振腔,来自极化材料1460的反射不与入射光垂直。光栅的周期和角度必须总能被调整,以便被加到交互作用中的虚光子在输入和输出光子之间产生动量守恒。这种限制确定了极化光栅的角度与周期。The stability characteristics are particularly important in the case of semiconductor diode lasers, where the gain is high and broadband. As with diode lasers, all unwanted internal reflections, such as from the
图56示出了一个具有波导的反馈装置1470。一波导1470可被设置到极化材料1460中以限定光束到达一个长的距离。这在需要交互作用长度以产生大的反射的装置中,和在其中所有光在波导中传送的集成装置中是特别有用的。如图56所示,波导激光器1474(例如半导体二极管激光器器或二极管真空固态激光器)可与该波导对接耦连,以便坚固和有效地操作。在对接耦连中,光耦连系统1458为在表面1475和1477上涂敷的AR,其与对准和装配结构一起必须保持对准。光放大器1474和极化基片1460的波导被对准,以便从该光放大器射出的朝向该基片的光场相前具有与在波导1472中传播的模式的相前的优选程度:相同的角度,半径,和横向尺寸。两波导的间隔必须地在一瑞利区域内,它们与轴对准的偏差应该小于横向尺寸的几分之一。波导1472之一或放大器1476中的波导可以被逐渐变细,以使这种叠加优选化。在波导器件中,对于极化区域1478和1480整个延伸通过基片1460是不必要的。电极1482,1484和1486被设置在由波导1472横切的极化区域之上。当相对于电极1482和1486,电极1484被激励时,在该波导中生成折射率图形,其结构基本上由极化基片的结构确定。该折射率图形可做为如图55中描述的反射器,和/或可做为与上述其他波导耦连的耦连器。在通过端口1488或放大器1489的相反端,一个光输出可从该装置中取出。Figure 56 shows a
一个倍频器可被设置在基片1460中,如果基片材料是一种非线性光学材料,诸如铌酸锂,Lithium tantalate,或KTP的话。准相位匹配倍频器可被安装做为反馈光栅结构的一部分,在其之前或之后。若光栅结构设置多个反射频率,则该光放大器1452或1474可被感应以按在其增益带宽内的两个或多个频率振荡。在这种情况下,非线性频率转换器可以是一个求和频率混合器而不是倍频器,或者几个上述装置可被级联以形成多频率输出的多频率组合。A frequency doubler can be provided in the
上述涉及极化结构,它的激励,和其使用的模式的各种变异也可应用在与外部光放大器的组合中。特别地,通过把图55和56的结构与图14和15的可调谐光栅分别组合,可实现频率可调谐激光器。如前所述,通过安排极化光栅结构实现调谐,以便平均折射率随施加的场改变。光放大器1452或1474的工作频率由来自极化结构1460的反馈的频率确定,因而,通过调制该极化结构的平均折射率可对输出频率进行调制。改变平均折射率改变了光子的动量矢量,而不改变由光栅贡献的虚光子的动量矢量。在平均折射率改变之后,旧的反射频率不再对反射优选地相位匹配;峰值反射率已移到一个新的频率。Variations of the above relating to the polarization structure, its excitation, and the modes it uses can also be applied in combination with external optical amplifiers. In particular, frequency tunable lasers can be realized by combining the structures of FIGS. 55 and 56 with the tunable gratings of FIGS. 14 and 15, respectively. As previously mentioned, tuning is achieved by arranging the polarized grating structure so that the average refractive index changes with the applied field. The operating frequency of the
利用参考图55和56描述的构造,外加如图14和15中所描述的对平均折射率的改变,可构制一个调频(FM)激光器。用″调制″这个词表示变化是某些参数的函数,在这里的情况下,该参数为时间,如具有高或低占空比的脉动,正弦的变化,或具有任意瞬时关系的变化。可以提供一个控制系统控制电压和施加所需的电流,以适应电场中所需的瞬时变化。Using the configuration described with reference to Figures 55 and 56, with the addition of changes to the average refractive index as described in Figures 14 and 15, a frequency modulated (FM) laser can be constructed. By the word "modulation" is meant that the change is a function of some parameter, in this case time, such as a pulse with high or low duty cycle, a sinusoidal change, or a change with an arbitrary temporal relationship. A control system can be provided to control the voltage and apply the required current to accommodate the desired instantaneous changes in the electric field.
典型地,用于半导体激光器的优选反馈需要的光栅的反射率小于10%。剩下的光可用于输出。可使该激光器以TM或TE极化方式操作,这取决于在波导中光栅片上光束的限制。光栅中的散射,和增益元件中两极化的相对增益。因为光栅的强度是可控制的,所以反射率可被调整以使激光器的输出耦连最大化,从而使输出功率最大。Typically, preferred feedback for semiconductor lasers requires a reflectivity of the grating to be less than 10%. The remaining light is available for output. The laser can be made to operate in either TM or TE polarization, depending on the beam confinement on the grating sheet in the waveguide. Scattering in the grating, and the relative gain of the polarizations in the gain element. Because the intensity of the grating is controllable, the reflectivity can be adjusted to maximize the output coupling of the laser and thus the output power.
类似地,所述光栅能被用来形成无源或装配空腔的反射器。因为激光器到一空腔的耦连依赖于输入耦连器的相对反射率与该空腔损耗之比,所以可变反射率输入耦连器提供了一种使该参数优选化的手段,并因此提供了与该谐振腔阻抗匹配。Similarly, the gratings can be used to form passive or cavity fitted reflectors. Since the coupling of a laser to a cavity depends on the ratio of the relative reflectivity of the input coupler to the cavity loss, variable reflectivity input couplers provide a means of optimizing this parameter and thus provide to match the impedance of the resonator.
在一空腔中,本发明也可被用于单脉冲转换,模锁定,或腔排出,对于较低功率CW源(例如半导体激光器)有很小或不存在啁啾声,此外,调谐电位能够使该激光器用做通信,分光镜,和远端传感的源。In a cavity, the present invention can also be used for single-pulse switching, mode locking, or cavity ejection, with little or no chirp for lower power CW sources (e.g., semiconductor lasers). In addition, the tuning potential enables The laser is used as a source for communication, beam splitting, and remote sensing.
图57示出了一个由切换器阵列控制的可选择波长激光器1490该激光器优选是一个二极管激光器器1474,在基片1461中波导1476对接耦连到波导1472。面1475和1477优选被涂敷,以便光放大器1474将不根据其自身面的反射率发射。所述基片可以能够支撑切换器1492的任何基片,该切换器可以多种方法实现,包括图30-32和34-35的TIR切换器,图7-8和12-13的光栅切换器结构,图10和26-28的耦连器,图23,25,33和46-48的分离器,或任何其他目前公知或将要讨论的光波导切换结构。TIR切换器1492已在上面进行充分描述,在该图中仅示意性的表示。在它们处于接通位置时,这些切换器把来自放大器的光能再向下传送到与该切换器相关的波导1494之一。在所述波导中设置有一个不反射器阵列1496,这里如光栅所示。该光栅以一特定频率反射入射光,激光器在该光栅的带宽内发射激光。所示光栅元件指向多少有些距离的点1498,以便距该激光器较远的光栅的周期是逐渐地变短。通过选择与所需光栅周期相关的切换器,可对激光器所需工作的频率进行选择。光频率由几何形状确定,通过一个不变的切换间隔可获得线性分隔的光波长。如果需要,可对此安排的存储密度容量内的任何波长间隔进行选择。由于TIR切换器的低的接入损耗和其高的存储密度,可沿波导1472设置大量的切换器。倾斜输出波导也很紧凑地堆在一起。Figure 57 shows a
输出光束可从光放大器1474的后表面取出成为光束1489,或也可从波导1472取出成为光束1488,因为TIR切换器将沿波导1472泄漏一小部分激光器的光。诸如参考图56描述的许多替换结构也涉及了这种结构。例如,该反射器阵列可由利用许多技术制造的固定光栅,或切换光栅组成。它可以由统一的光栅结构组成,其中到达该光栅的不同光通路长度选择用于激光器腔的不同FSR,以一个很窄间隔的谱峰的可选择阵列产生单模操作。它甚至可以由沿波导1494的一个固定镜子的阵列所组成,其可以被涂敷用于高反射或可变波长反射。此外,所述镜子的不同间隔为在大的范围上调整可切换的激光器腔路径提供了机会。The output beam can be taken out from the rear surface of the
图57的结构的一部分是利用可调整光能再导向器1492的调制器,以及波导1494之一中的反馈反射器之一。若波导1472被做成不产生反射,如例如使其宽度渐变到零,随后为再导向器1492,则通过由反射器1496承担的反馈再次使该激光器反射。通过调整经再导向器1492的激励反馈回的光能的量,可以控制激光器的输出特性。以这种方式可对激光器进行调制,此时反射器1496可以是一个固定光栅或甚至是一个宽带的固定镜子。利用光栅反射器,具有一固定频率的优点,从而该激光器可被深度调制,而没有频移,产生了几乎纯的幅度调制。若以空腔来回行程时间的整数倍对再导向器1492进行调制,则该装置是一个模锁定器并产生一个脉动输出。所述来回行程时间是被同轴对准脉冲占用的时间,以返回到其原始位置和空腔内的方向。通过使用不同的切换器,可以改变该空腔的长度,以改变脉冲的间隔。通过同时使用两个不同的切换器,还有可能对中频脉冲产生歧视,该中频脉冲倾向于以来回行程时间的高数量级倍数随模锁定频率增长。通过对该反射器的中心频率进行调制可获得频率调制。此时,该反射器1496优选被做成如图14-22所描述的可调谐光栅。Part of the structure of FIG. 57 is a modulator utilizing an adjustable
图58示出了波长调谐可调聚焦系统1 550。诸如图54的区域板透镜(或诸如不透明体或蚀刻的区域板)的衍射聚焦元件1522与一可调谐光源1554的组合在数据存储场中提供了新的容量。当一区域板与一可调频率光源组合时,通过调谐所述光源调整到达聚焦点的距离。这种能力对于多层数据存储设备是很有用的,在这种设备中数据从以各种距离叠成数据存储介质1558的数据面1556中读出和写入。若该光源的波导被调谐(如我们上面通过各种手段已描述的),从所述区域板到聚焦点的距离被相应地调整。Figure 58 shows a wavelength tunable tunable focusing system 1550. The combination of a diffractive focusing
选择用于驱动多面数据存储系统的频率可调谐激光器是一个基于半导体二极管激光器器1560的激光器系统,根据来自诸如我们已描述的电调谐光栅1562的反馈进行调谐。该激光器还可在一准相位匹配部分1564中被倍频,此时角加宽极化光栅的使用是使该倍频器的接收变得宽的足以接受源激光器的重要调谐的优选方法。透镜系统1566对准并环绕激光器输出,为在区域板透镜1552上最终聚焦作准备。The frequency tunable laser chosen to drive the multifaceted data storage system is a semiconductor diode laser 1560 based laser system, tuned based on feedback from an electrically tunable grating 1562 such as we have described. The laser can also be frequency doubled in a quasi-phase matching section 1564, in which case the use of an angular broadening polarization grating is the preferred method to make the frequency doubler's reception broad enough to accommodate significant tuning of the source laser. Lens system 1566 aligns and surrounds the laser output in preparation for final focusing on zone plate lens 1552 .
因为区域板也可使一发散光束重新聚焦,所以透镜系统不是必须的。然而,需要形成一个通过该区域板的环绕光束,因为其将产生最小的光点尺寸,因而产生最高密度数据读取/写入容量。装置1562,1564和1566可被制造在同一基片的波导中,如果需要(并以与所述面外的反射器之一组合的方式)可以与该基片后面上的区域板透镜集成,以成为一个体积小重量轻、能够在数据存储系统中迅速启动的单元。A lens system is not necessary since the zone plate can also refocus a diverging beam. However, it is desirable to form a surrounding beam through the zone plate as this will produce the smallest spot size and thus the highest density data read/write capacity. Devices 1562, 1564 and 1566 can be fabricated in waveguides on the same substrate, and if desired (and in combination with one of the out-of-plane reflectors) can be integrated with an area plate lens on the rear of the substrate to Be a small, light-weight unit capable of booting quickly in a data storage system.
以上,参考特定实施例已对本发明进行了描述。对于本领域的技术人员来说,其他实施例是显而易见的。因此,除了所附权利要求表明的以外,本发明并不受构成本发明所述部分的限制。A显示器的一般性描述Above, the present invention has been described with reference to specific embodiments. Other embodiments will be apparent to those skilled in the art. Accordingly, the invention is not to be restricted to the parts forming this invention, except as indicated by the appended claims. A general description of the display
如本发明所述的切换技术的主要应用领域是在光学显示器的领域之中,特别是发射性光学显示器。图59描绘一种显示设备1001的方块图,图60是沿图59的线A-A所取的剖面视图。可产生从光源1000而来的可见的光或红外光的光学频率来源装置(或光源)的强度被一光束调制器1002调制。可见的光信息因此被编码成上述光束的一种时变强度。这种经调制的光束被上述耦连设备1004连到一光学波导1006(此后被称为分配波导),以各种共知的方式可在一种适当的基片材料1028的表面中或表面上加工以制得上述光学波导1006。The main field of application of the switching technique according to the invention is in the field of optical displays, especially emissive optical displays. FIG. 59 depicts a block diagram of a display device 1001 , and FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A of FIG. 59 . The intensity of the optical frequency source device (or light source) that can generate visible light or infrared light from the light source 1000 is modulated by a beam modulator 1002 . Visible light information is thus encoded into a time-varying intensity of said beam. This modulated light beam is connected by the above-mentioned coupling device 1004 to an optical waveguide 1006 (hereinafter referred to as distribution waveguide), which can be transmitted in or on the surface of a
上述分配波导1006以一个角抵住至少一光学波导1014(此后被称为像素波导),上述角足以使上述像素波导与分配波导分开一段适当的距离。图59显示在较佳实施例之中上述角是90°。一列平行的像素波导形成供上述显示器所用的扫瞄线。The distribution waveguide 1006 abuts at least one optical waveguide 1014 (hereinafter referred to as a pixel waveguide) at an angle sufficient to separate the pixel waveguide from the distribution waveguide by a suitable distance. Figure 59 shows that the angle is 90° in the preferred embodiment. A parallel array of pixel waveguides forms the scan lines for the above-described display.
上述分配波导与上述像素波导在接合区被一光束导向结构(由一列光能导向器1008组成)连接。上述光能导向器可为任何使在上述分配波导中的光的传播被导向或切换到一个所需的像素波导中的主动的或被动的方法。被动的光能导向器的例子包括方向性波导耦连器、分散波导、光栅耦连器、星输式耦连器、模式分离器与布拉格光栅反射器。主动的光能导向器根据电-光、声-光或热-光原理运作。主动的光学导向器的一些例子包括被电压启动的方向性耦连器、全内反射(TIR)切换器、分散波导切换器、布拉格光栅反射型切换器、根据模式转换原理运作的各型电-光切换器、极化控制切换器(例如与被动的极化模式分离器组合的TE-TM模式转换器)、声-光切换设备(例如SAW过滤器与调制器)与任何在本说明书中被讨论的被当作样板的被极化的切换结构。上述较佳实施例使用基于上述TIR切换器的一种变形的一种主动的光束导向器。一种被固定的镜子(图32所示者)可被上述光束导向器包括以使上述分配波导与像波导的夹角成为90°。这种光束导向器此后被称为分配切换器。The distribution waveguide and the pixel waveguide are connected by a beam guiding structure (composed of a row of light energy guides 1008 ) at the junction area. The optical energy director may be any active or passive means of directing or switching the propagation of light in the distribution waveguide into a desired pixel waveguide. Examples of passive optical energy directors include directional waveguide couplers, dispersive waveguides, grating couplers, star couplers, mode separators, and Bragg grating reflectors. Active light energy directors operate on electro-optic, acousto-optic or thermo-optic principles. Some examples of active optical guides include voltage activated directional couplers, total internal reflection (TIR) switches, dispersive waveguide switches, Bragg grating reflective switches, various types of electro- Optical switches, polarization-controlled switches (such as TE-TM mode converters combined with passive polarization mode separators), acousto-optic switching devices (such as SAW filters and modulators) and any Polarized switching structures are discussed as prototypes. The preferred embodiment described above uses an active beam director based on a variation of the TIR switch described above. A fixed mirror (shown in Figure 32) may be included in the beam guide to make the angle between the distribution waveguide and the image waveguide 90°. Such a beam guide is hereafter referred to as a distribution switcher.
一旦光在上述像素波导之中传播,通过启动一个可被电子式控制的光能变向器1016(此后被称为像素切换器),光被导向基片1028上所需的一点(此后被称为像素位置或被简称为像素)。上述像素切换器是使用上述运作原理的主动的切换组件(被动的能量变向器)。像素切换器的例子包括被电压启动的方向性耦连器、全内反射(TIR)切换器、分散波导切换器、布拉格光栅反射型切换器、根据模式转换原理运作的各型电-光切换器、极化控制切换器(例如与一种被动的极化模式分离器组合的TE-TM模式转换器)、声-光切换设备(例如SAW过滤器与调制器)、切断切换器、液晶波导切换器、声-光切换设备(例如SAW滤波器与调制器)之前在先行技艺中被讨论的任何其他的波导塞方法与任何在本说明书中被讨论的被当作样板的被极化的切换结构。上述像素切换器的较佳实施例是基于上述TIR切换器的一种变形。Once the light has propagated within the aforementioned pixel waveguide, the light is directed to a desired point on the substrate 1028 (hereinafter referred to as pixel switcher) by activating an electronically controllable light energy redirector 1016 (hereinafter referred to as pixel switcher). are pixel locations or simply referred to as pixels). The above-mentioned pixel switcher is an active switching device (passive energy diverter) using the above-mentioned operation principle. Examples of pixel switchers include voltage-activated directional couplers, total internal reflection (TIR) switches, dispersive waveguide switches, Bragg-grating reflective switches, various types of electro-optical switches that operate on the principle of mode conversion , Polarization-controlled switches (such as TE-TM mode converters combined with a passive polarization mode separator), acousto-optic switching devices (such as SAW filters and modulators), cut-off switches, liquid crystal waveguide switches any other waveguide plug method discussed in the prior art and any polarized switching structure discussed in this specification as a template . The preferred embodiment of the above-mentioned pixel switcher is based on a modification of the above-mentioned TIR switcher.
在上述像素波导1014中传的光束被上述像素切换器1016导入一输出波导段1017(此后被称为反射器波导)而到达在上述基片的表面上一个所需的像素位置。上述反射器波导可包括在上述体基片中一个两度空间的波导、一个平面的波导或自由空间传播段的若干短段或长段。The light beam propagating in the
上述光能(或光)随后被射出上述基片表面而向着观察者,使用被设在上述基片的表面中或表面上的一种光学反射装置1018(此后被称为非平面反射器)。上述非平面的反射器可为许多微镜中的一种而其功能是引导先前在上述输出波导之中传播的光的一部分离开上述波导平面。从这些小型反射器1018的每一个被传向上述观察者的光构成离开上述显示器之信息的一个像素,且上述反射器1018此后将与‘像素’一词被混用。在图59之中,发明者说明导通的像素1019和同时关断的像素。像素的阵列被组织成一种普通的列与格的安排。每一像素可用它的列与行的位置来编址。像素的这种阵列构成上述显示幕。The optical energy (or light) is then directed out of the substrate surface towards the viewer using an optical reflective device 1018 (hereinafter referred to as a non-planar reflector) disposed in or on the surface of the substrate. The non-planar reflector may be one of many micromirrors whose function is to guide a portion of the light previously propagating in the output waveguide away from the plane of the waveguide. The light transmitted from each of these
光离开上述基片的表面以后,撞在一光学的散射屏幕1026上,光学的散射屏幕1026把向前传播的光束转变成更分散的光束,这种更分散的光束有传播角(相对于上述基片的法向)的分配以致一个观察者可以一个极角θ(相对于上述基片表面的法向)观察。若从上述显示幕出现的光束可接近Lambertian角分配,则不论方位角为何,在从0到90°的全部极性角内,上述显示幕都将显得同样的明亮。其他的角分配可被用来达成不同的观察角规格。上述散射屏幕1026可被做成一种分离的光学元件。After leaving the surface of the above-mentioned substrate, the light impinges on an
本发明以一定时序列启动上述分配(或列)切换器与上述像素(或行)切换器而在上述显示器上形成影像,以致被上述反射器发射的光形成一种“扫描场扫描”,本发明产生这种扫描场的方式类似在标准的阴极射线管(CRT)中电子束被扫描的方式。上述分配切换器与上述像素切换器被一种电子结构耦连至一种场产生装置。这种场产生装置可为足以产生电压以启动上述切换器的任何形式的电压产生器,例如一个DC电力供应器、一个电池、一电路(被称为驱动电子部件)。上述分配切换器1008的电极被连到一些列切换器驱动电子部件1010,上述分配切换器1008被上述列切换器驱动电子部件1010驱动。若干个像素电极结构1020连接一些列驱动电子部件1012,上述像素切换器1016被上述列驱动电子部件1012驱动。The present invention activates the above distribution (or column) switcher and the above pixel (or row) switcher in a certain timing sequence to form an image on the above display, so that the light emitted by the above reflector forms a "scan field scan". The invention produces this scanning field in a manner similar to the way an electron beam is scanned in a standard cathode ray tube (CRT). The distribution switcher and the pixel switcher are coupled to a field generating device by an electronic structure. Such field generating means may be any form of voltage generator sufficient to generate a voltage to activate the switch, eg a DC power supply, a battery, an electrical circuit (known as drive electronics). The electrodes of the
在上述扫描场扫描的中,本发明依序调制上述光源的强度而上述像素切换启动以致每一个像素接收对应它在上述影像之中的空间位置的强度。任何被标准化的视频(video)格式都可做为本发明的显示信息的格式的例子。在最简单的构造中,上述主动像素1019(光从这些像素被发射)的位置从左至右被扫描,每次一列从顶到底,如此产生成帧的信息,扫描全部的像素位置所需的时间的倒数被称为“帧速率”。During the field scan, the invention sequentially modulates the intensity of the light source and the pixel switching is activated so that each pixel receives an intensity corresponding to its spatial position in the image. Any standardized video format can be used as an example of the format of the display information of the present invention. In the simplest configuration, the positions of the above-mentioned active pixels 1019 (from which light is emitted) are scanned from left to right, top to bottom one column at a time, thus generating the framed information, scanning all the pixel positions required The reciprocal of time is called the "frame rate".
本发明的显示器异于标准的CRT显示器,因为从上述发射像素而来的光持续的时间不如上述像素切换器被启动的时间长。对像素格式为640×480且其成帧(frame)率为80Hz的高信息容量的显示器,这段时间短于50ns。当更新画面率高于80Hz,眼睛对闪光的敏感度迅速下降,即使是在周边的视觉较敏感的部分。The display of the present invention differs from a standard CRT display in that the light from the emitting pixels does not last as long as the pixel switcher is activated. For a high information content display with a pixel format of 640x480 and a frame rate of 80 Hz, this time is less than 50 ns. When the refresh rate is higher than 80Hz, the eye's sensitivity to flash drops rapidly, even in the more sensitive parts of peripheral vision.
本发明的一种实施例是一种全色显示器。本发明的光源包括1000个以不同的中央波长(色)运作的三种强度源而达成这种效果。为达成优选的效果,上述光源是基于二极管激光器以产生接近630nm、530nm以及470nm的光。波导1006与1014可被设计来支持这些不同的波长的传播,就像上述切换器1008与1016能支持这些相异的波长的传播。本发明增加一种特点给上述光源1000,亦即一种连接设备以组合三种激光的输出进入一个波导,以致它们随后可被单组波导与切换器操控。以下将描述增加的特点的详情。One embodiment of the invention is a full color display. The light source of the present invention achieves this effect by comprising 1000 three intensity sources operating at different central wavelengths (colors). For optimal effect, the above light sources are based on diode lasers to generate light near 630nm, 530nm and 470nm.
请注意上述激光从右下方进入图59的显示器,因为一帧信息是从左上开始被扫描。在一帧信息之中,本发明以一种序列来扫描独立的列,较接近激光的切换器接下来被启动。上述切换器的上升时间快速的改变光的方向进入新被选择的波导而不受可能留在前一电极的任何电荷的影响。此举的优点是上述切换器的下降时间不影响上述像素率,允许下降时间经引升时间长。确实,一段长的下降时间可配合从上述电极回收能量以使电力消耗最低。因为相似的理由,上述一些列的刺激的顺序是相同的(趋向上述激光)。若上述下降时间大于上述上升时间,本发明可在每一列的末端采用显示器扫描的延迟以允许全部的分配切换器到达它们的低损耗状态,允许光通过在该列的第一个像素。这种延迟应该是上述分配换器的消减时间的数倍。类似的,本发明可在该帧信息的末端采用一种延迟以提供足够的时间使上述像素切换器放松。Please note that the above-mentioned laser light enters the display of Fig. 59 from the bottom right, because a frame of information is scanned from the top left. In a frame of information, the present invention scans the individual columns in a sequence, the switch closer to the laser being activated next. The rise time of the switch described above quickly redirects the light into the newly selected waveguide without being affected by any charge that may be left on the previous electrode. The advantage of this is that the falling time of the switcher does not affect the pixel rate, allowing the falling time to be longer than the rising time. Indeed, a long fall time can be coordinated with energy recovery from the above electrodes to minimize power consumption. For similar reasons, the order of stimulation in the aforementioned trains is the same (towards the aforementioned laser light). If the fall time is greater than the rise time, the present invention may employ a display scan delay at the end of each column to allow all distribution switches to reach their low loss state, allowing light to pass through the first pixel in that column. This delay should be several times the abatement time of the above-mentioned distributor. Similarly, the present invention may employ a delay at the end of the frame information to provide sufficient time for the aforementioned pixel switcher to relax.
既然发明者可使用图59所示的每一个元件的许多相异的版本以构造本发明的显示器的一种特定实施例,发明者将详细地描述这些元件的变化并指明何种变化可被选用以做为本发明的优选实施例。B.光源Since the inventor may use many different versions of each of the elements shown in Figure 59 to construct a particular embodiment of the display of the present invention, the inventor will describe variations of these elements in detail and indicate which variations may be selected Take it as a preferred embodiment of the present invention. B. Light source
可被连到一波导的任何光源可做为供本发明的显示器所用的光激发器。上述光源可以有在光谱的可见光、紫外光、红外光区中的任何波长。单发射区光激发器的实施例包括任何型式的激光、发光二极管(LED)与高亮度的小容量白炽与荧光光源。多发射区光源的实施例包括激光或LED的阵列、排列成一条线或分布成二维的光分配区域的白炽与荧光光源。为了几项理由,本发明的优选实施例所使用的固态激光是半导体二极管激光器光源(此后被称为“二极管激光器”)。首先,一激光光源可被连接至一波导而有任何光源的最高的效率,藉此使操控上述显示器所需的电子减到最少。其次,上述二极管激光器光源是可转换电能成为光能的一种有效的转换器,再次使上述显示器的电力需求减到最少。第三、发明者以半导体处理技术来制造上述二极管,因此允许上述显示器并用低成本的光源。Any light source that can be connected to a waveguide can be used as a light exciter for use in the displays of the present invention. The aforementioned light source may have any wavelength in the visible, ultraviolet, infrared region of the spectrum. Examples of single emitter light exciters include any type of laser, light emitting diode (LED), and high brightness small volume incandescent and fluorescent light sources. Examples of multi-emitter light sources include arrays of lasers or LEDs, incandescent and fluorescent light sources arranged in a line or distributed in two-dimensional light distribution areas. The solid-state laser used by the preferred embodiment of the invention is a semiconductor diode laser source (hereinafter "diode laser") for several reasons. First, a laser light source can be connected to a waveguide with the highest efficiency of any light source, thereby minimizing the electronics required to operate the display. Second, the diode laser light source is an efficient converter that converts electrical energy into light energy, again minimizing the power requirements of the display. Third, the inventors fabricated the above-mentioned diodes with semiconductor processing technology, thus allowing the above-mentioned displays to incorporate low-cost light sources.
市面可见的二极管激光器可产生在可见光区中波长大于620nm的光,而这种二极管激光器可被应用在红的单色显示器之中。为了获得一种全彩的显示器,还需要在绿色区之中的波长(接近530nm)与在蓝色光区之中的波长(接近470nm)。使用非线性的光学设备(在本技术中被当做一种倍频器),就从红外线二极管激光器获得在绿色区与蓝色区之中的波长。上述倍频器之实施例包括体型非线性晶体,例如KDP、LiNbO3、KTP、LiTaO3、SBN与BaTiO3与在上述体型倍频器晶体之中被制造的非线性波导结构或使用非线性的有极性的聚合物波导。在本发明的优选实施例中,上述倍频器是一种定期被极化的结构,被用来制造定期被极化结构的材料是非线性光学的周期性被极化材料,例如LiNbO3、KTP、LiTaO3、SBN,以及BaTiO3的铁电性晶体。既然上述显示器的基片材料可从这些材料被制得,上述显示器与倍频器可被整合成单一晶片。Commercially available diode lasers can generate light with a wavelength greater than 620 nm in the visible region, and such diode lasers can be used in red monochrome displays. To obtain a full-color display, wavelengths in the green region (nearly 530nm) and in the blue region (nearly 470nm) are also required. Using nonlinear optics (referred to in this technique as a frequency doubler), wavelengths in the green and blue regions are obtained from the infrared diode laser. Embodiments of the above frequency doubler include bulk nonlinear crystals such as KDP, LiNbO 3 , KTP, LiTaO 3 , SBN, and BaTiO 3 and nonlinear waveguide structures fabricated in the above bulk frequency doubler crystals or using nonlinear Polar polymer waveguides. In a preferred embodiment of the present invention, the above-mentioned frequency doubler is a periodically polarized structure, and the material used to manufacture the regularly polarized structure is a periodically polarized material of nonlinear optics, such as LiNbO 3 , KTP , LiTaO 3 , SBN, and ferroelectric crystals of BaTiO 3 . Since the substrate materials of the above-mentioned displays can be fabricated from these materials, the above-mentioned displays and frequency doublers can be integrated into a single chip.
用这种倍频器(举例而言),1060nm的二极管激光器可被倍频以获得530nm的绿色光,940nm的二极管激光器可被倍频以获得470nm的蓝色光。在实验室中表明上述倍增过程的效率超过50%。发明者可使用这种技术以获得显示器所需的全部的可见光波长。Using such a frequency doubler, for example, a 1060nm diode laser can be frequency doubled to obtain 530nm green light, and a 940nm diode laser can be frequency doubled to obtain 470nm blue light. The above-mentioned doubling process has been shown to be more than 50% efficient in the laboratory. The inventors can use this technique to obtain the full range of visible light wavelengths required for displays.
二极管固态激光可被当做供本发明的显示器所用的光源。密质的绿色二极管激光器是市面上可见的,蓝色二极管激光器已在实验室之中被展示。二极管光源包括频率被倍增的纤维激光、向上转换激光、频率被倍增的二极管YAG、YLF与其他的有杂质的晶体的主激光材料。Diode solid-state lasers can be used as light sources for the displays of the present invention. Dense green diode lasers are commercially available, and blue diode lasers have been demonstrated in laboratories. Diode sources include frequency-multiplied fiber lasers, up-conversion lasers, frequency-multiplied diode YAG, YLF, and other host laser materials with impurities.
现在,在蓝色光与绿色光区之中运作的直接可见的固态半导体激光(从例如硒化锌(与氖化镓)的半导体材料所制成)已存在实验室之中且若其寿命被延长且这些光源被商品化则可成为本发明的显示器的优选光源。Directly visible solid-state semiconductor lasers (made from semiconductor materials such as ZnSe (and Gallium Neonide)) operating in the blue and green regions now exist in laboratories and if their lifetimes can be extended And if these light sources are commercialized, they can become the preferred light source for the display of the present invention.
在本发明的优选实施例之中,上述激光与倍频器被设在与显示器分离的一片基片上。随后,发明者使用光纤连接或对接连接以连接这种组合与在显示器中的波导。分离两个次组合提升每个单元的效率。激光可被对接连至晶片或被倒装在上述晶片上被蚀刻的沟中。对接耦连是坚固的,不需要额外的元件且与自动对齐技术是可相容的。在优选实施例之中,深度与宽度的波导锥度被用在上述倍频器晶片(或上述二极管激光器晶片)之中以使上述激光模式尺寸配合上述倍频器波导尺寸以得到优选的连接效率。以二个波导制造步骤可获得在倍频器中的深度锥度。第一个步骤产生深的波导与锥度,而第二个步骤产生浅的波导(连接上述锥度)。以这种方式,上述激光可有效地被连接至上述单一模式倍频器波导。作为一种替代性方案,上述激光二极管可如同上述显示器直接被连接至相同的基片。这允许上述倍频器、反馈稳定元件、波长结合器与其他的元件被整合成在相同的晶片之中。若效率高,则上述直接连接方案有成本优势。C、调制器In a preferred embodiment of the present invention, the laser and the frequency doubler are provided on a substrate separate from the display. The inventors then used fiber optic connections or butt connections to connect this combination to the waveguide in the display. Separating the two subcombinations increases the efficiency of each unit. The laser can be butt-connected to the wafer or flip-chip in etched grooves on the wafer. The butt coupling is robust, requires no additional components and is compatible with self-alignment techniques. In a preferred embodiment, depth and width waveguide tapers are used in the frequency doubler chip (or the diode laser chip) to match the laser mode size to the frequency doubler waveguide size for optimal connection efficiency. The depth taper in the doubler can be obtained with two waveguide fabrication steps. The first step produces a deep waveguide with a taper, while the second step produces a shallow waveguide (joining the aforementioned taper). In this way, the aforementioned laser light can be effectively coupled to the aforementioned single mode frequency doubler waveguide. As an alternative, the laser diodes described above can be directly connected to the same substrate as the displays described above. This allows the aforementioned frequency doubler, feedback stabilization element, wavelength combiner and other components to be integrated in the same die. If the efficiency is high, the direct connection scheme described above has a cost advantage. C. Modulator
上述光束调制器1002可改变上述激光的强度以获得一种频带宽度以应付永远充分的显示。上述可获得优选效果的频带宽度大于上述像素扫描率。这种频带宽度对有80Hz更新率的640×480像素VGA显示器而言超过25MHz。上述调制器优选有能力再生许多灰色阶强度层次。上述调制器优选跟上述频率倍增器一样被制造在相同的晶片上。The beam modulator 1002 can vary the intensity of the laser light to obtain a frequency bandwidth that is always sufficient for the display. The frequency bandwidth in which the above-mentioned preferable effect can be obtained is larger than the above-mentioned pixel scanning rate. This bandwidth exceeds 25MHz for a 640x480 pixel VGA display with an 80Hz update rate. The aforementioned modulator is preferably capable of reproducing many gray scale intensity levels. The aforementioned modulator is preferably fabricated on the same die as the aforementioned frequency multiplier.
已知数种不同的光束调制器可符合以上的要求。第一种方法是用调制供应上述二极管激光器的电流来调制上述二极管激光器强度。既然上述二极管激光器增益光谱亦随着电流变化,频率变化伴随这样的调制。若上述二极管激光器被用来直接照明上述显示器(像红AlGaInP二极管),则这样的频率变化不是问题,因为眼睛无法感觉这样的光。然而若上述二极管激光器的输出功率驱动一倍频单元以制造绿色或蓝色光束,这样的频率调制就是问题,这是因为成为 激光频率的函数的倍增效率曲线的接受度的狭窄(在0.1nm的约100的因子内,取决于倍频器的构造与设计参数)。在后一情形的中,上述二极管激光器工作频率必须被稳定在上述倍频器接受性范围之内,虽然不必在单一频率模式中运作。(多模式作业确实增加转换效率。)使用外光栅反馈(或任何此技艺中为人所知的其他方法)结合电子反馈控制回路,可达成频率稳定。使用例如为人所知的屏敝蚀刻或体内扩散的方法把上述光栅整合到上述波导中。上述光栅中心频率是电-光或热的振动,且使用一个光电二极管来监测其频率被加倍的电力的强度。在上述高频振动的光电二极管信号的频率成分被当做失误信号而被输入上述电子反馈回路以控制上述二极管激光器频率。因此使上述激光频率配合为了获得有效的频率倍增所需的优选波长,产生可见光。以外光栅稳定(重返上述二极管激光器的假反射的充分抑制),有可能使用变化上述二极管激光电流的调制技术,因为在上述频率被上述光栅反馈控制。能调制上述二极管激光器电流是一个重要的优点,因为这项技术使在上述激光中电力消耗减到最小。Several different beam modulators are known to meet the above requirements. The first method is to modulate the intensity of the diode laser by modulating the current supplied to the diode laser. Since the above-mentioned diode laser gain spectrum also varies with current, the frequency variation accompanies such modulation. If the above-mentioned diode laser is used to directly illuminate the above-mentioned display (like a red AlGaInP diode), such a frequency change is not a problem, because the eye cannot perceive such light. However, if the output power of the above-mentioned diode laser drives a frequency doubling unit to produce a green or blue beam, such frequency modulation is problematic because of the narrow acceptance of the multiplication efficiency curve as a function of laser frequency (at 0.1 nm within a factor of about 100, depending on the construction and design parameters of the frequency doubler). In the latter case, the diode laser operating frequency must be stabilized within the acceptable range of the frequency doubler, although not necessarily operating in a single frequency mode. (Multi-mode operation does increase conversion efficiency.) Frequency stabilization can be achieved using external grating feedback (or any other method known in the art) combined with an electronic feedback control loop. The grating is integrated into the waveguide using methods such as known mask etching or bulk diffusion. The above-mentioned grating center frequency is electro-optical or thermal vibration, and a photodiode is used to monitor the strength of the electric power whose frequency is doubled. The frequency component of the photodiode signal vibrating at the high frequency is used as an error signal and input into the electronic feedback loop to control the frequency of the diode laser. Visible light is thus produced by matching the aforementioned laser frequencies to the preferred wavelengths required for efficient frequency multiplication. In addition to grating stabilization (sufficient suppression of spurious reflections back into the diode laser), it is possible to use modulation techniques that vary the diode laser current as it is feedback controlled by the grating at the frequency. Being able to modulate the diode laser current is an important advantage because this technique minimizes power consumption in the laser.
第二种调制方法是使用为人所知的调制器设计来制造独立的调制器(可能在上述基片1028之中)。标准的调制器设计有一种实例是Mach-Zehnder干涉调制器。被描述如前的任何电-光切换器亦可作为上述调制设备1002。本发明的优选实施例使用被描绘在图30中的内反射光学切换器作为上述调制器,因为它是密实的,使用与上述TIR切换器1008与1016相同的极化技艺,且其输入强度与电压的关系配合良好以供应数位的灰色阶调制。当上述输出光束是上述切换器的被反射的输出,上述像素的灰色阶几乎与上述切换器的输入电压有线性关系。D、光连接设备A second modulation method is to use known modulator designs to fabricate a separate modulator (possibly in the
上述光连接设备1004把从上述光源1000而来的光连接至上述分配波导1006。已知许多不同的技术可达成一种高的连接效率。这些已知的技术的一些实例包括体型透镜光束列、上述激光二极管到上述基板1028的对接与上述激光源至上述基片的纤维连接。优选实施例是纤维连接,因为它有效率且不贵并允许上述二极管激光器源1000与调制器1002独立地被制造与包装。因此,上述光源包装可从基片1028被拆下,分开在产生上述激光时限制效率的组织与限制上述显示器面板效率的组织。上述光源1000的光输出进入一个纤维输出端以达成上述光源到上述显示器面板的连接。使用已知的标准的技术可连接上述纤维输出端至上述分配波导1006。The optical connection device 1004 connects the light from the light source 1000 to the distribution waveguide 1006 . Many different techniques are known to achieve a high connection efficiency. Some examples of these known techniques include bulk lens beam trains, docking of the laser diodes to the
在本发明的全彩版本的优选实施例之中,使用一个三色光束结合器(优选是被描绘在图61之中的被光栅辅助的耦连器)把三个激光源包装在一起并连接至一个波导。上述光束结合器把上0述的红色激光束1050、上述绿色激光束1052与上述蓝色激光束1054连接至相同的波导1044,同时使已在上述波导1044之中传播的光仅有最小的损失。这个结合器达成被结合的激光输出1056,经结合的激光输1056随后被传入上述波导1006。上述红色激光束1050从上述波导1042被连到上述波导1044,使用连接固定指数、释压或被极化的光栅1056的暂时的波导而使在波导1042中的输入模式1050的传播参数配合在红色波长的波导1044。上述蓝色激光束1054从上述波导1046被连到上述波导1044,使用连接固定指数、释压或被极化的光栅1058的暂时的波导而使在波导1046中的输入模式1056的传播参数配合在蓝色波长的波导1044。这是一种可被用来有效率的结合在三个波导中的功率进入一个波导的已知的标准的技术而。本说明书在之前已参考图10提供被光栅辅助的平行波导耦连器的进一步的讨论,上述被光栅辅助的平行波导耦连器有一个被极化的光栅。被光栅辅助的耦连器的频带宽度通常比三种色波长的分离的频带宽度窄很多,以致在每一个色光束中的功率可独立地被控制并最优化。上述由光栅辅助的耦连器适合将三波导色光束高效率地结合进入相同波导。In the preferred embodiment of the full-color version of the invention, the three laser sources are packaged together and connected using a three-color beam combiner (preferably a grating-assisted coupler as depicted in Figure 61). to a waveguide. The beam combiner connects the above-mentioned
上述三色被光栅辅助的耦连器1040优选跟上述蓝色与绿色光源的倍频器与上述蓝色与绿色光源的调制器实施在相同的基片芯片上。这三个二极管激光器源都被连到相同的晶片。此外,可能有另一个调制器被放在上述光束结合器之后(也有可能在相同的晶片上),以同时供应偏压校正给三种色彩。偏压校正是一种强度调制而必须被用来补偿在刺激不同的像素时被光束所阻挡的波长的不同的长度所造成的介于上述结合器与各个像素之间的光学功率下滑。E、基片材料The three-color grating-assisted
供显示器1001所用的基片1028是一种固态材料,这种固态材料是任何可被做得很平而足以维持整面显示幕面积的摄影蚀刻容许度的电-光活性材料。上述分配(与像素)波导与切换器被制造在这片基片材料之中或之上。在优选实施例之中,上述电-光TIR切换器是由一种极化过程所形成,所以上述基片或在上述基片上的一层薄膜必须是可极化的电-光活性材料。适当的电-光活性固体材料的一些实例是从体型的铁电晶体的晶片(例如LiNbO3、KTP、LiTaO3、SBN、BaTiO3、)、在适当支持材料(例如玻璃或塑胶)上的被极化的电-光聚合物、在适当的支持材料(例如被构造以允许单晶膜成长的体型结晶基片)的铁电结晶材料的薄膜(例如LiNbO3、KTP、LiTaO3)。
本发明的优选实施例使用铌酸锂(LiNbO3)的晶片1028。LiNbO3在台基中成长到直径6英寸时,它是优良的电-光活性材料且在除了硅以外的全部的大直径结晶材料中成本最低。F、分配与像素波导结构A preferred embodiment of the invention uses a
在本发明的优选实施例之中,单一分配波导1006连接全部的像素波导,分配切换器被用来从分配波导传送光到像素波导。一般而言,一种连接装置是任何可使光从分配波导到达像素波导的方法。在其他实施例之中,多分配波导可被用来形成分配波导的汇流排。像素波导是彼此平行的,占据整个显示器面积,分配波导与像素波导之间有个大角(例如90°),且接近显示幕的一边。In a preferred embodiment of the invention, a single distribution waveguide 1006 connects all the pixel waveguides, and distribution switches are used to route light from the distribution waveguides to the pixel waveguides. In general, a connection means is any means by which light can pass from the distribution waveguide to the pixel waveguide. In other embodiments, multiple distribution waveguides may be used to form a busbar of distribution waveguides. The pixel waveguides are parallel to each other and occupy the entire display area. There is a large angle (eg 90°) between the distribution waveguide and the pixel waveguide, and it is close to one side of the display screen.
波导参数(宽度、深度与指数变化Δn)被选择以致上述波导支持供三种色彩所用的单一模式。最短的光束波长(470nm)仅比最长的光束波长(630nm)短25%,以致于波导可被选择以支持在相同的波导中的三种色彩所用的最低次模式。多模式波导亦可被使用,但这些波导的相关的较高的辐射损失需要较高的输入功率且增加显示幕的背景模糊(闪光)程度。The waveguide parameters (width, depth and index change Δn) are chosen such that the waveguide supports a single mode for the three colors. The shortest beam wavelength (470nm) is only 25% shorter than the longest beam wavelength (630nm), so that the waveguides can be chosen to support the lowest sub-mode for the three colors in the same waveguide. Multimode waveguides can also be used, but the associated higher radiation losses of these waveguides require higher input power and increase the degree of background blur (flare) of the display screen.
被用在本发明之中的波导被制造在一种电-光材料之中,例如被如上定义的基片材料。在本发明的优选实施例之中,以标准的退火质子交换过程(APE)而把波导制造在LiNbO3之中。另一种可用的在LiNbO3中的波导制造过程是钛体内扩散过程。这些波导制造过程之一或二可被用来制造图30所示的切换器。其他的基片材料可使用已知的不同的波导制造过程以取得这些材料。G、分配切换器The waveguides used in the present invention are fabricated in an electro-optical material, such as the substrate material as defined above. In a preferred embodiment of the invention, the waveguides are fabricated in LiNbO3 by a standard annealed proton exchange process (APE). Another available waveguide fabrication process in LiNbO3 is the titanium bulk diffusion process. Either or both of these waveguide fabrication processes can be used to fabricate the switch shown in FIG. 30 . Other substrate materials can be obtained using various known waveguide fabrication processes. G. Distribution switcher
分配切换器1008的主要要求是当它被切掉时,它必须有几近零的损失。这项要求是为了显示器的应用,因为被引导的光束在通过数百个分配切换器时应该不受任何可观的损失,以传送足够的功率给在分配波导之中的最后的分配切换器。本发明的优选实施例使用TIR反射切换器与如图30所示的被极化的波导部分以达成这项要求。其他的主要规格是上述分配切换器必须以几近90°来弯折光束来允许在一小晶片尺寸中制造大显示器面积。一个几近90°的平面微镜反射器(又被称为固定镜)与图30的切换器被合用,如图36的部分所示,包括输入波导984、切换器985、微镜977、输出波导986(不对称的损失波导四通管997与额外的切换器983与波导982在最简单的显示器构造中不是必需的)。当TIR切换器985被切掉,被极化的部分完全透明,光束沿着分配波导继续前进。在电压被放在如30的TIR切换器电极时,光从波导984被送到像素波导986而仅有低损失。说明书已在前面参考图36描述微镜977的优选实施例所用的制造技术。The main requirement of the
其他的切换方法式可被用来使光能进入或离开波导以及在波导之间传送。图30-32或图34-36的TIR切换器或图33、46与47的被引导的波切换器可被使用。图7、12与13的光栅切换器亦是可用的替代方案。前案中的替代方案(例如叉指式电极非极化性的电-光切换器)可被用来取代光栅。图8、12与13的四块切换器可被用在某些特别的构造之中,例如图9的非平面切换器168或图10与26-28的波导耦连器切换器。图2-6、14-17、19与21-23的反射切换器可与上游分流器合用以指导反射光的一部分进入一输出波导。其他的切换技术(包括在前案中的切换技术或尚未被发明的切换技术)亦可被使用,只要这些技术传送在一分配波导(或一像素波导)之中传播的功率的相当大的部分进入一像素波导(或一非平面的反射器)。H、像素切换器Other switching methods can be used to enable light energy to enter or exit waveguides and to transmit between waveguides. The TIR switches of Figures 30-32 or Figures 34-36 or the guided wave switches of Figures 33, 46 and 47 may be used. The raster switchers of Figures 7, 12 and 13 are also available alternatives. Alternatives in the prior art, such as electro-optic switches with interdigitated electrodes that are non-polarizable, can be used in place of the grating. The four-block switch of Figures 8, 12 and 13 can be used in some special configurations, such as the
像素切换器1016在平面显示器形成一个二维的阵列。像素切换器的主要要求与分配切换器要求相似之处是它在被切掉时,有几近零的损失。因此,本发明的优选实施例使用可切换的全内反射(先前已参考图30-32予以讨论)以获得所需的低损失运作。这种切换器被用来从像素波导取得光学功率并将之导入反射器波导与非平面反射器。一种替代的实施例可使用可切换的光栅反射器(先前已参考图7与图8予以讨论)。I、非平面反射器The
非平面反射器(亦被称为光学反射器装置)表示改变从上述表面而来光的传播的方向至任何方向(包括与表面成直角的分量)并因此使光离开上述表面的机构。非平面反射器的基本元件包括光能反射边界,它在与光束的路径成直角的平面中有反射率不连续性。上述非平面反射器还可包括可以散射或转换光束的波长的材料。上述非平面反射器的实例包括反射镜、散射凹点与连接光栅与波长转换荧光物镜。A non-planar reflector (also known as an optical reflector device) means a mechanism that changes the direction of propagation of light from the above-mentioned surface to any direction (including a component at right angles to the surface) and thus causes the light to leave the above-mentioned surface. The basic elements of a nonplanar reflector include a light energy reflecting boundary that has a reflectivity discontinuity in a plane at right angles to the path of the light beam. The non-planar reflectors described above may also include materials that can scatter or convert the wavelength of light beams. Examples of such non-planar reflectors include mirrors, scattering pits, and connecting gratings and wavelength-converting fluorescent objectives.
为了使一光束从像素切换器到非平面反射器而仅产生低损失,可使用一个输出波导1017(此后被称为反射器波导)。既然上述波导是很短的(最多从一个像素波导伸到相邻的一像素波导。上述反射器位置可被优选化以使被反射的背景光减到最少,藉此使对比率减到最少。若上述非平面反射器靠近上述波导,它们会对着被散射的光的较大的固体角并在上述像素产生一“闪光”或背景照明,即使在上述像素未被上述波导切换系统指定位置时。最小的闪光发生在上述像素波导的中途的镜位置,在这个位置,被上述波导散射的光的大部分已传送到上述表面波导与上述反射器的程度以下并进入上述基片。在这个位置,两个相邻的波导对上述闪光的贡献是相等的。In order to cause only low losses for a light beam from the pixel switcher to the non-planar reflector, an output waveguide 1017 (hereinafter referred to as reflector waveguide) can be used. Since the waveguides are short (at most from one pixel waveguide to an adjacent pixel waveguide), the reflector position can be optimized to minimize reflected background light, thereby minimizing contrast ratio. If the non-planar reflectors are close to the waveguide, they will subtend the larger solid angle of the scattered light and produce a "flare" or background illumination at the pixel, even when the pixel is not positioned by the waveguide switching system The smallest flicker occurs at the mirror position halfway through the pixel waveguide, where most of the light scattered by the waveguide has been transmitted below the level of the surface waveguide and the reflector and into the substrate. , the contribution of two adjacent waveguides to the above flash is equal.
图62到67显示上述非平面反射器1018的几个实施例。上述非平面反射是一种永久的结构;被制动的像素被上述像素切换器的二维阵列选择。图62描绘一TIR非平面反射器1100的剖面图,其输出通过上述基片。90°转向镜1108反射输入光束1110成为输出光束1104,通过上述基片1101而射向上述后表面1112。上述镜1108可达成完全内反射或它可做为一个良好的反射器而有一个适当的反射涂料。一层散射屏幕1026或荧光层1113可被涂在上述后表面1112上。离开上述像素切换器并入射在上述转向镜的像素光束1110在一反射器波导1017或1102中传播。上述波导使上述光束变成二维以在上述转向镜(吻合上述波导的模式)产生一光束点。在上述转向镜的周围部位之中,上述光束必必被一个波导限制,它可被限制在一平面波导(在上述晶体的表面)之中。在100%波导包装密度的情形之中,永久频道波导不可能被形成。在这种情况下,发明者希望有一个平面的波导,或输入光束1110可从上述被极化的TIR切换器直接传播而不被在上述中间区间中的波导限制。62 to 67 show several embodiments of the
上述转向镜优选是平的,上述输入光束以45°从上述反射镜反射,进入与上述晶体的表面成直角直交的基片。上述被反射的光束根据高氏光束传播原理发散以在上述基片的底面1112上产生一个光点。在上述转向镜中的一个4微米直径的光点会在一层0.5毫米厚的铌酸锂晶体的背面产生一个36微米直径的光点。The turning mirror is preferably flat, and the input beam is reflected from the mirror at 45° and enters the substrate at right angles to the surface of the crystal. The reflected light beam diverges according to the principle of Gauges beam propagation to generate a light spot on the
本发明的优选实施例将每一个像素的1/e2强度光束直径重叠在散射屏幕1026上。若基片1100太薄而无法达成这种重叠,基片1100可能被设在有适当厚度的透光的支持材料上以达成所需的重叠。上述支持材料的实例包括玻璃、塑胶与二氧化硅。换个方式,若上述镜表面1108不是平的,但有适当的曲率半径以扩张上述1/e2直径成为所需的尺寸,或若上述折镜本射有足够的粗糙度来散射光束以在上述幕1026上产生具所需的尺寸的光点,则可在较下方的铌酸锂表面形成上述1/e2的光点尺寸的重叠。另一种实施例的底面1112被涂上一层光学荧光或颜料层1113,在上述波导与非平面反射器传送光而刺激荧光层1113以后,它可以发出所需的显示器色彩。举例而言,荧光层亦除去对分离的散射屏幕的需求。The preferred embodiment of the present invention overlays the
可使用许多技艺(包括激光烧蚀、活性离子蚀刻(RIE)、活性离子束蚀刻(RIBE)、离子束研磨与湿式蚀刻)来制造图62所示的转向镜1108。发明者较喜欢的是湿式蚀刻并将在以下描述湿式蚀刻。发明者以标准的摄影刻印技术把一层铬罩移转到转向镜1108的材料上。铌酸锂层随后被泡在氢氟酸之中数个小时而温度约为80℃。请注意在蚀刻的过程中应严格限制对氢氟酸的搅拌。在蚀刻凹点的底部的低物质传送限制蚀刻速率而在边缘的蚀刻速率较快,因为在边缘的被蚀刻的离子有较高的质量传送。许多材料有一些良好的性质以沿着自然平面蚀刻,所以若被弯折的镜面与这些自然面之一对齐,结果的被蚀刻的表面将有较低的残留粗糙度。The
做为替代的技术,与上述样本同时蚀刻的罩子可以控制蚀刻壁的斜率。藉着使上述罩子的特性在上述镜的边缘倾斜,在蚀刻之中,相关的斜率可被转移到上述基片。改变上述罩子、蚀刻的组成与搅拌率,可控制特性几何形状。As an alternative technique, a mask etched at the same time as the sample described above can control the slope of the etched walls. By sloping the characteristics of the mask at the edge of the mirror, the relative slope can be transferred to the substrate during etching. The characteristic geometry can be controlled by varying the composition and stirring rate of the mask and etch described above.
使用质子交换或极化可改变将被蚀刻的区间的组成而控制每一个蚀刻凹点的形状。发明者已知在铌酸锂中的一个被质子交换的区域的蚀刻速率大于未被质子交换晶体的蚀刻速率。藉着焙烧上述被质子交换的基片,蚀刻速率随上述被交换特性横截面变化,以致蚀刻过程产生一种斜的表面。发明者可藉着调整质子交换的量与焙烧的温度而修正该表面的正确形状。The shape of each etch pit can be controlled by changing the composition of the region to be etched using proton exchange or polarization. The inventors have known that a proton-exchanged region in lithium niobate etches at a rate greater than that of non-proton-exchanged crystals. By firing the proton-exchanged substrate, the etch rate varies with the cross-section of the exchanged properties such that the etching process produces a sloped surface. The inventors can correct the correct shape of the surface by adjusting the amount of proton exchange and firing temperature.
使用脉冲激光烧蚀亦可形成上述镜。上述基片材料被一层反射材料(例如铝)遮住。被瞄准的激光与上述基片的表面之间的夹角为45°以藉着遮敝形成一个弯折的小刻面。激光可形成一个小光点(一次仅涵盖一片反射镜)或形成一条线(激光一次被扫过一列反射镜)。可选择在每一次激光脉冲中的持续时间与能量以使上述介面材料的粗糙度变成最小以产生一反射面,之后,可选择在每个激光脉冲之中的时间与能量以使上述介面材料的粗糙度变成最低以产生一面反射镜,随后,可使用氢氟酸蚀刻以使上述反射镜面平顺。The mirrors described above can also be formed using pulsed laser ablation. The substrate material is masked by a layer of reflective material such as aluminum. The angle between the aimed laser light and the surface of the substrate is 45° to form a curved facet by masking. The laser can form a small spot (covering only one mirror at a time) or a line (the laser is swept across an array of mirrors at a time). The duration and energy in each laser pulse can be chosen to minimize the roughness of the interface material to produce a reflective surface, and then the time and energy in each laser pulse can be chosen to make the interface material The roughness of is minimized to produce a mirror, which can then be etched using hydrofluoric acid to smooth the surface of the mirror.
可以采用类似的方式,使用活性离子研磨或活性离子束研磨,以形成上述反射镜。必须把被瞄准的离子源从上述样本移开一段距离,以致上述样本与激光之间的夹角为45°。这种蚀刻型式亦形成粗糙的表面,若有需要,发明者可使用氢氟酸使这粗糙面变得平顺。发明者可使用上述技术的任何结合以获得上述反射器的较佳的控制与最快的制造。In a similar manner, active ion milling or active ion beam milling can be used to form the above mirror. The aimed ion source must be moved a distance from the sample such that the angle between the sample and the laser is 45°. This type of etching also creates a rough surface, which the inventors can smooth out with hydrofluoric acid if necessary. The inventors may use any combination of the techniques described above to obtain better control and fastest fabrication of the reflectors described above.
图62所示的反射镜与波导优选被一层低折射率材料(例如氧化铝)的可透光层1106保护。上述材料有足够低的折射率而使上述反射镜对上述显示器的三种颜色的反射的角频道宽度都足以完全内反射。为被氧化铝覆盖的铌酸锂基片,入射角大于36°的光都会产生完全内反射。若上述表面1108不是一个TIR反射器,它可以是传统技术的高反射。The mirrors and waveguides shown in Fig. 62 are preferably protected by a
图63呈现非平面反射器的一种替代性实施例,其中在波导1102之中传播的光被在上述晶体之中的一个凹点散射。散射凹点1116结合上述反射镜与散射屏幕的功能。在这种实施例之中,从每一个像素而来的光被散射到上述基片之中而离开上述晶体的相反面。在优选实施例之中,被散射的光的法向锥角1114不会超过上述36°的TIR角,以便上述光的大部分离开上述基片而射向观察者。上述在较下方的面可被铺上一层不反射材料以降低因反射而产生的光能损失。Figure 63 presents an alternative embodiment of a non-planar reflector where light propagating in the
在优选实施例之中,被搅拌的湿式蚀刻过程形成上述散射凹点1116。散射凹点在其边缘是45°,以致上述被引导的光束1110被散射时其中间的被散射角与上述基片的表面之间的夹角为90°。必须把在包含上述波导与法向表面的平面中的上述凹点的凸度调整到优选的状况以获得在上述基片以外的视角的优选范围。既然上述凹点是在上述基片的表面中的圆形或椭圆形的凹点,从上述波导1102的侧边被散射的光亦在与上述部分的平面垂直的平面之中被发散。在上述基片的表面中的凹点的曲率可被调整而无关上述凸度,藉此获得大致上为正方形的像素区域。若上述凹点表面是粗糙的,上述光的散射所造成的额外的发射减少上述两个优选的曲率。既然上述被散射的光的所需锥角1114是大的,则藉着上述被搅拌的蚀刻过程(或藉着提高蚀刻的温度)可使上述凹点的表面变粗,藉此形成所需的发散的反射表面。做为一种替代性方案,发明者可使用激光或离子束烧蚀来制造上述凹点。一种附加的吸收层1168被置于基片后面以吸收低掠入射背景光而改进对比率。上述吸收层1168对正常的入射光束1104或1114的吸收低于50%的以致不会带来太高的亮度。In a preferred embodiment, a stirred wet etch process forms the aforementioned scattering pits 1116 . The scattering pits are 45° at their edges, so that when the guided
图64描绘上述非平面反射器的另一种实施例,在这种实施例之中,上述输入光束被反射至上述晶体的顶面之外。镜1126由一个反射器结构所构成,这个反射器结构包括一面平的45°斜壁与一面垂直壁,在这两面壁之间,材料从基片被移走。输入光束1110在垂直介面1122进入上述反射器结构并传播跨过上述反射器结构而从45°斜壁反射离开上述反射器结构。被反射的光束1124通过上述基片的顶面以照明上述散射屏幕。制造这种反射器结构所有的方法可与制造图62所示的结构所用的方法相同。为了使表面1126的反射有优选的效果,表面1126可被铺上一层反射涂料,例如铝。应以小于90°的角1121来供应这层反射涂料,以致表面1122被遮敝而因此未被铺上反射涂料。在优选实施例之中,法向面1122应该被铺上不反射材料,为了达到这个目的,可在实施涂料的过程中保持基片1100处于一个角以致露出表面1122。Fig. 64 depicts another embodiment of the non-planar reflector in which the input beam is reflected out of the top surface of the crystal. The
最后,样本被铺上一层透光层1106,例如二氧化硅或氧化铝。表面1126可能是粗糙的与/或弯曲的以强化从这个部分被射出的光的发散。Finally, the sample is covered with a light-
图65说明引导光离开上述晶体的平面的实施例,在其中,一个散射凹点引导光离开上述晶体的顶面。如在图64所示的情形中,输入光束1110穿透一垂直介面而进入反射器结构并散射而离开在上述被蚀刻区域相反侧上的弯曲的散射介面。被散射的光束1134(贯穿任何涂料1106)优选有Lambertian分布以提供2π球面度的全视锥。对光束的入射角与曲率的形状的要求与对进入图63所示散射凹点的光的要求是相同的。Figure 65 illustrates an embodiment of directing light away from the plane of the crystal, in which a scattering pit directs light away from the top surface of the crystal. As in the case shown in Figure 64, the
图66描绘图59所示的像素切换器1016与散射凹点1018结合的一种替代的实施例。在这种实施例中,本说明书参考图50与51予以描述的可变强度光源被用来制造一种光发射像素。在波导1402(与在图59中的像素波导1014对等)传播的光束1406入像素切换区域1420(或1400),在图66中的像素1420(或1400)与在图59中的像素切换器1016对等。若供应切换区域1420的电压被关闭,则上述光束被输出波导1408引导。然后,输出光束1410传播到下一个像素切换区域。当上述电压被启动,在切换区域1148中的二维的波导被销毁而且如前所述上述光束在平面的波导1409中传播。如图66中1441所示,上述光束在一维中自由地扩张。在离切换区域1148的最佳传播距离内,上述光束直径扩张到足以使上述光束有可观的部分经由散射凹点1018被传播出去而到达观察者。这些散射凹点可以是如本说明在以上配合图63-65所描述的凹点形状中的任何一种。图66描绘可使效率达到最大的两个散射凹点1018。这种实施例可与单一散射凹点一起工作而其代价是降低效率成为原来的一半。FIG. 66 depicts an alternate embodiment of the
对这种切换构造的一项要求是在上述波导与上述散射凹点的边之间的距离大到足以使输出光束1410不受可观的散射损失之害而同时通过散射凹点1018。这项要求建立最小的包装密度并限制这种实施例的效率。既然较小的波导宽度会使光束1411的绕射角θ较大,通过缩小波导1402的宽度,可增加上述包的密度。One requirement of this switching configuration is that the distance between the waveguide and the sides of the scattering pit be large enough for the
上述蚀刻凹点亦可被一荧光靶装置占据。任何材料,固体或液体,只要它能从光激发器光束吸收一个或更多个光子并以相同的或不同的波导1402的宽度,可增加上述包的密度。The above-mentioned etching pits may also be occupied by a fluorescent target device. Any material, solid or liquid, that can absorb one or more photons from the photo-stimulator beam with the same or different width of the
上述蚀刻凹点亦可被一荧光靶装置占据。任何材料,固体或液体,只要它能从光激发器光束吸收一个或更多个光子并以相同的或不同的波长再发射光能,都可做为荧光靶装置。对三色显示器而言,每一种颜色可能被产生在不同蚀刻凹点中不同的荧光靶中。优选在一种系统中使用照明的单一波长以激发全部的荧光靶。包含蚀刻凹点的荧光靶具有光学构造,以使上述入射光束的大部分被上述荧光靶吸收,且上述输入光束的乘余部分不从上述凹点反射或向着观察者。以上所讨论的对散射凹点曲率和粗糙度的限制与荧光靶凹点的构造与粗糙度无关。在优选实施例中,一个反射器被并用在上述荧光体后面而远离观察者,以致向后的荧光被回复反射到观察者。The above-mentioned etching pits may also be occupied by a fluorescent target device. Any material, solid or liquid, that absorbs one or more photons from the photo-exciter beam and re-emits light energy at the same or a different wavelength can be used as a fluorescent target device. For a three-color display, each color may be produced in a different phosphor target in a different etch pit. It is preferred to use a single wavelength of illumination in one system to excite all fluorescent targets. A fluorescent target comprising etched pits is optically configured such that a substantial portion of the incident beam is absorbed by the fluorescent target and a remainder of the input beam is not reflected from the pits or toward a viewer. The constraints on the curvature and roughness of the scattering pits discussed above are independent of the configuration and roughness of the fluorescent target pits. In a preferred embodiment, a reflector is incorporated behind the phosphor away from the observer, so that the backward fluorescence is reflected back to the observer.
直接照明与荧光靶装置亦可被用来产生上述三色显示器。例如,一种荧光靶可被一种色光激发(例如蓝色光)以产生红色光或蓝色光。因此,蓝色光可与在两个荧光体中形成的其他两种色光一起被直接显示(使用图62至67所示的非平面镜之一)。换种方式,当一荧光体被蓝色光或红色光或有第三种频率的光束激发而产生绿色光束,红色光束与蓝色光束直接被显示。Direct illumination and fluorescent target arrangements can also be used to produce the three-color displays described above. For example, a fluorescent target can be excited by a color of light (eg, blue light) to produce red or blue light. Thus, blue light can be displayed directly (using one of the non-planar mirrors shown in Figures 62 to 67) together with the other two colored lights formed in the two phosphors. In another way, when a phosphor is excited by blue light or red light or a light beam with a third frequency to generate green light beams, the red light beams and blue light beams are directly displayed.
本发明的一种替代实施例包括在上述像素位置的向上转换荧光体靶材料或向上转换材料使用。红外线被传送与切换而通过本发明的波导到达上述像素位置,这些像素位置涂上或充填波长向上转换材料,在此被称为向上转换媒介或向上转换器。上述向上转换材料包括标准荧光体,例如晶体为主的稀土族离子、氧化硫、染料与添加稀土的玻璃。这些媒介透过直接激发作用把红外线转换成可见光,使用单一或多种波长,通过吸收两个或更多个红外线光子。在低强度,被发射的强度因此正比于激光强度的二次方或较高次方。在上述荧光体被饱和时(通常在高于数瓦特/平方厘米),像素的强度可能直接与激光功率成正比。荧光体(例如在晶核中的Yb3+-Er3+,Yb3+-Ho3+,Yb3+-Tm3+)是可以用红外线产生蓝色光、绿色光与红色光的向上转换方案的一些实施例。人们发现在这些荧光体中的红外线-到-可见光转换效率超过10%且激发频带与市面上的红外线激光二极管波长重叠良好。如上所述,上述激发光束可在空间上和/或暂时地倍增以在上述像素上会聚。An alternative embodiment of the present invention includes the use of up-converting phosphor target materials or up-converting materials at the pixel locations described above. Infrared light is transmitted and switched through the waveguide of the present invention to the pixel locations described above, which are coated or filled with a wavelength up-conversion material, referred to herein as an up-conversion medium or up-converter. The above-mentioned up-conversion materials include standard phosphors, such as crystal-based rare earth ions, sulfur oxides, dyes, and rare earth-doped glasses. These media convert infrared to visible light through direct excitation, using single or multiple wavelengths, by absorbing two or more infrared photons. At low intensities, the emitted intensity is thus proportional to the second or higher power of the laser intensity. When the aforementioned phosphor is saturated (typically above a few watts/cm2), the intensity of the pixel may be directly proportional to the laser power. Phosphors (such as Yb 3+ -Er 3+ , Yb 3+ -Ho 3+ , Yb 3+ -Tm 3+ in the crystal nucleus) are up-conversion solutions that can generate blue, green and red light from infrared light some examples of . It was found that the infrared-to-visible light conversion efficiency in these phosphors exceeds 10% and the excitation band overlaps well with commercially available infrared laser diode wavelengths. As mentioned above, the excitation beam may be spatially and/or temporally multiplied to converge on the pixel.
在本发明中,红外线被引导至其中有向上转换媒介的特定像素位置。可使用标准的涂层技术(例如旋转涂层或溅射)与造形技术(例如遮敝蚀刻)以安置上述向上转换媒介。在本发明的一种实施例中,红外线通过波导被传送至像素位置。在此,上述波导结束在一些区域或凹部中(上述向上转换媒介被放在这些区域中,在这些区域中光的强度最高。这些区域或凹部可被施以涂料以修改表面反射性,从而改进对进入上述荧光体的激发光的引导以及改变从上述荧光体离开的发射角。换一种方式,非平面反射器可被用来反射上述被引导的红外线到上述显示器的被蚀刻或未被蚀刻的表面,在此上述荧光体被做成一连续点或均匀表面层,其像素尺寸被在上述表面的被折射的红外线束的尺寸决定。对全部的实施例而言,可增加一不透明膜以充填非像素区域以更好地确定像素区域并消除红外线与可见光背景散射。In the present invention, infrared rays are directed to specific pixel locations where an up-converting medium is located. Standard coating techniques (such as spin coating or sputtering) and patterning techniques (such as mask etching) can be used to place the above-mentioned up-conversion media. In one embodiment of the invention, infrared light is delivered to the pixel locations through waveguides. Here, the above-mentioned waveguide ends in some areas or recesses (the above-mentioned up-conversion medium is placed in these areas, and the intensity of light is highest in these areas. These areas or recesses can be applied with paint to modify the surface reflectivity, thereby improving Guidance of the excitation light entering the phosphor and changing the emission angle away from the phosphor. Alternatively, a non-planar reflector can be used to reflect the guided infrared to the etched or unetched portion of the display surface, where the above-mentioned phosphor is made into a continuous point or uniform surface layer, and its pixel size is determined by the size of the refracted infrared beam on the above-mentioned surface. For all embodiments, an opaque film can be added to Fills non-pixel areas to better define pixel areas and remove IR and visible background scatter.
向上转换器需要两个或更多个光子以产生可见光,且因为上述激发光在某个像素位置中被限制最多,且在这个像素位置中上述激发光的强度最大,从上述波导离开的可见光背景散射与切换损失被强力地压制,导致显示器的高对比值。既然在这些媒介中的激发程度相当高,需要任何激光波长稳定。因为上述向上转换媒介的照明是不相干的,所以与激光斑点相关的问题亦被消除。引导红外线通过波导的相关的优点是大多数的电-光活性材料在近红外线中有较高的损坏临界值并因此可容忍比可见光大的红外线强度。The up-converter requires two or more photons to generate visible light, and because the excitation light is most confined in a certain pixel location where the intensity of the excitation light is greatest, the visible light background exiting the waveguide Scattering and switching losses are strongly suppressed, resulting in high contrast values of the display. Since the degree of excitation in these media is quite high, any laser wavelength stabilization is required. Problems associated with laser speckle are also eliminated because the illumination of the above-mentioned up-conversion medium is incoherent. A related advantage of guiding infrared light through waveguides is that most electro-optic active materials have a higher damage threshold in the near infrared and thus can tolerate greater infrared intensities than visible light.
一种或更多种荧光体与/或颜料可被用在上述显示器中以产生单色显示器或彩色显示器。激光激发可配合单一波长光束或配合多激光与激光波长一起工作。单一荧光体可发射多种色彩,这取决于激发它的光束的强度、时间与波长。因此根据射入包括这种荧光体的像素的交叉产物强度,可选择包含这种荧光体的像素的颜色。例如,若一个向上转换媒介被来自光束1的两个IR光子的激发而发出蓝色光且被分别来自光束1与2的光子的激发而发出绿色光,则上述蓝色光的强度与绿色光的强度分别正比于I1 2与I1×I2,其中I1与I2分别是光束1与光束2的强度。这种方式可消除发明者对倍频器的需要,直接从红(AlGaInp)二极管激光器产生红光。One or more phosphors and/or pigments may be used in the above-described displays to produce monochrome or color displays. Laser excitation can work with a single wavelength beam or with multiple lasers and laser wavelengths. A single phosphor can emit multiple colors, depending on the intensity, timing and wavelength of the light beam that excites it. The color of a pixel comprising such a phosphor can thus be selected according to the intensity of the crossover product incident on the pixel comprising such phosphor. For example, if an up-conversion medium is excited by two IR photons from
在全部的显示器实施方案中,上述激发激光可为连续波(CW)或脉冲,只要脉冲重复频率是上述像素切换率的倍数(或脉冲重复频率比像素切换率高很多)即可。然而以非线性的被激发的荧光体而言,使用脉冲激光在转换效率方面有优点。脉冲激发亦允许进一步暂时控制像素强度与色彩。荧光体有中间能级,这些能级在开始单光子激发以后可维持数微秒,因此允许定时多路传输以控制像素辐射率。在荧光激发方案中,原先被一个或更多个红外线光子产生的能级可直接被提升到较高的能级,这种较高的能级随后可发射(或缓和并发射)可见光,或它们可在初始激发以后缓和至较低的能级且接着被激发成其他的能级(这种能级以不同的波长发射,或缓和并发射)。脉冲激发亦允许较高的峰值功率以驱动上述媒介进入饱和,藉此缓和信号-到-光的处理要求。In all display embodiments, the excitation laser can be continuous wave (CW) or pulsed, as long as the pulse repetition frequency is a multiple of the above pixel switching rate (or the pulse repetition frequency is much higher than the pixel switching rate). In the case of non-linear excited phosphors, however, the use of pulsed lasers has advantages in terms of conversion efficiency. Pulse excitation also allows further temporal control of pixel intensity and color. Phosphors have intermediate energy levels that persist for microseconds after initiation of single-photon excitation, thus allowing timed multiplexing to control pixel radiance. In the fluorescence excitation scheme, the energy level originally generated by one or more infrared photons can be directly raised to a higher energy level, which can then emit (or moderate and emit) visible light, or their Can be relaxed to a lower energy level after initial excitation and then excited to another energy level (this energy level emits at a different wavelength, or relaxes and emits). Pulsed excitation also allows higher peak powers to drive the medium into saturation, thereby easing signal-to-optical processing requirements.
仅使用这种荧光体靶的彩色显示器需要至少一种激光与具不同发射波长的多个荧光体靶、多种激光与具多种激发与发射波长的单一荧光体靶、或多种激光与荧光体靶。在彩色显示器方阵中的多个荧光体靶可被结合成单一位置而被单一波导控制或被分成相邻的区域而分别被不同的波导控制以形成结合后的单一像素元件。Color displays using only such phosphor targets require at least one laser and multiple phosphor targets with different emission wavelengths, multiple lasers and a single phosphor target with multiple excitation and emission wavelengths, or multiple lasers and phosphors body target. Multiple phosphor targets in a color display array can be combined into a single location controlled by a single waveguide or divided into adjacent regions controlled by different waveguides to form a combined single pixel element.
在基于荧光靶的彩色显示器的优选实施方案中,为三种原色分别使用一种激光以激发一种荧光体。波导与切换结构可使上述三种激光波长的任一透过分开的分配阵列而到达它们的荧光像素靶,但这造成的有效包装置密度为单色显示器的有效包装密度。优选的方法是通过相同的分配阵列分配多种激光波长并选择仅被一种波长或一种波长组合激发的荧光体以产生红、蓝、绿色光。上述激光可被图61所示的光束合成器结合成单一波长或被图30所示的TIR切换器及时倍增入一共用线路中。In a preferred embodiment of a color display based on fluorescent targets, one laser is used for each of the three primary colors to excite one phosphor. The waveguide and switching structures allow any of the three laser wavelengths to pass through separate distribution arrays to their phosphor pixel targets, but this results in an effective packing density of that of a monochrome display. The preferred approach is to distribute multiple laser wavelengths through the same distribution array and select phosphors excited by only one wavelength or a combination of wavelengths to generate red, blue and green light. The above lasers can be combined into a single wavelength by the beam combiner shown in FIG. 61 or multiplied in time into a common line by the TIR switcher shown in FIG. 30 .
图67描述上述非平面反射器的另一种替代性实施方案。在这种实施方案中,一个非平面耦连器1146被用来使像素光束1144的方向大致上垂直于上述基层表面。单模式输入波导1102可有绝热膨胀1142而其耦连多模式波导1143,其中仅有最低次模式被激发。被放在上述多模式波导之上的永久的光栅1146被相位匹配以使光散射而垂直于上述晶体的表面。上述光栅是进行折射的光栅结构,其中利用任何已知的方法,在上述波导的核心或表层中,制造反射不连续情况式的折射率而产生上述光栅。例如,可通过在上述波导核心或表层中的有形的离子移植过程,或通过如上述表层的有形的介电结构的安排,形成反射系数的不连续性。若以多空间模式来激发上述多模式波导,上述光栅的周期可延着其长度被调整以允许对上述模式的大部分的相位匹配,藉此改进耦连效率。上述光栅的强度可沿着其长度改变,以致被散射的光束的强度可被调整成一种所需的形式。Figure 67 depicts another alternative embodiment of the non-planar reflector described above. In this embodiment, a non-planar coupler 1146 is used to direct the pixel beam 1144 substantially perpendicular to the substrate surface. The single-
可通过蚀刻上述基片的表面或波导的表层而制造上述光栅,在这种情况中,发明者可通过沿着光栅长度改变被蚀刻沟调制的深度,获得可变的光栅强度。发明者可通过改变跨过上述光栅的每一周期中的掩模的负荷循环而得到上述要求。上述蚀刻优选是不被搅拌的湿式蚀刻,以便在较窄的区域中较低质量的传送造成较浅的蚀刻。此外,多模式波导的宽度被选来配合上述光栅的长度,以致被绕射离开上述光栅的光束的尺寸与发散度大体上在两种尺寸中相同。如上述所述,一散射屏幕可被置于离上述非平面光栅镜一段所需的距离处,产生上述照明所需的发散。上述光栅优选有透明材料1106(例如二氧化硅)所制成的保护层。为制造上述光栅,发明者可用直接写技术(例如全像摄影或e-光束石印术)以掩模上述基片。The grating can be fabricated by etching the surface of the substrate or the surface of the waveguide, in which case the inventors can obtain variable grating strength by varying the depth modulated by the etched groove along the length of the grating. The inventors have achieved this by varying the duty cycle of the mask in each period across the grating. The etch described above is preferably a wet etch without agitation so that the lower quality transfer results in a shallower etch in narrower areas. Furthermore, the width of the multimode waveguide is chosen to match the length of the grating such that the size and divergence of the beam diffracted off the grating is substantially the same in both dimensions. As noted above, a diffusing screen may be placed at a desired distance from the non-planar lenticular mirror to produce the desired divergence of the illumination. The above-mentioned grating preferably has a protective layer made of a
为了减少闪光并增加显示器对比率,可使用折射器或吸收器。一个光学折射器或吸收器可被放在上述非平面反射器围围以折射背景光,否则背景光会打到上述反射器上并造成闪光,降低对比率。每一个折射器或吸收器都作了优化安排,以使它至少遮住一非平面反射器。既然上述背景光的主要来源是波导的漏失,许多背景光与在像素波导1014中的光以相同的方向传播。上述折射器或吸收器因此至少被安排在上述背景光的主传播方向的上游,以到上述背光的主要部分被阻挡。图68所呈现的像素区域1151有一个光学的折射器或吸收器1153,光学折射器或吸收器1153围住非平面镜结构1152与其反射器波导1149的一端。如上所述,在像素波导1147中的光被切换而进入在像素切换区域1148中的反射器波导1149。折射器或吸收器区域1153深到足以遮住整个非平面反射器区域1152。若它是吸收器层,上述吸收器的吸收性与厚度被调整以使向着上述非平面反射器前进的光大幅度衰减。上述折射器与吸收器的设计依赖上述非平面反射器的方向,因为它们都不应折射上述背景光进入影像方向。上述折射器被设计来以相反的方向折射光线离开上述影像。To reduce glare and increase display contrast, refractors or absorbers can be used. An optical refractor or absorber can be placed around the non-planar reflector to refract background light that would otherwise hit the reflector and cause flare, reducing the contrast ratio. Each refractor or absorber is optimally arranged so that it shadows at least one non-planar reflector. Since the main source of background light described above is waveguide leakage, much of the background light travels in the same direction as the light in the
图69描绘一种光学折射器1157,其折射上述背景光离开设备1155的表面。在这个例子中,非平面的反射器1152被安排在一方位以引导上述影像光通过图62与63所示的基片。折射器1157类似图64与65所描绘的非平面反射器1130或1140的设计。从上述折射器的垂直面1154的折射最好减至最小,因为背景光1156的任何被反射的万分都可导致在任何之前的像素一的闪光。弯曲的表面1158被涂上涂料以反射并/或吸收透过上述垂直面的光。以这种方式,无任何光可穿透折射器1157。通过把光束折射器1157做成比非平面反射器1152深且宽,并通过把上述反射器放在其阴影中(但不可太近而干扰上述被切换的显示器光束对上述反射器的照明),把在相邻的像素上的闪光减到最少。不透光层1168被铺在上述基片的后面以减少在该基片中传播的背景光。因为其短路径长度,显示器光束1114仅部分在不透光层1168中被吸收,因此,上述背景光(斜向的传播)在通过上述吸收器的较长路径长度中被强力的吸收。FIG. 69 depicts an
图70是一个光学折射器1161的剖面图,光学折射器1161折射上述背景光而进入设备1163的基片。当非平面反射器1152被安排在一个方位以引导影像光1124离开设备1163的表面时,可以使用这种构造。折射器1161类似图64与65所描绘的非平面反射器1100与1120的设计。再次,非平面反射器1152被放在折射器1161的阴影1159中,且可以使用一后表面吸收层。FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view of an
图71描绘一光学吸收器1166(被放在一非平面反射器1152的上游)的一剖面1167。上述吸收器的全部光学密度与长度必须高到足以大幅度减少通过上述吸收器的任何光波的强度。上述吸收器相对于上述基片的折射变化率应低以避免在上述完整的基片与上述吸收器区域之间的介面上的反射。通过定出上述吸收器区域的输入面的方向而依远离显示器方向和其他像素方向的方向反射,发明者可将残留反射的效应减至最低。FIG. 71 depicts a cross section 1167 of an
以体内扩散的方式把一种吸收材料(例如铬)放在所需的区域,或把任何光密材料放入上述折射器/吸收器体内(被做在上述基片表面中),可以制造上述吸收器层。The above-mentioned absorber layer.
光学折射器或吸收器可被放在上述分配波导和上述像素阵列之间。上述折射器/吸收器不应与上述像素波导交错,以致它们留下一些间隙,被上述分配波导产生的背景光可通过这些间隙。然而这些折射器/吸收器任一可被倾斜一个钝角到上述分配波导,以致它们的阴影彼此重叠而无间隙。被上述分配波导产生的背景光的剩余部分通过盯这之基片而冲击其后面或远侧。可构造在后面的吸收器平面以致斜向传播的背景光可有效的被消除。上述基片的远侧边可以被涂上不反射材料(和/或吸收材料),以致上述背景光从上述基片被吸收,在此背景光被有效的捕捉与吸收。Optical refractors or absorbers may be placed between the above-mentioned distribution waveguides and the above-mentioned pixel array. The refractors/absorbers should not be interleaved with the pixel waveguides such that they leave gaps through which background light generated by the distribution waveguides can pass. However any of these refractors/absorbers can be angled at an obtuse angle to the distribution waveguide so that their shadows overlap each other without gaps. The remainder of the ambient light generated by the distribution waveguide passes through the substrate to impinge on the rear or far side thereof. The absorber plane behind can be configured such that obliquely propagating background light is effectively eliminated. The far side of the substrate may be coated with a non-reflective material (and/or absorbing material) such that the background light is absorbed from the substrate where the background light is efficiently captured and absorbed.
从上述波导漏出的光的一部分从上述基片的相反侧1112反弹回来造成闪光问题。在未使用面1112做为散射层或被涂上一层荧光或颜料的光接触层的实施例中,供应一层吸收涂料到该表面以减少闪光是有利的。图63、64、65、69与70描绘这样的吸收层1168。然而上述涂料的相关的系数改变必须是低的以使从上述介面离开的反射减到最少。更进一步,当显示方向是穿过上述基片,上述显示光不应被大量衰减。在上述基片的后面,使用一种体内扩散铬层,可同时达到这三个目的。上述铬体扩散层能强力地吸收在整个可见光区中的光而仅在其吸收强度中有很小的光谱变化。若上述铌酸锂基片的底层以体内扩散的方式在第一个8微米被铺上10%重量的铬层,在整个可见光光谱内显示光的吸收大略为损失6%的光,这个损失很小,可被忽略。然而上述背景光(在晶片平面的3°内传播)通过约300微米的吸收器且被衰减约90%。所需的铬层的制造需要在上述背面上的约500nm的铬的蒸发,接着以约1100℃烤约30分钟。可根据在其他的制造参数中的补偿调整,在任一侧以二或三来改变这些数字。A portion of the light leaking from the waveguide bounces back from the
最后,若显示光如图64、65与67所示的,从上述基片的表面被抽出,就希望在整片表面涂上完全不透明的材料(在低损失缓冲材料之上),仅在上述非平面反射器留下开口。此举的优点是可从上述反射器之间的区域(例如波导与切换器)消除闪光。J、电极Finally, if display light is extracted from the surface of the substrate as shown in FIGS. Non-planar reflectors leave openings. This has the advantage of eliminating glare from the areas between the aforementioned reflectors, such as waveguides and switches. J. Electrode
图72描绘供本发明的优选实施方案所用的像素电极结构的示意图。每一个电极1164由多个像素部分所组成,每一个像素部分类似图34所描绘的电极922,这些像素部分全部被耦连在一个阵列中,这个阵列阻挡波导1014或1162。在图72中,上述阵列是一线形列且许多电极被布成彼此接近以形成激发电极的一方阵。每一个像素电极被安排在形成一TIR介面的一极化边界之上并在一个被切换的波导部分之上。此外,每一个电极延伸超过上述极化边界而进入可形成供相邻的像素所用的第二电极的一个被延伸的部分。上述被极化的区域、上述反射器波导与上述非平面反射器都未被描绘在图72中。一对电极被用来激励在一行中的全部TIR反射器。上述反射器的大部分可在一个被指定的时间被接地而仅留下一个被接到一个驱动电压上,在这种情形中,被激发的电极与相邻的两个电极决定电场。这个电极有一种不规则的结构,以致在单一行中的切换器的全部都电气联通而相邻的电极没有交叉。Figure 72 depicts a schematic diagram of a pixel electrode structure for use in a preferred embodiment of the present invention. Each
为了降低从在上述面板表面上的电极而来的无线电波的产生,添加一片减少RF的接地板。为了实现这个目的,上述基片的被处理的表面被涂上高导电能力的一层分隔材料。若上述非平面反射器指导上述光离开上述基片的顶面,则上述分隔材料必须也是透光的或在上述非平面反射器的位置有孔。上述分隔材料可被做成比上述电极之间隔更薄以减少电容且被涂上一层导电材料,这层导电材料形成一接地平面。做为另一种替代性方案,上述导电材料可为透光的,例如铟-锡-氧化物。K、电子的控制In order to reduce the generation of radio waves from the electrodes on the above-mentioned panel surface, a ground plate for reducing RF is added. In order to achieve this, the treated surface of the aforementioned substrate is coated with a highly conductive layer of separating material. If the non-planar reflector directs the light away from the top surface of the substrate, then the spacer material must also be light transmissive or have holes at the location of the non-planar reflector. The spacer material can be made thinner than the space between the electrodes to reduce capacitance and coated with a conductive material that forms a ground plane. As another alternative, the above-mentioned conductive material may be light-transmissive, such as indium-tin-oxide. K. Electronic control
经特殊设计的电子元件将被用来驱动上述显示器。本发明的优选实施方案所需要的电子元件被分类成四组:(1)激光二极管驱动器与光功率控制、(2)调制器、(3)波导导向电子元件与(4)中央控制器。Specially designed electronic components will be used to drive the above displays. The electronics required for the preferred embodiment of the invention are categorized into four groups: (1) laser diode drivers and optical power control, (2) modulators, (3) waveguide steering electronics, and (4) central controller.
上述激光二极管驱动器负责为红、绿、蓝色光源输出维持一恒定的水平。若上述激光本身被调制,功率的恒定水平表示在特定的灰度激发中的功率水平。发明者需要约两伏特的电压以启动上述半导体二极管激光器,而所需的电流依赖所需的输出功率,它是上述显示屏幕的尺寸与照明强度的一个函数。光敏二极管被用来测量在全部三个二极管激光器波长(以及任何被倍频的波长)与任何重要点(例如在整体的波长调制器之后)的功率。上述控制电子元件将定期地采取上述二极管激光器的最大输出功率并调整上述最大供应电流以维持它们的输出功率不受任何缓慢的老化效应的影响。因为必须使在上述显示器的工作中的功率测量一致,所以上述功能被上述中央控制器传递(且可能真正在上述中央控制器中被完成)。上述激光驱动器亦可控制上述二极管激光器的光频(与它们的倍频器的接受度有关)。若上述倍频器的激光频率或中央频率漂移,则上述反馈光栅的中央波长被作与该倍频器的中央波长相关的调整,直到最大的被倍增的功率为最优为止。若上述激光是以一种连续的未被调制的电流驱动,相对的频率可被一反馈回路控制。若上述激光功率被调制,上述频率控制器必将更复杂,因为必须完成上述频率感应而不显著的干扰调制。在后面的例子中,频率控制最好在“死”时间被完成(当激光不被显示,例如在显示屏幕的连续的线或框之间)。当想要小于最大值的亮度时,以一减光器控制调整进入三个激光二极管的全部电流。此外,若在不同的波长的功率的比例不是优选的,上述激光二极管可相对彼此被一种浓度与色度控制与/或第二反馈回路调整。The laser diode driver described above is responsible for maintaining a constant level for the red, green and blue light source outputs. If the above-mentioned laser light itself is modulated, a constant level of power represents the power level in a particular gray-scale excitation. The inventors need about two volts to turn on the semiconductor diode laser, and the required current depends on the required output power, which is a function of the size and illumination intensity of the display screen. Photodiodes are used to measure power at all three diode laser wavelengths (and any wavelengths that are frequency doubled) and at any point of interest (such as after the integral wavelength modulator). The control electronics will periodically assume the maximum output power of the diode lasers and adjust the maximum supply current to maintain their output power from any slow aging effects. Since it is necessary to reconcile power measurements in the operation of the displays, the functions described above are delivered (and possibly actually performed in) the central controller. The laser driver can also control the optical frequency of the diode lasers (related to the acceptance of their frequency doublers). If the laser frequency or central frequency of the frequency doubler drifts, the central wavelength of the feedback grating is adjusted in relation to the central wavelength of the frequency doubler until the maximum multiplied power is optimal. If the laser is driven with a continuous unmodulated current, the relative frequency can be controlled by a feedback loop. If the laser power is modulated, the frequency controller must be more complicated because the frequency sensing must be done without significant disturbing modulation. In the latter example, frequency control is preferably done during "dead" times (when the laser light is not being displayed, eg between consecutive lines or boxes on the display screen). When less than maximum brightness is desired, the overall current into the three laser diodes is adjusted with a dimmer control. Furthermore, if the ratio of power at different wavelengths is not preferred, the laser diodes can be adjusted relative to each other by a concentration and chromaticity control and/or a second feedback loop.
三个调制器(一个调制器处理一种显示器)控制在跨过上述显示器的全部像素中的功率与颜色。这些调制器的最佳构造是一个调制器配上一条色彩信道。既然本发明的优选实施方案使用具非线性电压-反射性关系的电-光调制器(图30的技术)每一位所需的电压是从一个检索表决定。然而既然上述电压-反射性关系在它的范围中的大部分都趋近系数的灰色阶强度,上述调制器在电压与灰色程度之间提供一种几近线性的关系。上述显示器的像素连续被扫描,每一个色彩调制器同时提供适当的强度到它在每一个像素的色彩成分。在本发明的优选实施例中,还有第三调制器,这个第三调制器被称为偏压调制器且调制被结合的三色光的强度。上述偏压调制器的目的是补偿在激光与像素之间的波导的变化的长度的损失。可根据检索表补偿资料(从波导长度变化分析而得)以获得第三调制器。亦可从对一个被指定的生产单元的测量推导而得上述检索表资料以允许对因为对称与不对称效果(包括光学的缺点)而产生的损失的不规则性的补偿。换一种方式,可在上述三种色彩信道(从上述影像调制器分离)的每种色彩信道中的独立调制器完成上述偏压调制,或在上述影像色彩调制器中与上述影像调制器结合。Three modulators (one for each display) control power and color in all pixels across the display. The best configuration of these modulators is one modulator with one color channel. Since the preferred embodiment of the present invention uses electro-optical modulators with a nonlinear voltage-reflectance relationship (the technique of FIG. 30) the voltage required for each bit is determined from a look-up table. However, since the voltage-reflectivity relationship approaches the gray scale intensity of the coefficient over most of its range, the modulator provides an almost linear relationship between voltage and gray level. The pixels of the display are scanned in succession, with each color modulator simultaneously providing the appropriate intensity to its color components at each pixel. In a preferred embodiment of the invention there is also a third modulator, this third modulator is called a bias modulator and modulates the intensity of the combined three-color light. The purpose of the bias modulator described above is to compensate for the loss of the varying length of the waveguide between the laser light and the pixel. The data (obtained from waveguide length variation analysis) can be compensated according to the look-up table to obtain the third modulator. The above key data can also be derived from measurements on a given production unit to allow compensation for loss of irregularities due to symmetry and asymmetry effects (including optical imperfections). Alternatively, the bias voltage modulation described above can be performed in separate modulators in each of the three color channels (separate from the image modulator described above), or in combination with the image modulator in the image color modulator described above .
上述波导导向电子元件控制上述切换器执行顺序。在上述分配波导中传播的光,以具有80Hz帧速率的简单的VGA结构所用的24.6MHz的像素速率,被一个接一个地切换到上述像素(行)波导中。被启动的行电极决定在扫描列时哪一行像素被照亮。行的切换相对较慢,对于简单的VGA结构大约为38.4KHZ。因为短的分分布电极的电容远低于长的像素电极,上述分配控制器已被选来以最速的速率切换,使上述显示器所需的驱动电流减到最小。这就是为什么优选用分配电极来切换上述格子。较高电容像素行电极以低速率工作。两种控制所用的切换序列优选是连续的,虽然以类似的控制亦可实现替代性的行扫描。The above-mentioned waveguide-guiding electronic components control the execution order of the above-mentioned switches. Light propagating in the above-mentioned distribution waveguides is switched one by one into the above-mentioned pixel (row) waveguides at a pixel rate of 24.6 MHz for a simple VGA architecture with a frame rate of 80 Hz. The row electrode that is activated determines which row of pixels is illuminated when scanning a column. Line switching is relatively slow, about 38.4KHZ for a simple VGA configuration. Because the capacitance of short distribution electrodes is much lower than that of long pixel electrodes, the distribution controller has been selected to switch at the fastest rate, minimizing the drive current required for the display. This is why the distribution electrodes are preferably used to switch the above grid. Higher capacitance pixel row electrodes operate at low rates. The switching sequences used for both controls are preferably sequential, although alternative row scanning could also be achieved with similar controls.
上述中央控制器最好有微处理能力且负责协调上述电子元件模数的功能。它优选有控制线,以致相同的电子元件模数可以被使用来显示不同的格式,例如VGA(640×480)、800×600、1024×768、1600×1288、HDTV、等等。若像素的数量小于被实施在特定显示器中的像素的数量,在范围外的像素不被激励。随着更高像素计算显示设备上市,相同的电子驱动器仍可被用来驱动它们,最多绑住几条输入控制线。L、扩散式屏幕The above-mentioned central controller preferably has micro-processing capability and is responsible for coordinating the functions of the above-mentioned electronic component modules. It preferably has control lines so that the same electronics modulus can be used to display different formats such as VGA (640x480), 800x600, 1024x768, 1600x1288, HDTV, etc. If the number of pixels is less than the number of pixels implemented in a particular display, pixels outside the range are not activated. As higher pixel computing display devices hit the market, the same electronic drivers can still be used to drive them, tying up a few input control lines. L. Diffusion screen
扩散器1026是分散表面,可使屏幕有2π弧度的优选大型立体视角。自图62中镜面非平面反射器反射的光束,从包含反射器的表面即被分开,一直分开到其抵达扩散器1026为止。其分开的程度由像素的距离而定,即相邻像素须重叠百分之三十以上,如此形成连续影像。此扩散表面可以是包含波导基片的后表面1112,或是一种分开物质如置于或贴合在基片上的硅二极管。屏幕表面粗糙化以形成大小分布的分散颗粒,分布应达到所需的角扩散分配。The
如图63所示,在优选实施例中,非平面反射器是非镜面分散器,而非平面反射器的阵列1116构成屏幕。如此,则扩散式屏幕并非必须的。在此情形下1116构成像素,并将光线在朗伯强度范围大致地分散至2π弧度的立体视角中。As shown in Figure 63, in a preferred embodiment, the non-planar reflector is a non-specular diffuser and the array 1116 of non-planar reflectors constitutes the screen. In this way, the diffusion screen is not necessary. In this case 1116 make up the pixels and disperse the light rays roughly into a stereoscopic view of 2π radians in the Lambertian intensity range.
为了某些应用希望将立体角窄化至显示器光线消失。对一个给定的显示器光光能而言,当从显示器包括的角度区域观看时,集中光能可改善亮度。举例来说,当需要保存电池光能时,以窄化显示器立体角保持亮度来降低激光驱动光能,是一种有用的权宜之计。M、控制斑纹For some applications it is desirable to narrow the solid angle to the point where the display light disappears. For a given display light energy, concentrating the light energy improves brightness when viewed from an angular area encompassed by the display. For example, reducing laser drive light energy by narrowing the display solid angle to preserve brightness is a useful stopgap measure when battery light energy needs to be conserved. M. Control markings
斑纹是一种可观察到的现象,自扩散表面反射或传播而使空间中连贯的激光形成一种细颗粒的影像。因为干涉使得一激光均匀照明的光碟出现亮暗区域的斑纹,此显示器中个别斑纹的尺寸因小的像素尺寸而较瞳孔为大,就完美连贯而论,当观察者移动头部,像素随机地改变,每一个像素有其本身的独立斑纹组能产生像素百分之百的调制。这样的视觉感受是一种扭曲的显示器,观看得不舒适,已有数种已知的现有技术能消除斑纹现象,其大部分技术是将斑纹组在空间中移动至均匀化。Speckle is an observable phenomenon in which coherent laser light in space forms a fine-grained image reflecting or propagating from a diffuse surface. Because interference causes a uniformly illuminated disc with a laser to appear as speckles of light and dark areas, the size of individual speckles in this display is larger than the pupil due to the small pixel size, and in terms of perfect coherence, when the viewer moves the head, the pixels randomly Alternately, each pixel has its own independent speckle group that produces 100 percent modulation of the pixel. Such a visual experience is a distorted display, which is uncomfortable to watch. There are several known prior art techniques to eliminate the speckle phenomenon, most of which are to move the speckle group in space to be uniform.
有几种方式可以消除斑纹在知觉上的冲击,首先,若激光以单一长度频率的模式工作,激光的波长可被一种少于50毫秒下改变斑纹穿透超过一斑纹区的比率扫描之。其次,激光可以多重长度频率的模式操作,每一长度模式在组合其他长度模式时产生不同的斑纹,在不同模式间,因不同频率、不同模式的振荡干涉下,交错斑纹亦形成,通常其速度远较眼睛所见快,这些交错斑纹完全以单一的情形被察觉。被斑纹本身干扰所形成的斑纹在空间是稳定的,但其波峰与波谷的出现为随机的,在多重模式下,这些斑纹重叠于眼界中,且随着模式数量的增加而快速地平均开来。在此情形下,眼睛仅察觉单一光区。第三、显示器可被设计成使用多重模式波导而非单一模式波导,因为每一个波导模式有一不同空间分配,其形成不同的斑纹组,大约十组波导模式即足以缓和斑纹问题。优选实施例使用一多重长度模式可见激光来减小斑纹现象。N、分配阵列的分层化There are several ways to eliminate the perceptual impact of speckles. First, if the laser is operated in a single-length frequency mode, the laser wavelength can be scanned at a rate that changes the speckle penetration over a speckle area in less than 50 milliseconds. Secondly, the laser can operate in multiple length and frequency modes. Each length mode produces different speckles when combined with other length modes. Between different modes, due to the oscillation interference of different frequencies and different modes, interlaced speckles are also formed. Usually, the speed Much faster than the eye can see, these interlaced markings are perceived entirely in a single instance. The speckle formed by the interference of the speckle itself is stable in space, but its peaks and troughs appear randomly. In multiple modes, these speckles overlap in the field of vision and average out quickly as the number of modes increases. . In this case, the eye perceives only a single light zone. Third, displays can be designed to use multi-mode waveguides instead of single-mode waveguides, since each waveguide mode has a different spatial allocation which forms different speckle groups, about ten groups of waveguide modes are sufficient to alleviate the speckle problem. The preferred embodiment uses a multiple length mode visible laser to reduce speckle. N. Hierarchy of distribution arrays
以彩色视频显示器当作叠层波导结构是有用的,其中每一层分配三个分开的组成色之一至每个像素位置。在优选实施例中,图72与图74以像素单元之一的1600与1601为例说明在彩色视频显示器中使用一个三维叠层阵列结构,此显示器所示是以聚合物膜1602、二氧化硅1604及传波导面1606、堆放在可溶性基片1620上的电极1607所构成,每层的像素定向开关被个别地定址,且同时被如图34所述的多重输出电压控制界面所控制。叠层波导1608在像素位置上可在45度角的表面上终止于非平面反射器或如前所述终结于分散器,以制成如图73中所示的永久的非平面TIR单元反射器1610,使光线1616穿过基片。另一替代方法,叠层的波导1608可终止于与外接萤光器的波导1612垂直的一表面或远离基片的涂层表面1614之光线反射1618,此结构类似于图64与图65所示。O、显示器制作步骤结论It is useful to think of a stacked waveguide structure as a color video display, where each layer assigns one of three separate constituent colors to each pixel location. In a preferred embodiment, Figures 72 and 74 illustrate the use of a three-dimensional stacked array structure in a color video display using one of the
优选实施例的平面制作步骤如下:The plane making steps of the preferred embodiment are as follows:
1用于TIR切换结构的基片的电场极、以及可切换光栅。1 Electric field electrodes for the substrate of the TIR switching structure, and a switchable grating.
2、用来制作波导和集成透镜的质子交换和热处理。2. Proton exchange and heat treatment for making waveguides and integrated lenses.
3、微镜片的刻蚀及其他刻蚀过的光栅。3. Etching of microlenses and other etched gratings.
4、波导外层硅二极管的置入。4. Insertion of silicon diodes in the outer layer of the waveguide.
5、用来制作提供微镜片反射及激励切换和调制器的电极的金属淀积。5. Metal deposition used to make electrodes that provide micromirror reflection and excitation switching and modulators.
6、驱动电子集成。6. Drive electronics integration.
7、激光合并与输入耦连。P、交替的实施例7. Laser merging and input coupling. P. Alternate Embodiment
本发明的替代实施例为使用光栅切换来合并如图75中的三色光束。此结构可连接图59中构件1004或被做在图60中基片1028或用于产生源1000。此三波导可为平行且共同形成分配输送器而形成多重波导分配开关1008,或三者可用在其他位置与其他环境。第一波导1172限制红的输入光线1182,第二波导1174限制绿的输入光线1184,第三波导1176限制蓝的输入光线1186。此分配开关由与图7、8、11、12与13所示者相似的三个电压激励光栅组成,此光栅是可切换的且有激励电极,每一光栅制造期间须将传播至波导之光线的波长反射之,这些光栅将光反射垂直于分配波导输送器,其反射为窄波带,因此超过光栅的其他波长之光束并不反射。从三个分配波导发射的光被一集成的光学透镜系统1178所收集并再聚焦,其将光束聚焦于像素波导1180以形成像素光束1188,本透镜系统应将反射光适当耦连于像素波导,因为反射光栅的长度较波导的宽度长许多,故呈现光束必须再聚焦于输出波导。构件1170为一个两色的光束组合器。An alternative embodiment of the present invention is to use raster switching to combine three color beams as in FIG. 75 . This structure can be connected to component 1004 in FIG. 59 or made as
光栅的形状、工作周期与区间应设计成使得反射模式剖面在穿过透镜系统后,可以和波导1180一致的优选模式剖面吻合,本分配波导应在最低层级模式下操作,以使反射模式有效地耦连于单一模式像素波导,对于最佳的光能耦连而言,平面波导应该被置于波导1172、1174、1176与透镜1178与波导1180间,本平面波导可交替地掩盖整个横跨结构1170的基片。The shape, duty cycle and interval of the grating should be designed so that the reflection mode profile can coincide with the preferred mode profile of the
集成透镜是一永久折射率调制结构,可以质子交换、非扩散或刻蚀来实现。因为高折射率折射的实现及比刻蚀透镜低的分散,故质子交换的技术是优选的。An integrated lens is a permanently index-modulating structure that can be realized by proton exchange, non-diffusion, or etching. The technique of proton exchange is preferred because of the realization of high index refraction and lower dispersion than etched lenses.
图36展示一波导分配结构的替代实施例,其中,两个或更多的光束被分开来限制于一组分配波导及一组像素波导,超过两组以上的分配波导与像素波导可以此种安排方式施行,本安排方式为增加的分配波导平行加入且在其他分配波导982与984之上,增加的像素波导交错于先前非对称损失的分配波导,类似在分配输送器997中将损失降至最低的方式。Figure 36 shows an alternative embodiment of a waveguide distribution structure in which two or more beams are split to confine one set of distribution waveguides and one set of pixel waveguides, more than two sets of distribution waveguides and pixel waveguides can be arranged in this way To implement this arrangement, the additional distribution waveguides are added in parallel and on top of the
本实施例特别对高密度显示器是有用的,显示器中开关983与985的长度大于所需像素空间,多重颜色可分配于上述每一波导或波导可一组三个,各代表一个颜色。若一个输出波导被用来携带激光光能自像素开关至非平面反射器,则非对称损失波导交错应被使用以避免像素波导的极大损失。This embodiment is particularly useful for high density displays where the length of the
分配波导的输送器在大型或高光学光能显示器中亦相当有用,其中在波导的光学破坏是必然的。若波导中激光密度超过破坏界限(约10MW每平方厘米在铌酸锂中),激光能会严重破坏波导而形成凹坑或破片或金属区,因此必须以两倍的安全系数保持强度在破坏界限之下,如此限制总光能于波导的传播(在4平方微米铌酸锂波导约800毫瓦),若需要更多能量,可用波导输送器携带总需求能量。Conveyors that distribute waveguides are also quite useful in large or high optical power displays where optical disruption of the waveguides is inevitable. If the laser density in the waveguide exceeds the damage limit (about 10MW per square centimeter in lithium niobate), the laser energy will severely damage the waveguide to form pits or fragments or metal areas, so the intensity must be kept at the damage limit with a double safety factor Under such limitations, the propagation of the total light energy in the waveguide is limited (approximately 800 milliwatts in a 4 square micron lithium niobate waveguide), and if more energy is required, the waveguide conveyor can be used to carry the total required energy.
其他实施例是一显示器,将被动光学能量路由器用于图59中的像素开关1018,先前已有被动光学能量路由器的例子,被动光学能量路由器将光线传播于像素波导的预定部分分离之,并将其导入至反射器波导,反射器波导可以是配何任一曲率的任一长度,其最后结束于一个非平面反射器。非平面反射器阵列的空间位置会形成一静止的影像,这些有其独特单一组的非平面反射器的每一个像素波导,是以一分配开关来连接其位置与一分配波导,与给定像素波导相关的影像可以驱动分配开关来进行打开与关闭的动作。Q、电瓦式显示器Another embodiment is a display that uses a passive optical energy router for
图76显示一显示器1200区分为电瓦1202的示意图,电瓦是像素的子阵列,其类似于图59所示的相关资料,可独立地被控制。数个电瓦可被安排在一起并被合并控制以形成一显示器,在本实施例中,每一个电瓦被制造于单一基片上以保持电瓦间像素的登录,因为显示器分割为电瓦对观看者而言应是不可见的,每一电瓦的安置在其本身的激光源,其来自于使用分配波导1206的二极管激光器阵列1204与1206,如此使得显示器发射较图59单一激光源实施例更大的激光光能,对一投射显示器亦特别有优势。FIG. 76 shows a schematic diagram of a
一般而言,电瓦可以不同方法区别,例如,他们可有不同的基片,不同的电极激励物,不同的激光源。图76中,电瓦以发射光穿过一个不同的波导来区别。二极管激光器阵列1204连接于波导输送器1206与1208,分配器1008与像素1016开关及电极皆未于图76中展示。In general, tiles can be distinguished in different ways, for example, they can have different substrates, different electrode stimuli, and different laser sources. In Figure 76, electric tiles are distinguished by emitting light through a different waveguide.
至少有一个波导自每一输送器携光线至阵列电瓦,光线波导分配可以多种方式安装,例如,在图76中低阶输送器的第一波导携光线至低阶右边的电瓦,下一个波导则携至左边,其他底线上的波导亦为如此,输送器1208可用于类似携光线至电瓦的下一行,仅部分展示于图中。其他输送器可被建构用于附加的电瓦,或是一单一激光阵列可用于提供光线至许多波导,然后输送至许多输送器再进入电瓦中,或是使用这些方法作一组合。At least one waveguide carries light from each conveyor to the array tiles. The fiber waveguide distribution can be arranged in a variety of ways, for example, in Figure 76 the first waveguide of the lower order conveyor carries light to the lower order right tile, below One waveguide is carried to the left, as are the other waveguides on the bottom line, a
供应每一波导的激光视显示器需要以视频讯息调制它,且其激励显示器选择行与列的电极在一给定的时间发光。对一全彩的显示器而言,几个波导可发出一给定的电瓦,或几个激光光束可被组合成一发给每一电瓦的波导。输送器1206被视为平行波导,因为它位于显示器的边缘且其空间是可运用的,在每一输送器中的波导的光线由开关1008与1016及电子元件进入电瓦的波导,输送器1208所示包括了一包装密度优化区的波导,其中波导的分离情形在横过显示器之前是被减弱的。The laser vision display that feeds each waveguide needs to modulate it with a video message, and this excites the electrodes of the display to select rows and columns to emit light at a given time. For a full-color display, several waveguides can emit a given electrical watt, or several laser beams can be combined into one waveguide that emits each electrical watt.
因为电瓦间波导的总空间较像素的分开为小,需要将波导紧密地结合在一起,例如,假若所有的空间皆可用,或许10个4微米波导能有效地符合100微米内在像素间隙。因为在非平面反射器1018与一相邻像素波导间有未使用的空间,启动沿着行方向的分配输送器是必须的。然而在一密集的显示器的行间,仅四或五个波导能适用,在往后的例子中,输送器可分隔出子输送器,其沿着相邻行的空间工作直到其到达电瓦为止。若输送器沿着列方向工作,至少交错一些反射器波导1017(因其偏斜角),为建立一单一显示器的补偿导致一额外的损失,这些与反射器波导的交错有非对称损失交错,但在反射器波导交错许多输送器界限的损失会大大地改变,当每一电瓦光能被分配波导光能所限制,显示器光能会随着增加耦连激光的波导数而增加。Since the total space of the waveguides between tiles is smaller than the separation of the pixels, the waveguides need to be tightly packed together, for example, if all the space is available, maybe ten 4 micron waveguides can effectively fit into the 100 micron inner pixel gap. Since there is unused space between the
如图所示,在电瓦中的每一分配波导与一光源耦连,光源是根据电瓦的像素激励组而调制,此电极激励组也根据显示器的电瓦而区隔。行与列的选择开关是在显示器电瓦之间周期地重复,每一电瓦的行与列可被同时消除,例如,若一VGA有16电瓦,每一电瓦含160×120像素,显示器上第160行与第120列是同时激励的。160行被连续扫描并重复,列的情况亦然,为达到80赫兹的平面率,行以1.53MHz被扫描,列以9.6KHz被扫描,在一正方形阵列中电瓦可彼此直接对齐堆叠上去或挨着堆叠,或可能在一交错阵列中。As shown, each distribution waveguide in the tile is coupled to a light source that is modulated according to the tile's pixel activation group, which is also segmented according to the display tile. The selection switch of row and column is periodically repeated between the display tiles, and the rows and columns of each tile can be eliminated at the same time. For example, if a VGA has 16 tiles, each tile contains 160×120 pixels,
电瓦显示器亦可用于制作大面积显示器,在本实施例中,多重像素阵列在分开的基片上被制造,且连接于玻璃或塑胶的第二基片,每一电瓦如图59所示制造,且作为一分开子显示区域方式操作,激光光可连接至每一电瓦来自于使用纤维连接激光光的外缘,它从光源至适当的电瓦。Electric tile displays can also be used to make large area displays. In this embodiment, multiple pixel arrays are fabricated on separate substrates and connected to a second substrate of glass or plastic. Each electric tile is fabricated as shown in FIG. 59 , and operating as a sub-display area, laser light can be connected to each electrical tile from the outer edge of the laser light using fibers connecting it from the light source to the appropriate electrical tile.
图77显示三色显示器的可替代实施例,其中分配反射器1272及1274仅反射来自分配波导1262与1264至像素波导1292与1294的部分光线。这种分配反射器并非一种开关而是一种永久被动性的光学能量路由器,其作用如同一具光束光能分配器。制造这类光能分配器的优选方法为在两个分配波导连接处刻蚀一条倾斜于分配波导45度的窄浅的沟槽。这种显示器的应用优选能通过调整每一个分配反射器的反射系数与之配合使用,如此可使大致相等的功率进入每一个与分配波导相连的波导1292与1294中。反射率的调整必须根据粘合在分配波导上反射器的数目与波导本身的长度及损失系数而定。每具反射器是利用改变刻蚀槽的宽度或深度而调整其反射率。若由于分配波导的交错产生如图36元件997所述的非对称性损失,则可将此多重分配波导器合并为单一结构体。本类的分配波导在相同交错的情况下为优选且低损失的波导。其他的分配型波导亦符合上述所言。FIG. 77 shows an alternative embodiment of a three-color display in which distribution reflectors 1272 and 1274 reflect only part of the light from distribution waveguides 1262 and 1264 to pixel waveguides 1292 and 1294 . The distribution reflector is not a switch but a permanent passive optical energy router that acts like a beam optical energy splitter. The preferred method of manufacturing this type of optical energy splitter is to etch a narrow and shallow groove inclined at 45 degrees to the distribution waveguide at the junction of the two distribution waveguides. Such display applications can preferably be used in conjunction with adjusting the reflection coefficient of each distribution reflector so that approximately equal power is introduced into each of the waveguides 1292 and 1294 connected to the distribution waveguides. The adjustment of reflectivity must be based on the number of reflectors bonded to the distribution waveguide and the length and loss coefficient of the waveguide itself. The reflectivity of each reflector is adjusted by changing the width or depth of the etched groove. If asymmetry loss occurs due to interleaving of the distribution waveguides as described by
此外,每个像素波导包含一个分离调制器1282与1284,因为在本结构体中有一阵列的调制器,因此,对于每一调制后光束的光能遗弃控制是必须的,如此才能够去除不必要的光线及防止造成背景光线。这种光能遗弃控制可由几种相互替代的方式实施。它可以是波导,它能够传播光线远离调制器、穿过像素且离开(或穿透)光能吸收基片的边缘。若此波导损失足够小,则是好的选择,但是若损失大时,则波导会随着光能吸收基片的长度增加而将大部分的光能遗弃。光能遗弃控制也可以是一种光束折射器,类似于图69与图70所提及的结构体。如上所述,不同于显示方向的其他光能必须遗弃,遗弃的光能应尽可能地吸收。其他可替代的光能遗弃控制是一种置放于每一个调制器附近的吸收物质。波导能引导去除光线至一个填满吸收物质的凹槽,或穿过一个非扩散的吸收区域,如上述铬涂料区域。像素开关与非平面反射器同样是优选实施例,如图59所示。本结构的优点之一是高速驱动电子元件所需的高电流拖动效应可被消除而有利于低频(38.4千赫兹)调制器阵列。同前所述,像素开关行对于一个以80赫兹扫描率的简易VGA而言是以384千赫兹驱动的。R、投射显示器In addition, each pixel waveguide contains a separate modulator 1282 and 1284. Since there is an array of modulators in this structure, light energy abandonment control for each modulated beam is necessary to remove unnecessary light and prevent background light. Such light energy abandonment control can be implemented in several alternative ways. It may be a waveguide capable of propagating light away from the modulator, through the pixel and off (or through) the edge of the light energy absorbing substrate. If the loss of the waveguide is small enough, it is a good choice, but if the loss is large, the waveguide will discard most of the light energy as the length of the light energy absorbing substrate increases. The light energy abandonment control can also be a kind of beam refractor, similar to the structures mentioned in FIG. 69 and FIG. 70 . As mentioned above, light energy other than the display direction must be discarded, and the discarded light energy should be absorbed as much as possible. An alternative light energy rejection control is an absorbing substance placed near each modulator. The waveguide can guide the removed light into a groove filled with an absorbing substance, or through a non-diffuse absorbing region, such as the chrome-painted region described above. Pixel switches are also preferred embodiments as are non-planar reflectors, as shown in FIG. 59 . One of the advantages of this configuration is that the high current drag required to drive the electronics at high speeds can be eliminated in favor of low frequency (38.4 kHz) modulator arrays. As before, the pixel switch row is driven at 384 kHz for a simple VGA with a scan rate of 80 Hz. R, projection display
图78为一个激光bar-pumped单色显示器的实施例。激光器1302是一个光源,它在一个晶片上包含多个半导体二极管激光组,且与显示器中基片1300一侧的像素波导器阵列耦连。分配波导则不需要如此的实施例。在激光光束与显示器的制造期间,激光增幅器在激光光束的分离程度是低显示器的波导分离程度调整,调整至波导器大致相等为止。光束上的激光阵列与像素波导阵列排列成对。耦连可利用一种边耦连的方式实现,此方式使得光能通过铌酸锂晶片(突接耦连或透镜耦连)一边的波导器端点而与波导耦连。另有一种平面耦连的方式实现耦连,即光能透过铌酸锂晶片的表面与波导耦连。每个像素波导优选能横跨过一个调制器1306与作为二极管激光器频率稳定的频率选择反射器1304。沿着每一波导制造一组像素转接阵列1016。每一个像素开关反射光束至一个非平面反射器1018。同时,一串列的非平面反射器1019被驱动,以至于所有的调制器同时动作。Figure 78 is an embodiment of a laser bar-pumped monochrome display.
多重激光束在本结构中可作简单的变化,可被用来作为单一显示器的光能,更可用来增加总有效光能。若激光激发电极能被有区别地制造且容易独立地接进,则调制器可在激光光束中交替地工作,然而与镓砷调制器比较,把铌酸锂基片上的调制器达到控制电子元件是比较容易的,因为在相同夹层下自表面固定电子到调制器的控制电极,其定路线工作是容易的。若激光频率加倍,则极化频率加倍区也会随着波导、支撑物及上述控制机构周期性地予以处理。最后,激光增幅器可耦连一组波导阵列,这类波导可形成分配输送装置而此装置连接电瓦覆盖的显示器。事实上,图78所示的显示器即是以有单行多列的电瓦所组成。Multiple laser beams can be simply changed in this structure, and can be used as the light energy of a single display, and can be used to increase the total effective light energy. The modulator can be operated alternately in the laser beam if the laser excitation electrodes can be fabricated differently and easily accessed independently, however compared to gallium arsenic modulators, the modulator on the lithium niobate substrate reaches the control electronics is relatively easy, because the routing work is easy from the immobilized electrons from the surface to the control electrode of the modulator under the same interlayer. If the laser frequency is doubled, the polarization frequency doubled area will also be processed periodically along with the waveguide, support and the above-mentioned control mechanism. Finally, a laser amplifier can be coupled to an array of waveguides that form a distribution delivery device connected to a tile-covered display. In fact, the display shown in Figure 78 is composed of electrical tiles with a single row and multiple columns.
在图78结构下的显示器光能需求非常高,因为存在着多重激光光源且没有任何一个波导限制其他众多波导器光能的需求。高光能显示器用于投射显示器是相当特殊的,本显示器的考虑是使用技术上共知的标准投射光学技术投射到与基片分离的扩散式屏幕上。本投射光学技术收集自显示器发射的大部分光线且再将其聚焦于屏幕上,使得观众能直接看见,例如,本荧光屏可作为大型投射视频屏幕或电影院中的屏幕。对一投射显示器而言,从个别像素发射光线的固定角度应尽量小,亦即暗示着平滑的表面应该用于非平面反射器。对于反射波波导有一较大的交错区域也有其优势,即其可减少散失而使像素或反射波导变尖细亦可减少散失。The light power requirement of the display under the structure of Fig. 78 is very high, because there are multiple laser light sources and no one waveguide limits the light power demand of many other waveguides. High optical power displays are quite specific for use in projection displays, and the present display considerations are projected onto a diffused screen separate from the substrate using standard projection optics techniques well known in the art. This projection optics technology collects most of the light emitted from the display and focuses it on the screen so that it is directly visible to the viewer, for example, the phosphor screen can be used as a large projection video screen or as a screen in a movie theater. For a projection display, the fixed angle at which rays are emitted from individual pixels should be as small as possible, which implies that smooth surfaces should be used for non-planar reflectors. There is also an advantage to having a larger interleaving area for reflective waveguides in that it reduces loss and tapering the pixels or reflective waveguides also reduces loss.
图78中的显像器可增为全彩,即加入每一颜色的像素波导即可。波导外观的尺寸须为可使三个独立的像素波导(各代表一种颜色)紧密有效地合并在一起。例如,若激光光束1302产生蓝色,则一个产生绿色的激光阵列可与显示器的另一边耦连,其耦连技术如同蓝色激光光束,但是随着绿色像素波导与蓝色像素波导器相互交错,其传播方向相对而言为反方向。如上所述,蓝色与绿色激光阵列可能包含有变倍频率区域的红外线激光阵列来产生可见光。若红光激光阵列用不同技术与显示器波导耦连,则红色激光阵列也可同时与像素波导的交错阵列耦连。例如,若蓝色与绿色光诉呸为边耦连,红色光束可为表面耦连,在表面耦连处理上,蓝色和绿色波导可通过红色激光光束而没有实质上的损失。The display device in Fig. 78 can be increased to full color, that is, adding pixel waveguides of each color to get final product. The dimensions of the waveguide appearance must be such that three separate pixel waveguides (one for each color) are tightly and efficiently merged together. For example, if
图79与图80显示一个表面耦连处理器1310,在1310中激光光束是耦连一个平面基片的波导。三组激光束1312、1314及1316耦连于波导阵列1318的第三组波导,每一激光光束有一波导阵列,其间隔与被设计来接受激光光束输出的表面耦连镜之间隔相等。图例中激光光束1312有两组波导器1320与1322,但整组的激光光束可以有更多的激光增幅器,1320与1322在基片上与波导1324与1326并列,激光光束1312位列于表面耦连镜阵列1328与1330上,如此使自激光波导1320与1322发射的光束从1328与1330耦连镜中被反射成一反射光束,其以同轴的方式传播至波导1324与1326。波导1320、1322、1324与1326的大小被调整至大约使得此类反射光束耦连情况的最大值。远离表面耦连镜的残余波导可于其他目的需求下减弱,如为了激光光束1312的放大性能及往后在基片1332中频率的加倍或调制或切换或显示。Figures 79 and 80 show a surface coupled
其他的二极管条1314与1316亦可如所示的类似方法在基片上与波导耦连而且,波导与不同的二极管条可以不同的方式交错组成。
图80所示为一个扩张垂直区域,其穿过图79中位于旋转镜1330之一的构件。表面耦连镜1330的制造可参考图62-67所述之任一项技术。涂层1334在波导1326上,此涂层是有较低折射率的透明物质,例如硅或岩土,其厚度足以包含数个在1326传播下的系数衰减长度,若在涂层上有受损的构造,对波导1326的损失不致造成重大的影响。反射涂层1331适度地涂在1330中有角的表面上,垂直面1333不可涂上任何反射涂料,所以涂层1331必须用在某角度上。若为降低1333的菲涅尔耦连损失,则可在1333的表面涂上不反射材料。涂层1336优选能用于二极管激光器的前头的小平面上,如此可使接触于基片1332的激光小平面不致受损。若为安装容易,则固定座1338可通过耦连器1340贴在1312的表面及基片1332的一面,若1338有良好的热导系数且与散热的热导体连接,则对于二极管激光器的散热亦相当有用。S、立体显示器FIG. 80 shows an expanded vertical region passing through the member located in one of the
利用在此阐述的阵列技术可使三维的立体影像显示,在立体显示中,每一双眼睛观察到一个稍有不同的影像,这在过去的相关现有技术中已经完成,例如,投射两正交偏光的影像于屏幕上,再戴上正交偏光的眼镜来看屏幕,这项技术由于头部运动造成问题,因头部运动会将两影像各自旋转部分进入彼此之间,替代现有技术的方法是使用一组圆形镜片的眼镜,其包括对两眼独立开关的光阀,也就是说,当左眼光阀打开,右眼光阀是关闭的,反之亦然。一个对两眼产生不同交替影像的同步显示器即可创造立体效果。这项技术受到显示器切换速度的影响而有所限制,因为先前的残影会重叠于另一双眼睛中的新影像而产生一个混乱的影像,已被用来构成圆形镜片眼镜的进一步方法是包括两个分开的小型显示器(LCD或CRT),其对每双眼睛均同时显示两个影像,本项技术和现有技术一样有重量及价格上的问题。在每次显示中,一双眼仅看一个影像,因另一影像已被某些物体遮住。Three-dimensional stereoscopic image display can be achieved using the array technology described herein. In stereoscopic display, each pair of eyes observes a slightly different image. This has been done in the past related prior art, for example, projecting two orthogonal The polarized image is displayed on the screen, and then crossed polarized glasses are worn to look at the screen. This technology causes problems due to head movement, because the head movement will put the rotating parts of the two images into each other, replacing the existing technology. Glasses that use a set of circular lenses that include light valves that switch independently for both eyes, that is, when the light valve for the left eye is open, the light valve for the right eye is closed, and vice versa. A synchronized display that produces different alternating images for the two eyes creates the stereoscopic effect. This technique is limited by the switching speed of the display, as the previous afterimage is superimposed on the new image in the other eye to create a chaotic image. Further methods that have been used to construct circular lens glasses include Two separate small displays (LCD or CRT), which simultaneously display two images for each eye, present the same weight and price problems as the prior art. In each display, only one image is seen by each eye because the other image is obscured by some objects.
同样的效果可由以下所述的实施例实现。在图例59中说明的优选实施例,自显示器传播至观察者的光线可被设计为偏光化的而无须再使用薄膜偏光器,如此可使得有关立体显示器偏光技术实现而没有初始用CRT或LCD显示器所造成效率的损失,因为它们必须使用薄膜偏光器形成偏光效果。若TIR开关被使用,则两组偏光可被定路线而穿过二元偏光支持波导,但TIR开关的反射系数须远大于TM偏光(铌酸锂基片的Z剖面),如此可以以纯粹的TM设计一个有效的显示器。若开关为闸刀式开关,仅有一偏光可自90度波导的连接处(布儒斯特角)反射,伴随着被TM偏光(在铌酸锂基片的Z剖面是优选剖面)的光束。The same effects can be achieved by the embodiments described below. In the preferred embodiment illustrated in Fig. 59, the light traveling from the display to the viewer can be designed to be polarized without the use of thin-film polarizers, thus enabling the implementation of polarized technology for stereoscopic displays without the initial use of CRT or LCD displays The resulting loss of efficiency because they must use thin-film polarizers to form the polarizing effect. If a TIR switch is used, the two sets of polarized light can be routed through the binary polarized light support waveguide, but the reflection coefficient of the TIR switch must be much larger than that of the TM polarized light (Z-section of the lithium niobate substrate), so that it can be purely TM designs an efficient display. If the switch is a knife switch, only one polarized light can be reflected from the 90 degree waveguide junction (Brewster's angle), along with the beam that is TM polarized (the Z profile is the preferred profile in the lithium niobate substrate).
因为波导开关有一短的交互作用长度,在此所述的技术中一个像素占有空间小于100微米是可能的。如此使得屏幕对角线小于三英寸的VGA高解析的显示器可被制造,这些小型的显示器可被装置于上述现有技术的圆形镜片的眼镜上。Because waveguide switches have a short interaction length, a pixel footprint of less than 100 microns is possible in the technique described here. In this way, VGA high-resolution displays with a screen diagonal of less than three inches can be manufactured, and these small displays can be installed on the above-mentioned prior art glasses with circular lenses.
本显示器在此应用中优于CRT或LCD之处是其基片实际是透明的,因为非平面反射器的不透光区域产生一个像素,因此透明基片能使像素之间的面积100倍地缩小,也就是不透光显示器的面积小于百分之一。若扩散式屏幕当作图63所述的非平面反射器的部分而被制造,则若观察者将眼睛聚焦于影像平面外的一点,显示器会出现透明的现象。在此状况下,抬头型或“视通”头部固定型的显示器可以实现,这种技术可被应用于多种显示器,包括虚拟实际情景、家庭娱乐及军用飞机。The advantage of this display over a CRT or LCD in this application is that the substrate is actually transparent because the opaque area of the non-planar reflector creates a pixel, so the transparent substrate can make the area between pixels 100 times smaller Shrinking, that is, the area of the opaque display is less than one percent. If a diffuse screen is fabricated as part of the non-planar reflector described in Figure 63, the display will appear transparent if the viewer focuses his eyes on a point outside the image plane. In this case, a head-up or "view-through" head-mounted display can be realized, and this technology can be applied to a variety of displays, including virtual reality scenarios, home entertainment and military aircraft.
图81阐述一个紧密立体影像显示器的实施例,本立体显示器包含两组像素阵列1706与1708,其使用相同的设计制作并定向于两分离的基片1702与1704上,如图81斧形记号所指出,阵列1708相对于阵列1706已被旋转90度,如此则由阵列1706发射至观察者的光线已与阵列1708所发射的光线正交偏光化。显示器的角为如线1710所示的直角,其可使两影像有好的重合作用。因为基片厚度小于0.5毫米,由组合显示器所发射的光线会出现来自几乎相同平面的现象,只要阵列1708用如图64与65所示的非平面反射器而阵列1706使用如图62与63示的非平面反射器,可以实现对两个阵列有几乎相同的发射平面。虽然像素的正方形阵列已由图例说明,只是确认每一个阵列的非平面反射器的排列能认阵列1706与阵列1708发射的光线正交偏光化,则任合纵横比皆可运用。Figure 81 illustrates an embodiment of a compact stereoscopic display comprising two sets of pixel arrays 1706 and 1708 fabricated using the same design and oriented on two separate substrates 1702 and 1704 as indicated by the axes in Figure 81 Note that array 1708 has been rotated 90 degrees relative to array 1706 so that the light emitted by array 1706 to the viewer has been polarized orthogonally to the light emitted by array 1708 . The corners of the display are right angles as indicated by line 1710, which allow for good registration of the two images. Because the substrate thickness is less than 0.5 mm, the light emitted by the combined display will appear to come from nearly the same plane, as long as array 1708 uses non-planar reflectors as shown in FIGS. With non-planar reflectors, it is possible to achieve nearly identical emission planes for both arrays. Although a square array of pixels is illustrated, any aspect ratio may be used provided that the arrangement of the non-planar reflectors for each array allows for orthogonal polarization of light emitted by arrays 1706 and 1708.
两组阵列的操作如同图59中显示器所使用的技术。观察者戴着一付有偏光器的眼镜,偏光器为正交排列,如此一双眼睛仅能看到一个阵列所发出的光线,每一阵列所显示的影像用已知的技术格式化以达到立体视觉效果,若一个透镜被用来投射影像平面至一较大的观察屏幕,则本实施例可用来作为直接观察或一个立体投射的应用。The operation of the two arrays is similar to the technique used for the display in FIG. 59 . The viewer wears a pair of glasses with polarizers arranged orthogonally so that a pair of eyes can only see the light emitted by one array, and the image displayed by each array is formatted using known techniques to achieve stereoscopic For visual effects, this embodiment can be used for direct viewing or a stereoscopic projection application if a lens is used to project the image plane onto a larger viewing screen.
本发明的解释请参照所述的特定实施例,其他实施例在相关技艺的一般技术中已非常明白,因此,除了附加的权利要求所指定(其构成本发明描述的一部分)外,本发明并不受其他限制。The present invention is explained with reference to the specific embodiments described. Other embodiments are well within the ordinary skill of the relevant art, therefore, the present invention is not intended to be described except as specified in the appended claims (which form a part of the description of the invention). No other restrictions apply.
Claims (56)
Priority Applications (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN 95194990 CN1163000A (en) | 1994-09-09 | 1995-09-06 | Display panel with electrically controlled waveguide routing |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| US08/303,899 | 1994-09-09 | ||
| CN 95194990 CN1163000A (en) | 1994-09-09 | 1995-09-06 | Display panel with electrically controlled waveguide routing |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| CN1163000A true CN1163000A (en) | 1997-10-22 |
Family
ID=5082875
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN 95194990 Pending CN1163000A (en) | 1994-09-09 | 1995-09-06 | Display panel with electrically controlled waveguide routing |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| CN (1) | CN1163000A (en) |
Cited By (21)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN100539634C (en) * | 2006-04-28 | 2009-09-09 | 瑞昱半导体股份有限公司 | Picture display device and display method thereof |
| CN101416227B (en) * | 2005-12-06 | 2011-02-23 | 杜比实验室特许公司 | Modular Electronic Display |
| WO2012089059A1 (en) * | 2010-12-27 | 2012-07-05 | 上海丽恒光微电子科技有限公司 | Mems display |
| CN103901559A (en) * | 2012-12-28 | 2014-07-02 | 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 | Optical coupling device |
| CN107329133A (en) * | 2017-06-21 | 2017-11-07 | 西安电子科技大学 | Rectifiable imaging laser radar receiver and signal processing method |
| CN110431481A (en) * | 2017-12-28 | 2019-11-08 | 松下知识产权经营株式会社 | Optical equipment |
| CN110785812A (en) * | 2017-06-09 | 2020-02-11 | 欧普有限责任公司 | Data security device with analog components |
| CN110829997A (en) * | 2018-08-07 | 2020-02-21 | 上海珏芯光电科技有限公司 | Film bulk acoustic resonator and method for manufacturing the same |
| CN111158172A (en) * | 2020-01-15 | 2020-05-15 | 中国科学院福建物质结构研究所 | Array substrate unit and preparation method thereof, array substrate and display control system |
| CN111208597A (en) * | 2018-11-20 | 2020-05-29 | 现代自动车株式会社 | Vehicle display device, vehicle display control device and system including both devices |
| CN111217151A (en) * | 2020-01-08 | 2020-06-02 | 上海向隆电子科技有限公司 | Stacking processing method and stacking processing equipment for wedge-shaped light guide plate |
| CN112020644A (en) * | 2018-04-25 | 2020-12-01 | 斯派克特罗姆公司 | Tomography system and method for determining characteristics of non-uniform sample using guided electromagnetic field |
| CN112584748A (en) * | 2018-08-13 | 2021-03-30 | 索尼公司 | Medical system, medical light source device and method in medical light source device |
| CN112733366A (en) * | 2021-01-12 | 2021-04-30 | 中国人民解放军陆军军事交通学院军事交通运输研究所 | Novel real-time high-explosive-bomb fragment damage simulation method |
| CN113643654A (en) * | 2021-08-17 | 2021-11-12 | 天津工业大学 | A power loss optimization circuit for passive drive circuit of microdisplay array |
| CN114067730A (en) * | 2021-11-17 | 2022-02-18 | 合肥达视光电科技有限公司 | Point-to-point single-side transparent film display screen control circuit |
| CN114070247A (en) * | 2020-08-03 | 2022-02-18 | 三安日本科技株式会社 | Elastic wave device |
| CN114843869A (en) * | 2021-02-01 | 2022-08-02 | 济南量子技术研究院 | Nonlinear crystal ridge waveguide device for ultrashort pulse broadband frequency multiplication and preparation method thereof |
| CN114868074A (en) * | 2019-12-27 | 2022-08-05 | 浜松光子学株式会社 | Spatial light modulator and light emitting device |
| CN115004491A (en) * | 2020-01-20 | 2022-09-02 | 浜松光子学株式会社 | Light source module |
| CN117348160A (en) * | 2023-10-08 | 2024-01-05 | 广州铌奥光电子有限公司 | Vertical optical coupling device based on thin film lithium niobate waveguide and preparation method thereof |
-
1995
- 1995-09-06 CN CN 95194990 patent/CN1163000A/en active Pending
Cited By (31)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN101416227B (en) * | 2005-12-06 | 2011-02-23 | 杜比实验室特许公司 | Modular Electronic Display |
| CN100539634C (en) * | 2006-04-28 | 2009-09-09 | 瑞昱半导体股份有限公司 | Picture display device and display method thereof |
| WO2012089059A1 (en) * | 2010-12-27 | 2012-07-05 | 上海丽恒光微电子科技有限公司 | Mems display |
| CN102566040A (en) * | 2010-12-27 | 2012-07-11 | 上海丽恒光微电子科技有限公司 | Micro electro mechanical system (MEMS) display |
| CN102566040B (en) * | 2010-12-27 | 2014-01-08 | 上海丽恒光微电子科技有限公司 | Micro electro mechanical system (MEMS) display |
| CN103901559B (en) * | 2012-12-28 | 2017-02-08 | 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 | Optical coupling device |
| CN103901559A (en) * | 2012-12-28 | 2014-07-02 | 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 | Optical coupling device |
| CN110785812A (en) * | 2017-06-09 | 2020-02-11 | 欧普有限责任公司 | Data security device with analog components |
| CN110785812B (en) * | 2017-06-09 | 2023-12-01 | 欧普有限责任公司 | Data security device with analog components |
| CN107329133A (en) * | 2017-06-21 | 2017-11-07 | 西安电子科技大学 | Rectifiable imaging laser radar receiver and signal processing method |
| CN107329133B (en) * | 2017-06-21 | 2020-05-12 | 西安电子科技大学 | Corrective imaging lidar receiver and signal processing method |
| CN110431481A (en) * | 2017-12-28 | 2019-11-08 | 松下知识产权经营株式会社 | Optical equipment |
| CN110431481B (en) * | 2017-12-28 | 2023-12-08 | 松下知识产权经营株式会社 | Optical equipment |
| CN112020644A (en) * | 2018-04-25 | 2020-12-01 | 斯派克特罗姆公司 | Tomography system and method for determining characteristics of non-uniform sample using guided electromagnetic field |
| CN110829997A (en) * | 2018-08-07 | 2020-02-21 | 上海珏芯光电科技有限公司 | Film bulk acoustic resonator and method for manufacturing the same |
| CN110829997B (en) * | 2018-08-07 | 2023-04-28 | 芯知微(上海)电子科技有限公司 | Thin film bulk acoustic resonator and method of manufacturing the same |
| CN112584748A (en) * | 2018-08-13 | 2021-03-30 | 索尼公司 | Medical system, medical light source device and method in medical light source device |
| US12336693B2 (en) | 2018-08-13 | 2025-06-24 | Sony Corporation | Medical system, medical light source apparatus, and method in medical light source apparatus |
| CN111208597A (en) * | 2018-11-20 | 2020-05-29 | 现代自动车株式会社 | Vehicle display device, vehicle display control device and system including both devices |
| CN111208597B (en) * | 2018-11-20 | 2023-06-23 | 现代自动车株式会社 | Vehicle display device, vehicle display control device, and system including both devices |
| CN114868074A (en) * | 2019-12-27 | 2022-08-05 | 浜松光子学株式会社 | Spatial light modulator and light emitting device |
| CN111217151A (en) * | 2020-01-08 | 2020-06-02 | 上海向隆电子科技有限公司 | Stacking processing method and stacking processing equipment for wedge-shaped light guide plate |
| CN111158172A (en) * | 2020-01-15 | 2020-05-15 | 中国科学院福建物质结构研究所 | Array substrate unit and preparation method thereof, array substrate and display control system |
| CN115004491A (en) * | 2020-01-20 | 2022-09-02 | 浜松光子学株式会社 | Light source module |
| CN114070247A (en) * | 2020-08-03 | 2022-02-18 | 三安日本科技株式会社 | Elastic wave device |
| CN112733366A (en) * | 2021-01-12 | 2021-04-30 | 中国人民解放军陆军军事交通学院军事交通运输研究所 | Novel real-time high-explosive-bomb fragment damage simulation method |
| CN114843869A (en) * | 2021-02-01 | 2022-08-02 | 济南量子技术研究院 | Nonlinear crystal ridge waveguide device for ultrashort pulse broadband frequency multiplication and preparation method thereof |
| CN113643654A (en) * | 2021-08-17 | 2021-11-12 | 天津工业大学 | A power loss optimization circuit for passive drive circuit of microdisplay array |
| CN114067730B (en) * | 2021-11-17 | 2022-07-29 | 合肥达视光电科技有限公司 | Point-to-point single-side transparent film display screen control circuit |
| CN114067730A (en) * | 2021-11-17 | 2022-02-18 | 合肥达视光电科技有限公司 | Point-to-point single-side transparent film display screen control circuit |
| CN117348160A (en) * | 2023-10-08 | 2024-01-05 | 广州铌奥光电子有限公司 | Vertical optical coupling device based on thin film lithium niobate waveguide and preparation method thereof |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| CN1157659A (en) | A method of controlling light energy using polarized structures | |
| CN1163000A (en) | Display panel with electrically controlled waveguide routing | |
| US5544268A (en) | Display panel with electrically-controlled waveguide-routing | |
| US6167169A (en) | Scanning method and architecture for display | |
| US5647036A (en) | Projection display with electrically-controlled waveguide routing | |
| US5835458A (en) | Solid state optical data reader using an electric field for routing control | |
| CN1164898A (en) | Beam directors controllable with polarized structures | |
| US5504772A (en) | Laser with electrically-controlled grating reflector | |
| US5488681A (en) | Method for controllable optical power splitting | |
| US5652817A (en) | Optical power splitter with electically-controlled switching structures | |
| US5581642A (en) | Optical frequency channel selection filter with electronically-controlled grating structures | |
| US5491762A (en) | ATM switch with electrically-controlled waveguide-routing | |
| JP2003295153A (en) | Optical deflection apparatus and optical deflection method | |
| CN1599877A (en) | Liquid crystal variable wavelength filter unit, and driving method thereof | |
| US20050002605A1 (en) | Light control element and light control device | |
| JPH04181231A (en) | Waveguide type electrooptical device | |
| JPWO2010001852A1 (en) | Light modulator | |
| JP2013195687A (en) | Optical switching element | |
| JPH0336529A (en) | Optical deflecting device | |
| JPWO2004097507A1 (en) | Optical coupling element, photorefractive element including the same, and optical information processing apparatus |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| C06 | Publication | ||
| PB01 | Publication | ||
| C10 | Entry into substantive examination | ||
| SE01 | Entry into force of request for substantive examination | ||
| ASS | Succession or assignment of patent right |
Owner name: GEMFIRE CO.,LTD. Free format text: FORMER OWNER: DEACON RESEARCH Effective date: 20011122 |
|
| C41 | Transfer of patent application or patent right or utility model | ||
| TA01 | Transfer of patent application right |
Effective date of registration: 20011122 Applicant after: Gemfire Corp. Applicant before: Deacon Research |
|
| C02 | Deemed withdrawal of patent application after publication (patent law 2001) | ||
| WD01 | Invention patent application deemed withdrawn after publication |